--- language: "en" --- # How can we help? ## How can we help? * ### [Start Here: Yarken Overview](https://help.yarken.com/yd/start-here-yarken-overview.md) Welcome to Yarken Yarken helps teams bring technology spend, planning, analytics, FinOps, chargeback, and AI driven insight into one connected operating model.... * #### [Platform Capabilities](https://help.yarken.com/yd/platform-capabilities.md) Explore Yarken's features across AI, financial workflows, and platform controls to understand how the app helps you plan, optimize, manage, and govern your tec... * #### [Yarken Help](https://help.yarken.com/yd/yarken-help.md) Getting Started Home Reports and dashboards Analytics Planning Business Cases Chargeback Admin Navigation and filters Ask Yarken * #### [Yarken SaaS Onboarding](https://help.yarken.com/yd/yarken-saas-onboarding.md) Who should use this guide? This guide is intended for Yarken Administrators responsible for onboarding users, configuring tenant access, and managing identity ... * #### [How to guides](https://help.yarken.com/yd/how-to-guides.md) Integration Connectors and Automation Guide Load Master Data Use Upload Rules Rule types Manage Upload Rules Create cloud asset using Upload Rule Configure Not... * #### [FinOps](https://help.yarken.com/yd/finops.md) FinOps in Yarken Use this page as a guide to understanding cloud cost, usage, ownership, and optimization across the Yarken operating model. FinOps helps teams... * #### [Technology Business Management](https://help.yarken.com/yd/technology-business-management.md) Technology Business Management gives teams a consistent way to explain technology spend, connect costs to value, and manage financial accountability across IT,... * #### [Yarken Glossary](https://help.yarken.com/yd/yarken-glossary.md) Use this glossary to understand terminology used across the Yarken platform, Help Center, product guides, reports, planning workflows, FinOps processes, TBM mo... * #### [Changelog](https://help.yarken.com/yd/release-notes.md) This page records all officially released versions of the Yarken application, along with their key changes, enhancements, and fixes. What's coming in Yarken 20... * #### [Support](https://help.yarken.com/yd/support.md) For support, please send an email to support@yarken.com. --- language: "en" --- # 2022 Changelog ## DECEMBER 26, 2022 Ability to distribute to solutions during tower allocation ![image-20230113-095732.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e7b67776b5caca16c95a99f23e8559416439c7ad63761f230c8f93f912de855e/image-20230113-095732.png?cb=8d095996aab144981ebb86f46943b741) New Filter Capabilities for Application Portfolio ![image-20230113-095410.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b74c6774c150b7683420edca02bc9ab4fc3df9088d03aeee5dbd4d0952051579/image-20230113-095410.png?cb=422fef267049f134799488d05e5dbaa4) ## DECEMBER 20, 2022 Introduced the ability to distribute cloud spend and other spend by loading an additional file (cloud usage file) ![image-20230113-094716.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_703b1fabe27a7a8602e650d707fcce7836517987c86630944f7f7be29deca1d4/image-20230113-094716.png?cb=4a4fc05a1cea39b5fadf04c71349b8b2) Load the file and map the columns ![image-20230113-094806.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_661b79bd1ab4a848c505578b3f7b120e999690876d3bd5fafffae0f1a0e0aa2a/image-20230113-094806.png?cb=2cf69ce415569ee0b98dadc203d51dd1) Create Tower rules ![image-20230113-094838.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6ef94acd3535553322b3f625d1398f072028b99554d965e94f57d8bbdec451f4/image-20230113-094838.png?cb=580d020fbb18f6d610b01c04fca1aa6e) Confirm and alter tower rules ![image-20230113-094911.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_51bda2bdae48fb75c368b2befce880d470ac8eb6033a72a38cef20ccef2b4e40/image-20230113-094911.png?cb=de98dc6c2246bf0c8c61833342a431c3) Load another file for the next month ## DECEMBER 12, 2022 Introducing the YäRKEN Designer! Our new space to design your IT Spend landscape. ![image-20221215-003001.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6c3a63d75f56e904d5fb183c423fc72459d9d1f02328418c2f195b7bca7f1635/image-20221215-003001.png?cb=3158136cb08550154ac33e99993120fb) ## DECEMBER 5, 2022 * Table column selection retained across the session. * KPIs handle scenarios where there is no prior year spend or budget. * Security: Viewer users needed viewer role assigned explicitly to access the system. ## NOVEMBER 28, 2022 Mobile Support Homepage and Reports ![image-20221215-002700.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_90e30d3ae5738b46d689cb0f92e91a09a1d76ada165d0c9d0a1b15e35f058e95/image-20221215-002700.png?cb=64c3a43c0f424d30c870dc91e4040c13) ## NOVEMBER 21, 2022 Ability to delete Master data in a more efficient way ![image-20221124-003838.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_99de306f64388ca7ceda33cf89a1d73b16319d2187db4a9b6cb94f6c8e63fddf/image-20221124-003838.png?cb=81d3b4c5aef95ec6b97aeab8dba75bf0) ## NOVEMBER 15, 2022 Added Vendor Spend filter to the application portfolio dashboard. ![image-20221124-003651.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_33421bba78efc4e943cddeeaa92f16121a42e65a7c86ba5cb7281c069c268e96/image-20221124-003651.png?cb=26e8364971c6e0461e4285639c469ada) ## NOVEMBER 4, 2022 Improved the Bread Crumb Navigation by combining dashboard title with Navigation elements ![image-20221124-003025.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_672ea9d10a871d0eb3d13517208f2079911b081c69fb6397e6be7bf4a320f59a/image-20221124-003025.png?cb=60a51bca2fa8197dc1c81811a696ed91) Redesigned Contracted Spend dashboard and removed the requirement to allocate spend to towers. ![image-20221124-003157.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6c5c099c83748b8794be1585a08f2c5eb889b1cafa7d9f7fc95a542317128519/image-20221124-003157.png?cb=749553f813fceff4898b6be4b0ce07e6) ## OCTOBER 31, 2022 Ability to combine analytics filters by using OR ![image-20221124-002855.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2400f171c0077851f2d22df4876d8065969e2d5bd4a4fdf2c29514e5d874109b/image-20221124-002855.png?cb=e80e8e8ebdc08c7afa305106c5ca542d) ## OCTOBER 21, 2022 All Dashboards allow filtering by up-to month for current financial year ![image-20221124-002015.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3288603c32cf333678de3dd3108ddee7e0cef95a548bea8610acfa076420ddeb/image-20221124-002015.png?cb=9eb458282d7ff18b3172cfe90952547f) Responsive Menu for Mobile Devices ![image-20221124-002134.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_32f1693d7c7d276be2cfd29a2687cb1e819108b1bf085c8aab5db2069f9183d1/image-20221124-002134.png?cb=ead6d2055366d5bbbbdbb3012f65fa2f) New Finance Dashboards for Accounts and Cost Centers ![image-20221124-002513.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_79b645ab09d7b7b034aaf27ffbca54b9a420271d3c115572148601c6826841dd/image-20221124-002513.png?cb=d6661cdf62ac25a262604ec5d3f5ba09) ![image-20221124-002556.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_83b4024cf89084b948ad73e9eeb2321517bc26946d3d7a7adf3d234c963feb2f/image-20221124-002556.png?cb=129a9c2a694d0c87489419f71b2d65e2) ## OCTOBER 17, 2022 ### Introduction of Yarken's Help Center ![image-20221020-222143.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3b9e01f721e772f59d6a29f9a87f5b89aca7ef7f76e400fa10da018da28c1639/image-20221020-222143.png?cb=012280c1d5671a2a0b8e1ee6a60429dc) #### Refined Labor and Contracted Spend Charts ![image-20221020-222002.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_87e9ad5604e89d1138bfb53147c4421f4fe2105621ce0e1f573d2ce6ce8e747a/image-20221020-222002.png?cb=37eba40e2e32cac793efd15dacb04ec7) ## OCTOBER 10, 2022 ### New Homepage Design ![image-20221011-221035.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_28cdcfcaf91995cd1dd4f506f4b72fde80f6081a8980c37957f0307f97a8ad80/image-20221011-221035.png?cb=365efc8cd81084bf7af9eb90caf109c9) ## OCTOBER 4, 2022 ### Support for common chart types ![image-20221011-222056.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4fa7bc4c69d3430b34ccd492a8b32dfd7a7fc7e4330926b0766ff21e2b4f07da/image-20221011-222056.png?cb=475e6055cf80c512bd97fed190262347) ## SEPTEMBER 27, 2022 ### Improved Filter Layout ![image-20221011-222355.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_49e2effeda7e78a97e6040a890a3c67195cf94db2875c725e025d39afb2f628b/image-20221011-222355.png?cb=31c3e61e74b5574759248a551f1cb295) ## SEPTEMBER 15, 2022 ### Application - Total Cost of Ownership ![image-20221011-222703.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_39b82f08f46e984286e2f18111dcf58770530b7b165a7164bb49ebae4331557d/image-20221011-222703.png?cb=4a2a14e5495dbfb4caee523137ee8319) ## SEPTEMBER 05, 2022 Annual Spend Report ![image-20221011-223043.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_11fc1fda3a51670f2009b12c1e73549c4d9735bb483b4d9257115a73afee4050/image-20221011-223043.png?cb=c19ea9b593b69cb7ec080a88397cd345) ## AUGUST 29, 2022 Analytics Reports can show Totals ![image-20221011-223310.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_75e46464487a0de9a415a952c22cd3e8583bbacc9671778dfe7d1a19d13f1e7b/image-20221011-223310.png?cb=bfc38a06a0094655d1419a101af4f163) ## AUGUST 23, 2022 ### Initial Asset Catalogue Introduce a set of asset lists and standardised fields. These assets can now be used to distribute cost with the goal of calculating APP TCO. Calculations are based on company assets used directly or indirectly by an application. Assets added are: Database Instances, Servers, Storage Devices, Data Centres, Network Devices, Employees, Computers, Mobile Devices, Applications, Middleware, Mainframes and Printers. ## AUGUST 16, 2022 Financial Year settings ![image-20221012-212209.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_025f6d3583c41283f87ca66dd4261bd15bf44288a26bdb5bf0503b624eae6d27/image-20221012-212209.png?cb=ed8157911cbc83bb2cdf53bc9675d733) ## AUGUST 08, 2022 Improved UX around using Tiers to allocate spend to assets ![image-20221012-212433.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cca0bf7bfdfeac180dda174713de015c03b343fba44700db11a4d5f12b19092c/image-20221012-212433.png?cb=4921056a5abe2645e2eea1e344878cdd) ## AUGUST 01, 2022 Conditions when allocating to assets ![image-20221012-212721.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_33f11e353626651e2e9c2cfcb611526fe2a556c2864f6493311d9ff9baf84a6f/image-20221012-212721.png?cb=bd04877de7ff8144f892c814f8b962b0) ## JULY 25, 2022 Distribute spend by weight to assets ![image-20221012-212900.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2ffc9aa2fbc17d7e6265ffc8cab7f6e88393db9514698f46b21b06619364f8df/image-20221012-212900.png?cb=0e4ea16eb4240d6ebaf6d50f21bf3330) ## JULY 19, 2022 Vendor Details per Tower and Cost Pool ![image-20221012-213111.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e472f19a824082d6cb11b6636122b95aa727d63bfd551bb4f1a86dcb11c485dc/image-20221012-213111.png?cb=5b84e45978f1a0a06414a74bad8c4216) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** [2023 Changelog](https://help.yarken.com/yd/2023-changelog.md) --- language: "en" --- # 2023 Changelog ## December 26, 2023 We have cleaned up the UX on our business case headers to make it more readable. ![image-20240312-080050.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b06397cce7e6c2ea4a2df7aa1e9e8df67f4b94fb5ee0e466bfa347fee191d4b4/image-20240312-080050.png?cb=edf876fc899f9194aae58c7c47327450) ## December 19, 2023 Customers can now select to be hosted on AWS in addition to Azure. ## December 12, 2023 The monthly chargeback report can now be directly extracted to your specified S3 bucket. A separate menu item named Export to S3 Bucket is introduced on the Chargeback screen. This option only becomes available once the chargeback is approved for a month. The export destination is determined by the S3 bucket that you have configured. The default exported file name format is "yarken_chargekback_yyyymmddhhmmss.xlsx. ## December 5, 2023 Charge back is now available for use! Admins can now create the format for a chargeback file and initiate the chargeback process. Once a chargeback has been initiated the data in the month is locked and cannot be changed anymore. ![image-20240312-080209.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2ac861874785b375106e3823ba3b85382409a1eaafcf698d3254fc52ad164428/image-20240312-080209.png?cb=bde9a4f02f71aa0c2444f54f6a1f0f40) ![image-20240312-080128.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_be6352e9925f1136698ca9d5a447f0ecdef50359296f171d78d8bfbeb874b7a0/image-20240312-080128.png?cb=193127c2ab6c733c4e00352aace8d241) ![image-20240312-080235.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8939dbb80f6598ddc98588b5ff454ae8599c15e26fd265a6420d6adb872ee6cf/image-20240312-080235.png?cb=d2e209ad885e383c8bc579d6577276bb) ![image-20240312-080309.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c32644d62a55333e7f5a04220de9ff148bf3671f3c4844c4cc9ff5d05c01cd3f/image-20240312-080309.png?cb=1cc8f19e2b6555c7d62ea79afca0b020) ## November 28, 2023 Introduction of Automation capabilities. Users can now store data mappings and use these to set up an automated process to ingest data from an S3 bucket or a Azure blob storage. ![image-20240312-080502.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e6b36347e0eaecc2d6b38cf62275b00a3884e788414e40ca2b09f950200e3de7/image-20240312-080502.png?cb=d8bb6054feb17509763734a599a23e41) ![image-20240312-080545.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5f5d7d235c9bea2211aa9f813e3384c58b7e675fa1a27dd834143b5fe9962141/image-20240312-080545.png?cb=bf95c825d27da6d7ddd856cb6a727c16) ## November 21, 2023 Business Case can now be compared against actuals that have been tagged against the business case ## November 14, 2023 Homepage now has additional widgets aligned with the licensable features in yarken Business Case Feature ## November 7, 2023 Support for AWS CUR Files ## October 31, 2023 Cost Transparency (prior year) dashboard uses prior year data as baseline. Tags can be extracted from cloud spend and usage files. ## October 24, 2023 Asset Rules New capability to create Asset to Asset relationships by the use of rules. Currently still limited to cloud assets. ## October 17, 2023 Cloud Consumption file can be imported in to an empty system. Master data can be created as part of the import. Applications, Products and Services can be populated from a tag ## October 3, 2023 Cloud Consumption data is now available for analysis in the Cube. ## September 26, 2023 **FOCUS 0.5** Ability to ingest a FOCUS 0.5 aligned spend files as a spend source. ## September 12, 2023 Spend allocation to assets is now preventing overallocation by checking that the fully allocated spend portion is never greater then 1. ## September 5, 2023 Minor UX improvements to increase usability, i.e. re-ordering of menu items to reflect the most common workflow steps. ## August 22, 2023 **Capabilities** The concept of capabilities has been removed from the product. Terminology was to ambiguous and caused confusion. ## August 15, 2023 **User Management in YÄRKEN** User can now be managed in YäRKEN. New users can either be added manually or a tenant can be configured to allow access to all users for the active directory tenant. Roles and permissions can either be assigned in YäRKEN or in the active directory. **Assets and Asset Mapping Maintenance** If assets and relationships are maintained they can simply be copied from one month to next. ## August 8, 2023 ### Asset TCO Cube We have introduced Asset TCO reporting, a new cube for tracking asset spend and distribution. With the new cube, users can quickly analyze spend by cost centers, towers, applications, products, services, and other asset types. This cube empowers users to generate customized reports by utilizing the "From Asset Types" and "To Asset Types" fields. These fields allow users to identify the asset spend distribution at the source and destination levels. Asset TCO provides a comprehensive view of spend across all asset types. ![image-20230818-122840.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ed41a4c232074eaf67fcdb6aa5f2a457f6934c8be1d186a68dfc07270f3c2543/image-20230818-122840.png?cb=ca09c06ee1ecd7736210eb4b618140ce) ### Consumption Data Cube We have introduced a new Consumption Data cube in the Analytics menu that allows you to track and analyze mobile consumption data over given timeframe. You can create custom reports based on a specific mobile number, charge date, charge type, charge description, employee, and service provider. The new reporting helps you to understand mobile consumption trends and optimize mobile expenses. This cube offers the flexibility to create mobile consumption reports that meet your specific requirements. You can choose to focus on a specific time period, a particular charge type, or look into individual employee mobile expenditures. ![image-20230818-122928.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bfb7febbd2e339c041a287a492fc97225297f09cca50cbed602f19d0f16310ef/image-20230818-122928.png?cb=b5213ae2a765ed237b280e25a051982d) ## August 1, 2023 ### Cost Explorer We have introduced the Cost Explorer, an advanced and interactive dashboard in this release. The Cost Explorer is intended to show an interactive visualization of cost distribution based on the TBM Taxonomy. The explorer is based on the cost transparency model and displays the breakdown of total spend into different layers in the TBM Spend Model. With the cost explorer, you can now perform a comprehensive cost analysis to understand the spend pattern, identify cost drivers and areas for optimization. ![image-20230818-123112.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ce0beac39ba39bdb42119bccf65b07b31c7d98dfe0864fac508c445aac520c7f/image-20230818-123112.png?cb=7bae95a82cca20dd76ca521499d2ea90) The cost explorer consolidates spend-related data and categorizes it into multiple layers. The explorer displays the spend data in the TBM Taxonomy and Assets view. Users can add different layers to check the distribution at a more detailed level. Each layer contains additional filters to check the distribution of a specific cost element. The cost elements in different layers are interconnected with lines. On hovering over these lines, they show the incoming and outgoing spend between the two layers. ![image-20230818-123225.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_208d3481e1a556ef9f38dcd0f2a056cf1c181404b5e1eff8f9af0013c82ecb09/image-20230818-123225.png?cb=745eb11df9a58a46a1c3f7ca89cb834a) The cost distribution level is shown in several visual color shades. The grey color indicates fully mapped spend, the blue color represents unmapped spend, and the red color represents over mapped spend. This visual representation makes it easier to identify the distribution. ![image-20230818-123330.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fd9aa6c5b60658f087c672dc0c1016468b4cc98e9a3b28a49a000103838659f6/image-20230818-123330.png?cb=67eb732936e255d82041e5580ecfe92a) We have also enabled the side drawer to check the detailed breakdown of spend. The drawer contains the comprehensive cost flow in tabular form. When the cost element is clicked, the side drawer appears. It contains fields such as Mapped From, Mapped To, Mapped %, Amount, and Grand Total. The upper table represents the incoming spend distribution, while the lower table denotes the outgoing spend distribution. ![image-20230818-123437.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2d124d0ea5cd67253b47844242da80ba110992ea2e1a6f6881668d671c7b9eae/image-20230818-123437.png?cb=f7de2c47c49477ce8cdf8894a0f201cd) A UI for mapping Business Units (BU) to Solution Offerings has been enabled. Users can now add monthly business unit rules for allocation and mapping. This new enhancement allows users to understand how business units consume solution offerings. ![image-20230821-053236.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9ed3b71afcd2d20e9e0fe4071f91227516e8535da00dc468fb1c43200d0d0f8b/image-20230821-053236.png?cb=8e11a099bc28888487e1ae4d9e3f67ce) Admin users can utilize the Add Rule page to load a Business Unit consumption file. BU mapping can be performed using three methods. The mapping methods include Add mapping file, Copy rules from another month, and Map manually. The RULES tab displays a list of all rules that have been assigned to business units. To ensure data accuracy and avoid duplicate entries, the feature implements a unique check and prevents the creation of rules with identical information. The application offers the flexibility to copy BU consumption rules from an already mapped month and apply them to the desired month. ![image-20230821-053347.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2dfbd9eb6ef1082f88213d31c00a297e233730c7c9c1e29f23121b6bf53f91b1/image-20230821-053347.png?cb=7051d908fa062b45d8fb90fa0c2a7354) The user can allocate Business Unit (BU) spend to assets and gain additional insights into who consumes IT services on the BU side. It lets users to allocate spend to specific assets within BU. We now only enable spend distribution to the Employees asset type. Users can split the allocation equally across assets or by any numeric value (By Weight). To further customize the allocation, user can use the + ADD CONDITIONS option. ![image-20230821-053533.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_05d2379ac743c674e952f183afc78bb9caba225a08a29071b67845cb13092132/image-20230821-053533.png?cb=1fa70dcb6807901c4574a6fe6eb96bd5) The user can use the allocation file to distribute the solution spend to multiple business units and assets. The distribution is based on the usage value and asset specified in the consumption file. ![image-20230821-053646.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_608805e834a5c25c580ef3d5a04cac0812c59c4e4bdc047f2314b6e1654ce887/image-20230821-053646.png?cb=c79596ded8c347f1c1d88315690755c0) ## Employees Asset New fields Business Unit ID and Business Unit Name are added to the Employees asset. These additional fields are now available in the Analytics Employee cube, and the existing data templates are updated to show these new fields. Users can now conveniently associate each employee with their relevant business unit details. ![image-20230821-054151.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_21c744abd74e51ae8d55f04fa2fbf0819efa2c2a8f4253083b34edbad40359d3/image-20230821-054151.png?cb=cf6c80efb87fd1665f671b61c66f2645) ![image-20230821-054251.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6f06a2bd3844578eff063d806d3a682358cbfa4ef8f5a8074b4618eb53444d83/image-20230821-054251.png?cb=fd80c527d83a1c4b9c9f2163ff07241e) Additionally, users can now add asset conditions while distributing spend to assets by using the business unit name and ID. ![image-20230821-054402.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d5f66fbe1414bdb0cb482e76878b1f34745ada131a242fd3a88e58156538ea97/image-20230821-054402.png?cb=d30a9dc0f6186af35f3c5d1e53b08afa) ## July 25, 2023 The Saved Reports in Analytics menu is updated to show the chart icons alongside the report names. This enhancement will allow you to identify the chart types while opening the saved reports. ![image-20230710-113320.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_845520404a27f9e604d907b2f55c9ec438ed008a8e5e0fed9641849b8159f30f/image-20230710-113320.png?cb=34e8df26b1e310ed9bf630d17aaf1c35) The Labor charts in Solution TCO and Application TCO are updated to show the correct labor spend amount. The labels Cost Pool and Sub Cost Pool are added to the Labor chart. This update allows users to view the Sub Cost Pool details directly on the chart. The given display format is Cost Pool - Sub Cost Pool, for example, Outside Services - Consulting. ![image-20230710-113344.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2b93759e3eb105386ce6c6857e263e88add889c8c902fc214660de4662c3630c/image-20230710-113344.png?cb=da9c7f3b95308e0a8bba45e62a9794b3) ![image-20230710-113349.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2e20a3536cd831915b56bf1facad2b2ce5a17dbcc1fe9d87b5484601bd4b8f28/image-20230710-113349.png?cb=45836eabc597aa3bf51c256d15cf1a15) ## July 18, 2023 We have introduced a new Budget Overview dashboard for the budget owner. This new dashboard provides a comprehensive overview of the budget for the next five years. The Budget Overview dashboard consolidates all budget-related information into a single, and user-friendly interface. It offers a variety of visualizations to monitor budget allocation and identify the budget trend. ![image-20230710-103342.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_10430b6669a4730049b37b6a788c2a2c71f7fc5cdaaaeee38ab975d18b57c840/image-20230710-103342.png?cb=be86351e00b13cac87f22da541a80cd4) The dashboard is designed to show charts and reports based on the budget allocated to cost centers by Vendors, Cost Pool, Sub Cost Pool, Tower, and Sub Towers. All of the charts contain drill-down capabilities that provide a granular view of budget allocations. The dashboard also includes advanced filtering options to refine the budget data. ![image-20230710-103411.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_228bb55cf8592197850a4c2def0a21ddeb9600da693ff0ce8a377d1be1d86231/image-20230710-103411.png?cb=45bfa824055a83d6c16fddf8243a816a) ## July 11, 2023 ### **Custom Fields in Spend and Budget** While uploading Spend or Budget files, admin users can now use more custom fields. This new enhancement allows users to store up to 5 Custom Strings, 5 Custom Numbers, and 5 Custom Dates in Spend or Budget data. This update provides more flexibility and customization for tracking and analyzing your spend and budget data. ![image-20230710-113020.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7f105aa6e617fbbaba52818d5bd2dbb0232b93aadc43881cc59d233de8ea2bf6/image-20230710-113020.png?cb=131d657f9bb94847563200a6c2a9de57) ## Dashboard Filter We have retained the filtering condition on all the dashboards. The application now remembers the filters that the user has used while switching between the main dashboard and drill-down reports. For example, if a user applies a filter from the filter panel and then drill-down into a specific report, the program will retain the filter. The preselected filter will be reapplied if the user navigates back to the main dashboard via the screen menu or even refreshes the webpage. However, the preselected filter will not auto-apply if the user navigates back using the browser button. The user can remove a filter by clicking the Clear button. With this enhancement, Users will no longer have to apply filters repeatedly while returning to the main dashboard. ![image-20230821-055003.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1f66680f99f2a0261d0bfdc000dd440c194c1fb251a0836db9bc5a07d868611c/image-20230821-055003.png?cb=06adaf6777ddaf5eebb4a6fd15d2a561) ## June 20, 2023 The issue with the downloaded CSV reports from Analytics has been resolved. Previously, the exported files contained string values, which prevented the calculation of average values, resulting in only a count being displayed. However, we have addressed this issue, and now the downloaded reports accurately calculate average values, providing a more comprehensive analysis of the data. ## June 13, 2023 The Custom Dashboards feature is a creative way to design dynamic and personalized dashboards. This new dashboard is exclusively designed for the Power and Admin users. They can create and edit the custom dashboards from the Analytics menu. However, Viewer users have read-only access and can be accessed directly from the menu bar. ### **For Power and Admin Users** These dashboards enable you to create and design interactive dashboards that are tailored to your needs. You can share them with your teams and choose whether you want to allow edits or keep as read-only for team members. If the dashboards are public, you can easily identify the creator's name and see who made the last edits. To recreate similar visualizations, you can copy any public dashboard and make edits according to your requirements. We have also added an interactive comment section to each custom dashboard. Users can add comments, provide feedback, ask questions, and engage in discussions directly within the custom dashboards. This promotes the collaborative decision-making process. ![image-20230710-102812.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3d5e2670168bf5316fd1df22b77dd81177758177aacff8a3a539e197f2a7b80b/image-20230710-102812.png?cb=f1747d793fba40200049447abc385837) We have provided the flexibility to create the dashboards in easy steps. Users can add the widgets from the default reports or choose to import from the saved reports. The dashboards allow you to adjust the height and width of each widget using resize handles. Additionally, the Customize Widget option enables you to change the visualization properties and apply filter conditions to your data. This will help to create an informative dashboard layout by choosing your desired dimensions. ![image-20230710-102837.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f5fa779127fa8a0b43c73c0e66185fdb33b56b2cd9ad31a689283db2acdcd138/image-20230710-102837.png?cb=f1b8aa95d592d9f26808ce6a5c718900) ![image-20230710-102851.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0114e67e984c7c07b8b65771eab5d40b07307ca1d062aa106b41017572e4af47/image-20230710-102851.png?cb=4afb013f45cc0bd0734dd73df42be135) To enable seamless access to custom dashboards on different screens, we support the automatic adjustment of the screen layout. However, users can manually change the dimensions and position of the widgets. ![image-20230710-102919.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_02b6b8ebeab63c5e90492040b9f588727906ebba23acdb5f43d249d99680a845/image-20230710-102919.png?cb=46e243e5707d20d5ae38c49519ebc92e) ## June 8, 2023 When an admin user creates tower rules for the months using allocation files, they will now be able to see the uploaded file details using the ALLOCATION FILES tab. This new tab displays a list of all allocation files that have been uploaded to create a rule for the given month. ![image-20230710-113217.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_db58e2cf95c821065f0f20543f77baf525ba77e43baa894d51499f3d357a8417/image-20230710-113217.png?cb=caf0d400b378f9f012af6bb1f64bf15b) Additional filters are provided in the tab to search for specific details. ![image-20230710-113248.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cd6412641f8595b3ddcc7b3e535168f9fae265896325e64534ef4e36f40f1151/image-20230710-113248.png?cb=81278623c41b51a9c637e7ae8114b882) ## June 1 , 2023 ### **Cost Center Budget Details** The budget calculation is now updated to show the total budget value with and without CPI/LPI. When the cost center owner creates a new budget item and adds the values in Month-wise Expenditure by enabling the CPI/LPI fields, the totals with or without CPI/LPI are adjusted automatically. The user can see the CPI/LPI percentage values while applying the variables. The new update improves the budget amount calculation and provides detailed budget visibility. ![image-20230710-113110.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d5c9ea7cc2998022c24c7db3a89c7a73c6f841a9f565311aa5b1a1b3c40d6621/image-20230710-113110.png?cb=afafdabf028f030a30a57b635fe36fe2) ## May 30, 2023 Companion Metrics is a great place to measure the performance of non-financial activities alongside financial data, providing a side-by-side comparison of cost and impact. In this release, we have introduced the Companion Metrics screen only for Power and Admin users under the Admin menu. The Companion Metrics screen offers below two key components: * **Upload**: The Upload option enables administrators to easily upload companion metric files into the system. All the uploaded file details can be checked on this screen. ![image-20230710-103115.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4b931f75f8ef7bc91831baf8aa73f818fccc7cd91d19dcaf5eae5e166ce3aa28/image-20230710-103115.png?cb=24c4760cbb1b56c214d449edfa65da9c) * **Manage**: The Manage screen provides a list of all metrics available across the organization. Also, the user can edit and delete the metrics data on this screen. The Manage screen gives a comprehensive view of the metrics, showcasing the metric values alongside the corresponding year and month details. ![image-20230710-103207.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2230d85b18a25df9202aab93256ada7775447858dbda728969330f2ad30e07c6/image-20230710-103207.png?cb=5fb4d69a298be6886e0225d43b283bb1) The Companion Metrics is also available for reporting in the Analytics menu. The metrics cube can be reported against Spend and Timeline. The users can create customized reports and charts based on the metrics data. ![image-20230710-103246.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1106d06ffed7ab24b005a77a0bb5d32ad06318d2629bcb1f1a32c61bec3e01ab/image-20230710-103246.png?cb=7e97a129add993634c4858d6806f08be) ## May 16, 2023 An issue is fixed when the user distributes the spend to Asset Employees and chooses splitting by custom Weight column, for example, by Rate. The custom Weight column was not working, and the user was unable to distribute spend to assets. Now the custom weight column is able to distribute the spend to any assets. ## May 09, 2023 ### **Auto Mapping of Column Names** When uploading a CSV or Excel files, the auto mapping will ignore the letter case of the column headers and map the headers to specific fields accordingly. Now, the application will not consider the uppercase or lowercase of column headings while uploading any files. ![image-20230710-112927.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_195cac8b956cfaf1bb20d1a0e94f5906face95567dde90547f263496aff10513/image-20230710-112927.png?cb=4e5885970239b5eef56db73da3504701) ## April 25, 2023 Users can now define the default decimals in all currency and numeric fields in Analytics. This allows the user to customize the display of decimal points. Now, the number of decimal places can be set up to 6 in all currency and numeric fields; however, by default, it is set to 0 decimals. Users can change the number of decimal places from the dropdown icon next to the selected values. This customization is now applicable to all visualizations in analytics. ![image-20230710-112954.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5b98ef16adac531967fd6e7c3387fe54d88bf141aefb6bba59bd17a4c8813eef/image-20230710-112954.png?cb=5c385e718dbaa5baeb373adcd9bae0df) ## April 18, 2023 Extended the TBM Taxonomy and introduced a Cloud Sub Tower. This allows users to map their cloud-related spend to specific cloud sub towers, providing greater visibility into cloud-specific spend. With this update, users can select cloud sub towers for various towers including Application, Compute, Network, Storage, Security \& Compliance, Platform, and IT Management. ![image-20230710-103512.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ddf2f0e7d0bf22bc7854cc65fae7334e66d87c1d3f7ad6615a8dd45a38dd3f0b/image-20230710-103512.png?cb=b16950919262eb905e497d179557f4f8) ## April 11, 2023 The cost allocation for the Cloud spend is simplified. While selecting Multiple Towers and the ADD TOWERS FROM ALLOCATION FILE option, the user can upload the file with the fields such as Tower, Sub-Tower, Asset Type, Asset ID, and a Weight column (which is used to derive the portion). The tower and asset allocation files now include two extra columns for Asset Type and Asset ID. The portion is calculated based on the weight column chosen. With this update, users can easily distribute cost directly to assets (if required), thus improving the overall user experience. ## April 4, 2023 While uploading Spend or Budget files, admin users can now use more custom fields. This new enhancement allows users to store up to 5 Custom Strings, 5 Custom Numbers, and 5 Custom Dates in Spend or Budget data. This update provides more flexibility and customization for tracking and analysing your spend and budget data. The Mapping Fields screen shows all the new customs fields in the above order. Data upload templates such as Actual Cost and Budget Allocations are updated to add new custom fields. ## March 27, 2023 We have introduced a process viewer to deal with long running processes in the background. This allows admins to see the progress when making larger changes to the model. ![image-20230328-030648.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0efd14825dd7005fbc12e393902404665916ccd1bea0b55eca61e95e914448e5/image-20230328-030648.png?cb=bd1f23d7ba207678b28bcdf68c3bc49e) ![image-20230328-225924.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_25906437b20117fc14db1ff4375b7d3865b8e995b41375c94d477df6077741f7/image-20230328-225924.png?cb=de189ffedf2290b59c24487b437b4b36) ## March 20, 2023 Ever wondered if you mapped a file correctly to the YäRKEN data structure? Now you can view the mapping after the file is loaded: ![image-20230328-230220.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6f9dd87ff3e79b3afd5a6bc63dbe87b7ad0ea1699abf8c4349bbae4ddc693596/image-20230328-230220.png?cb=6a54945501ddb787db9332e4eec37895) If multiple people work on the same instance at the same time it can become hard to keep up to date what was changed. The Audit log feature keeps a record of all changes to system. ![image-20230328-230443.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_74d903ea70c0f7cedb07623045795f049596edf3b9929d8dd41c2ff9a7e3a352/image-20230328-230443.png?cb=52e6b28a2464e596f3b61fa71f57ca96) By default inactive master data is not shown int he admin section anymore. You can use the filter to make them visible. ![image-20230328-230611.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b29cf59d47074d24e5b07b323bf47b523e1302d2dc0abe83b0ef4d9e48ef9572/image-20230328-230611.png?cb=94498cee65c34a1be701a79cca730100) In the dashboards and reports inactive master data is shown as inactive. ![image-20230328-230727.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_61ca08a5283e28ad0fcc1fbf5779f4ec63cf2d10ee824fc704da2b2d1f4068ac/image-20230328-230727.png?cb=4a25334af055e0029ca61d345fdf04fa) ## March 13, 2023 Showback Dashboard Cloud Overview Dashboard Solution Business Alignment Ability to plot Usage as Value and Spend Targets ## March 7, 2023 Introduction of Services and Products. Services, Products and Applications are now Capabilities ## February 27, 2023 Performance Improvements ## February 20, 2023 Incremental refinement of the Designer and Analytics screens. ## February 13, 2023 We are saying goodbye to our old "Data Management" screen as now all functionality is available in our new Designer. Also some bugfixes around our cubes and dashboards. ## February 7, 2023 Smaller enhancements to increase usability. Added percentage to the tower allocation screen to improve the process of allocating spend to multiple towers. ![image-20230226-220815.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3bdd56be6c25c212deb4d7da55dde3155834d5d15ebc84c092e6a91ccdeb0eda/image-20230226-220815.png?cb=d4ead58acc353ac8c5416f096a32f24d) ## January 30, 2023 This release focused on performance improvement across all our dashboards by improving the caching. ## January 27, 2023 This release focused mainly on smaller bugfixes. ## January 17, 2023 Introducing new dashboards for Solutions and Asset types ![image-20230226-220100.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_311577266e06388e109a89ca25c1f8f22888b8680cdacb0747d90a0a1fe2f6bd/image-20230226-220100.png?cb=d731d2480cbb745f28ae46d54d510919) ![image-20230226-220147.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1dacde6912a92679cbb6ec51cd4df6edc71a95bef7188b20703540632e1eb948/image-20230226-220147.png?cb=0bf02b4ac99febe5bbb819fe930b811a) ## January 9, 2023 Ability to view mapped GL line items when reviewing Cost Pool and Tower rules. Added a month filter to the Designer Spend Model. ![image-20230113-100749.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d112538b813514eacea32ef4420d20b45dafc39eb9607cc7022cdb7b63ebae46/image-20230113-100749.png?cb=c36cc098bc3d615b2b5d5e2d1adb2d6d) Ability to use Projects and timesheets during asset allocation of spend. ![image-20230113-100852.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_be84ad99dbb94f282a68a6ff0f2c6313384d84de51b3a1f46be150c9f1c78d70/image-20230113-100852.png?cb=a52a7c04b259507ecafa104ab3d15bb0) ## January 2, 2023 Introduction of YäRKEN Designer Advanced. We have added the capability to configure business units and have exposed solution offering in the Designer as well. ![image-20230113-100236.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b81b9435134cbfd369fabab503a6d8c416254aaf4b8da0536bd511cd5abf0144/image-20230113-100236.png?cb=4ae70856ec5133f4d2d428cb0972a87e) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** [https://yarken.atlassian.net/wiki/pages/resumedraft.action?draftId=775618567\&draftShareId=32a5e4fc-2ffa-4de4-9c94-f9aab1b5d402\&atlOrigin=eyJpIjoiYWE4MTE3MmMxNmNmNGI5ZThlMWZjMzk2MDg5MGRlMGEiLCJwIjoiYyJ9](https://yarken.atlassian.net/wiki/pages/resumedraft.action?draftId=775618567&draftShareId=32a5e4fc-2ffa-4de4-9c94-f9aab1b5d402&atlOrigin=eyJpIjoiYWE4MTE3MmMxNmNmNGI5ZThlMWZjMzk2MDg5MGRlMGEiLCJwIjoiYyJ9) --- language: "en" --- # 2024 Changelog ## December 16, 2024 ### Cloud Usage File When loading the multiple cloud usage files in a single month using Integration feature, the system now appends the data rather overwrites. This applies only when file are loaded from same folder within container or bucket storage using integrations. ## December 09, 2024 ### Contracts Portfolio - Expiry Dates A new column called **Contract Expiring In** has been added to the Contracts Portfolio dashboard. This column displays the number of days for the contract to be expired. ![Screenshot 2025-01-15 at 1.23.26 PM-20250115-085209.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_dfc14190ec11135ba45f329c15f93fe3e3c8347b75b3664a0d82c27dcbca1fc1/Screenshot%202025-01-15%20at%201.23.26%E2%80%AFPM-20250115-085209.png?cb=5214e876e0402e7aed8ffe94c81062af) Contracts Portfolio ### December 02, 2024 ### Data Dictionary **Data Dictionary** is now part of the data definitions. An option to view and download the data fields is made available in the application. The data dictionary includes the information about the field description, mandatory or non-mandatory fields, data types, impact if field not mapped, and severity of impact. The previous functionality for downloading data template files has been incorporated into this data dictionary. ![image-20250115-070144.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ed5e8aff75c9eac1ecd89c2cf9bc6fd539c30c99bc354182e1050489b52f4420/image-20250115-070144.png?cb=35f5983d48ee80ec74aab32595b893bb) Data Dictionary ## November 18, 2024 ### Financial Years We have added two new columns to the Financial Years setting to show the start and end months of the financial year. ![image-20250113-121918.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_853a31ef4c56d4671530e0eb756734e4320935b9166781cc296f7b9bae829044/image-20250113-121918.png?cb=7892760d6ea128c5fbaeac49da37c787) Financial Years ## November 11, 2024 ### Lookup Types Introduced a **Lookup Types** to configure the master lookups. ![image-20250113-110125.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_95bde9f58413e7090ce3e0249fe9858a0ba713a30a52e2e8534ee3b704ad26b2/image-20250113-110125.png?cb=007f8ac074425c27f09633aac768e548) Lookup Types ### Benchmark Overview Dashboard A **Benchmark Overview** dashboard offers an instant visibility into benchmarking parameters set by your organizations. ![image-20250113-121401.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_40d2ea58eb3f86f3b68ab022ec7b8c189b0fefcbc0fa2f298e05984030a7a8b1/image-20250113-121401.png?cb=3ec9263b44c8ad0ba4503a0fa1096aa0) Benchmark Overview Dashboard ## October 28, 2024 ### Greenpixie Fields We've enhanced the cloud consumption upload feature by adding new fields that supports the Greenpixie's cloud sustainability data. Users can choose to include cloud emission data for cloud reporting. This integration enables the tracking and reporting of cloud-related carbon emissions as well as other consumption, such as power and water consumption, for major cloud providers like AWS and Azure. The new greenpixie fields are: * estimate_type * usage_electricity_consumption_kwh * usage_emissions_tonnes_co2e * manufacturing_emissions_tonnes_co2e * total_combined_emissions_tonnes_co2e * water_consumption_cooling_litres * water_consumption_electricity_production_litres ### Manage Contract Metrics The Manage Contract Metrics allows users to link specific metrics with each contract. It is helpful to measure the deliverables and monitor vendor performance when managing contracts. You can track these metrics from Contract Metrics chart in the Contract Portfolio dashboard. ![image-20250113-094540.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_00bed7849c8146e5458112c6a8ef830f403ed257d1d62e42eb0eda3a36a06876/image-20250113-094540.png?cb=21c5bca0443b6cf5e5d948201671cfb6) Manage Contract Metrics ## October 14, 2024 ### Data Templates We've introduced automatic updates for data template files. Now, whenever data definitions change within the application, the associated template files will be automatically updated to reflect these changes. This ensures that the template files are always up to date with the field definition. ![image-20241029-094501.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6f8d1a3b713d7aee2b348ddb1037be26591c10c3ff6fe4b65050f16832e776c7/image-20241029-094501.png?cb=2915a06303e9062b5dd5e2e1aaa16ea2) Data Templates ### Spend Reload A spend reload button has been added under the **UPLOADED FILES** tab for reloading of spend file in case of any error occurs in the first upload. ![image-20241029-085528.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f243f12d10f1a421c67aaddf0292178dd795a9b4a4eb096a4c440ad899408c91/image-20241029-085528.png?cb=a05f86e11db4c3d3f78e1b00a732bf5b) Spend Reload Button ## October 07, 2024 ### Contract Portfolio We have introduced a **Contract Portfolio**dashboard to provide a comprehensive view of contract details and spend. This dashboard allows users to monitor contracted spend, track purchase orders, and review invoices. The dashboard includes key insights such as: * **Contracted Spend**: A breakdown of contract spend and compares with actual spend. * **Purchase Orders and Invoices**: Charts showing the purchase orders and invoiced amounts. ![image-20241023-055320.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0e6e9f55dac29712e3ef559ca6583fe04fa7530b4ce9cdec53ffaa67866959b9/image-20241023-055320.png?cb=1d3b47a86ff0d47e704645588bc35da1) Contracts Portfolio ![Screenshot 2024-10-23 at 11.24.48 AM-20241023-055501.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_52dd4f00eea0b79639f406fe576da9fdbf3d61797346d386ddcd36ba12f7bbee/Screenshot%202024-10-23%20at%2011.24.48%E2%80%AFAM-20241023-055501.png?cb=1ad01ca1945e38e30e49d8875d519d87) Contract Details ### Opening a Dashboard and Report in Analytics You can now open charts directly from dashboards and reports in the **Analytics**. This new functionality allows users to seamlessly access the charts in the Analytics, with pre-selected values, attributes, global filter criteria, and visualizations. ![Screenshot 2024-10-22 at 3.26.38 PM-20241022-095846.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9e7953b3632a79646011616865e3a38c94753f14246b00de7fa91feb7d0d5f66/Screenshot%202024-10-22%20at%203.26.38%E2%80%AFPM-20241022-095846.png?cb=93074999e73b10d0e832af3e5552d824) Open in Analytics icon ## September 23, 2024 ### Data Load Popup A data load popup is enabled to show the real-time feedback on the file upload process. ![image-20241022-093852.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e2bb6f2906167d7c4fc6822b6242b87f4bd57227be15213c005ad77159d21186/image-20241022-093852.png?cb=c6260b36d8fa9cefd7c6623039f64146) Data Load Popup ### Commitment Coverage (%) Chart The **Commitment Coverage(%)** chart is added in the **Commitment Overview** dashboard to track the monthly commitment coverage. ![image-20241015-122740.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2110bd19c248b1dd82ffbc6336d52ee815fbdbc08bad2494769c8434129981e1/image-20241015-122740.png?cb=29ed400fe0805b715e74fad384031ba5) Commitment Coverage chart ## September 16, 2024 ### Vendor Contract Details The Vendor Details report now includes a table to view the contract details of the particular vendor. ![image-20241003-122331.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_25488a7f1418a779812ed5774d28cf80704d7c29469b45250f152c3505b258d9/image-20241003-122331.png?cb=6fd973d493164311a2058259d4ed8888) Vendor Contract Details ### Investment Strategy: A new column A new column, **Investment Strategy**, has been introduced in the Application asset. This field allows users to categorize and track the application spend based on investment strategies. ## September 02, 2024 ### Commitment Coverage (%) The Commitment Overview dashboard now includes a new **Commitment Coverage (%)** KPI. This KPI helps the users to understand how much of their total spend or usage is covered under commitment-based discount agreements. ![image (5)-20240919-055047.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7f9ee9608c9ef1705bb5ea3ceac0f8b407f11c3ae063b2045f5ccaf6256a1424/image%20(5)-20240919-055047.png?cb=5a3f446981879efa3f998d3510088b17) ## August 26, 2024 ### Import and Export of Custom Dashboards We've included the importing and exporting capability on the custom dashboards. ![image-20240902-092900.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3e695ca466f6e8548a1a6eebc3127b992e20145d74b2d4d0a8f9ddb0dd52ca04/image-20240902-092900.png?cb=6f10b7be70d767a9fab80abc2203831b) Import Custom Dashboard ![image-20240902-093130.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0d0ed870ae7c2047b1fabd44fb464512b80952519168fc133f43d8a8cb49c8c4/image-20240902-093130.png?cb=d5055a52b8afe2502d9d7f65c99de6c3) Export Custom Dashboard ## August 19, 2024 ### Slack Notifications The application can now send notifications directly to Slack channels by setting up a Slack webhook, which allows users to receive real-time updates and notifications within their Slack workspace. ![Image 02-09-24 at 12.35 PM-20240902-071011.jpg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7cef34ffba56116821daaa9d162e91c5080bc7ec067419d319a19dd8f256a524/Image%2002-09-24%20at%2012.35%E2%80%AFPM-20240902-071011.jpg?cb=4be50bd5caa670f65311c2f8f0caaa67) Slack Notifications ## August 05, 2024 ### New Dashboards #### On-Prem TCO On-Prem TCO dashboard is tailored for tracking and analyzing the spend for on-premise infrastructure. It provides a breakdown of on-prem spend by cost pool, tower, month, platform, vendor, and other parameters. ![On-prem-20240902-085804.jpg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f3cb42a13e2c6e9935f46f468e4a7eeb13f90570ad6396da028e485a20ff6ddb/On-prem-20240902-085804.jpg?cb=0d2c9e2e4f20e7597a540aa6fd65793e) On-Prem TCO Dashboard #### Platform TCO The Platform TCO dashboard offers a comprehensive overview of spend for platform and hybrid environments. It provides you with a detailed breakdown of your platform spend by cost pool, tower, month, vendor, business units and other parameters. ![Platform TCO-20240902-085804.jpg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f5758f8ba2731ec969814cc8c69fe4c843b3961b49c0733d578cfc4823ecf602/Platform%20TCO-20240902-085804.jpg?cb=9391807e2c38406c7bf92fdc482cbe25) Platform TCO Dashboard #### Server TCO The Server TCO dashboard provides an overview of server hosting spend, focusing on the expenditure on the server infrastructure. The dashboard shows the breakdown of server spend by cost pool, tower, platform, vendors, business units, and other parameters. ![Server TCO-20240902-085804.jpg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2517ef061d3c212a5cbe23baff9af64f35a794996d8ac3c607a3966bd05f0576/Server%20TCO-20240902-085804.jpg?cb=49a28168489ef144784b54c8b5ad6c92) Server TCO Dashboard ### Platform Hosting: A new attribute for asset A new field named Hosting Platform has been introduced to all asset types. You can now specify the hosting environment or platform on which each item is distributed. ### Application Portfolio: Monthly Hosting Spend A new Monthly Hosting Spend chart is introduced to show the monthly hosting spend on the applications. You can also drill into the specific hosting to see a detailed breakdown of the spend. ![image-20240820-103917.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_af3dbac8a3c0a70bc31ea84864d3724154b93269853b93bbff6d6a32ce4858ba/image-20240820-103917.png?cb=644eacb8a75c022a72a16cc15eb484e4) Monthly Hosting Spend chart ### Cloud TCO and Mainframe TCO The data on the Cloud TCO and Mainframe TCO dashboards is now based on the Hosting Platform. ### Application TCO Dashboard: Cloud data If the cloud resource is shared across multiple apps, we now only show the portion of the spend that belongs to that app. ## July 29, 2024 ### FOCUS 1.0 Columns We have included new columns from the FOCUS 1.0 version. The new columns provide additional metrics and dimensions that offer a more granular view of your cloud spend and usage patterns. All the new columns are fully integrated with our Consumption Data Upload feature and reporting tool. ## July 22, 2024 ### Mainframe TCO: A new dashboard A Mainframe TCO dashboard provides an overview of the mainframe spend. This dashboard offers a visualization of mainframe spend across various categories, including cost pools, towers, applications, solutions, and business units. ![image-20240718-065003.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bf98c01a5b9b95ace4fdf11da6594fe31671bb317f4a1ea980e80938398dfaa8/image-20240718-065003.png?cb=f09db2749e28efd54c96c76bfc40ee37) Mainframe TCO dashboard ![image (1)-20240718-065511.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_42a71e496acb3b8a099a3c1f426b121dca31ed3d92dccab425fbdcf55f449357/image%20(1)-20240718-065511.png?cb=98cdbea65bd7b87ba146acfe9cc736d3) Mainframe TCO ### Cube Refresh We have enabled cube refreshing capability within our application. This new feature allows you to manually refresh cubes on an ad hoc basis, or in cases where an automatic cube refresh has not occurred. This is especially useful when loading large datasets spanning multiple years or months ![image-20240806-061620.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3efa6e32a811d15ebe8492f50a435c92a01d8d00571e451bda2cbd38f43a8e68/image-20240806-061620.png?cb=98c2df8a11ca219ccd01839a8961953e) Cube Refresh ## July 15, 2024 ### Notification Framework The new Notification Framework provides in-app notifications for various background events that occurred in the application. The notifications are triggered by background events and can be configured based on the several use cases. ## Jun 10, 2024 ### New Dashboards #### Cloud Charge A new dashboard, Cloud Charge, has been designed to help you monitor and analyze your cloud charges more effectively. This new dashboard allows you to: * Visualise your cloud charges across different categories. * Track the frequency of cloud charges, such as one-time or recurring. * Analyze charges based on pricing categories like on-demand, dynamic, and commitment-based. ![Cloud Charge 1.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7c4aea09eba17e7084b7dd8a2c294026b4f2c838a1a13728e8787b28f540a0c0/Cloud%20Charge%201.png?cb=14caf9be3713d56a049f21e4983135d0) Cloud Charge dashboard #### Cost Origination The Cost Origination dashboard provides an overview of cost origination spend. The dashboard offers charts for analyzing the monthly cloud spend by provider, publisher, and invoice issuer. ![Cost Origination 1.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d1e2d229d37552b43feff9c7603dcd3eecaa89be9a6a787c39b11d42edbc547a/Cost%20Origination%201.png?cb=a7823710df475f4ac3d0ecb6b575eddf) Cost Origination dashboard: Monthly Provider and Publisher spend chart ![Cost Origination 2.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e53c11236d2dc0ad63a8463ca01d31093988eeaa7f0572e0ee0084d60bf605aa/Cost%20Origination%202.png?cb=66e32985ef6f556d2e3a2e2b202570b5) Cost Origination dashboard: Monthly Invoice Issuer Spend chart #### Commitment Overview The Commitment Overview dashboard is designed to provide detailed insights into your cloud commitment discounts. This dashboard lets you: * Understand the categories and types of discounts your organization is leveraging. * Visualize your commitment discounts across different categories, such as usage-based or cost-based. * Analyze the different types of commitment-based discounts. * Compare the Billed Cost vs Effective Cost vs List Cost by Month. * Track the Billed Cost by Billing Account. ![5B025121-09C0-4892-8923-2CC652BE806C-20240625-064344.jpeg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a3dc28069b236cf75c7d6427b7e6176d342736d901c43bac5227ecf148afb339/5B025121-09C0-4892-8923-2CC652BE806C-20240625-064344.jpeg?cb=9190e465b296a3a85a6f28931b9925cd) Commitment Overview dashboard ## May 27, 2024 ### Recommendations: A new dashboard Introducing the new Recommendations dashboard, designed to help you visualize and track potential and realized savings. This dashboard includes charts that provide a visual representation of potential and realized savings by asset type, source, and month. With this new dashboard, you can easily monitor and analyze cost-saving opportunities. ![image-20240530-093714.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c7c476f8f588f1cac5e697f70993df3a5594e4e4291f846e9bdda1e09b2fbf16/image-20240530-093714.png?cb=795cba9cb626b3c177b3c57ba9dbbe46) Recommendations dashboard ## May 20, 2024 ### Enhancements #### Asset Tags We've integrated the default asset tags provided by FinOps into our application. These tags help organizations manage and allocate cloud costs more effectively. The given tags are used across different cloud providers, such as AWS, Azure, and GCP. You can track the cloud spend based on various criteria such as application, cost-center, team, product, environment, and more. ![image-20240524-114121.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3969bb834eb26c9390cb49bd60d8df953efc2b8fbe8f75ce6f1c678f75138707/image-20240524-114121.png?cb=af7403addcc2093998f7a2f3a3b35955) Asset Tag #### Data View for Charts We have enabled the data view option for several charts. This new feature allows you to switch between the chart view and tabular view of the data. You can also download the data for both views. ![image-20240524-150038.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6fbf50eef6834145b9a4fe4e612c0d05bc3d15bf33fcc9f78a561d2ad17412a9/image-20240524-150038.png?cb=b099f947970f275222f045ea4c51fbc1) Chart View ![image-20240524-150232.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_562e7d35027aa2656f7802ed16a79719bcc45f0e64bc98565907c5a467c28236/image-20240524-150232.png?cb=4663d5525018ae07a703ba11148eaaa7) Data View ## May 6, 2024 ### New Features #### Notification Channels (Webhook Notifications) We are excited to announce the addition of webhook notifications in the YäRKEN application. This new feature allows seamless real-time communication between our application and external systems. With webhook notifications, you can now configure your system to receive updates instantly when specific events occur. ![image-20240524-101657.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_710e493fa3d09cd22dcafebe6ee59dc371c5980c5436122950c2f4f2e7e5e1f7/image-20240524-101657.png?cb=585069625eb441317bc800008ea6a7f2) New Notification Channel **Key Highlights:** * **Real-Time Updates:**Receive notifications in real-time for critical events such as file uploads, status changes, and more. * **Easy Integration**: Configure webhook endpoints directly from the application settings for smooth integration with external services. #### Alerting We have designed a new Alerting feature that lets you create spend alerts based on application and vendor spend metrics. The Alerting feature promptly notifies you when your spending reaches specified thresholds. ![image-20240524-101943.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_90e778a9e047e55089c26cd78a40ea6b760c56889c0e0352ca6be6d93c6eab2d/image-20240524-101943.png?cb=e4dbfa82fa8dafa7c27c64e9c4206775) A New Alert **Key Highlights:** * **Custom Spend Alerts**: Set up personalized alerts for specific spending thresholds on apps and vendors. * **Real-Time Notifications**: Receive immediate notifications when your spending exceeds the defined limits. ## April 29, 2024 ### Value Stream: A new asset type We have introduced a new asset type named **Value Stream** exclusively to capture the resources involved in creating and delivering value to customers within the organization. You can also track the value stream on tower and sub tower level. ### Spend by Function: A new chart in Vendor Portfolio dashboard A Vendor Portfolio dashboard now includes a new chart titled **Spend by Function.**This chart provides a detailed breakdown of vendor spend by function. ![image-20240503-085504.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ebc3007d8d5908a2d0f3ec121982b1251dabc3b2e4941942bf6b41a46d02551a/image-20240503-085504.png?cb=cc4009674e46d2189537fd36b58f10e7) Spend by Function ## April 22, 2024 ### New Dashboards This release includes new dashboards exclusively for products and services. These new dashboards offer a comprehensive overview of spend on all the products and services. #### Product TCO Provides a breakdown of spend of the selected product. It is design to analyze the total cost of ownership (TCO) associated with products. ![image-20240419-123220.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ab282098eceb2f0702ce58abf634a27f9f1527dcefbe568c18e9b0a6061f22eb/image-20240419-123220.png?cb=7e7fc62c4169be2e2374f5c6cccbb4ad) #### Product Portfolio Provides a breakdown of Product spend by month, Cost Centers, Cost Pools and Towers. The dashboard also includes charts for the Top 20 Products and product categories by spend. ![image-20240419-123414.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ad4609a1842765c4d11d8496da8c7c2bc8c991d13e12219ed403cf06f1922b84/image-20240419-123414.png?cb=1914e5034a2a5a9173116d69280b50cd) #### Service TCO Provides a breakdown of spend of the specific service. It is design to analyze the total cost of ownership associated with services. ![image-20240419-123220.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ab282098eceb2f0702ce58abf634a27f9f1527dcefbe568c18e9b0a6061f22eb/image-20240419-123220.png?cb=7e7fc62c4169be2e2374f5c6cccbb4ad) ![image-20240419-123515.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_354d7f380ce6e07c3a13aa8a5ffbd4539293fc01e5b92674663dd4aad7c396d7/image-20240419-123515.png?cb=04e3868601a38de184b2acf6f5a9c0da) #### Service Portfolio Provides a breakdown of Services spend by month, Cost Centers, Cost Pool Spend and Towers. The dashboard also includes charts for the Top 20 Services and Service Delivery Model by spend. ![image-20240419-123600.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f6a2edcd2eac8f4fdb6cc532c2e9990e280703ad821d3c8c7c699f816678b56a/image-20240419-123600.png?cb=cf9efa570ad5254e1bd3dd59bf91c522) ### Enhancements #### Asset Rules Sorting Asset sorting functionality has been enabled for the asset rules. This allows the users to priotize the execution of the asset rules based on their preference. ![image-20240422-091900.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9c969a613666c9b64be75d946bc0d941420b491bd86008fcb2798da7b328359d/image-20240422-091900.png?cb=8d9815d63d89b2bfde3709bd39cb8c32) #### Ask YäRKEN UX The suggested questions in the **Ask YäRKEN** are now clickable. ![image-20240422-101155.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_104d869709b3700bb73fb876972f7974a62091b2b217188ace51ed986852c7c1/image-20240422-101155.png?cb=54885f5169ee854d655c43609778f2bf) #### New Financial Year End (FYE) Format We have introduced a new format, **FYE2000,** to indicate the financial ending year. ![image-20240422-100608.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3a9e773bdddc2f0f7efe7afad07a06783d69e6181c8cbe33cd64f52562dd6990/image-20240422-100608.png?cb=bf840510a7fab070d6bcd38a5ef2d867) ## April 15, 2024 ### New Feature #### Recommendations We're excited to introduce a new manual-based Recommendations feature in the YäRKEN application. This feature is designed to provide users with personalized recommendations on all the assets for cost savings directly within the application. This new feature offers a comprehensive understanding of projected cost savings opportunities as well as the actual savings realized over time. **Highlights:** * **Manual Recommendations:**Users now have the ability to manually add the recommendations for cost savings on different assets. The manual-based recommendation is used to identify unused resources and implement cost effective strategies. * **Recommendations on Assets:**This feature offers targeted recommendations tailored to specific assets. * **Potential and Realized Savings:**Recommendations are accompanied by key metrics, including Potential Savings and Realized Savings. Potential Savings represent the projected cost savings achievable after implementing the recommendation, while realized savings reflect the actual cost savings realized over time. ![image-20240422-074622.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9848239508eda326298cb8a9bb659c6db4ded332000fe2d0a25419aedbcdd2c4/image-20240422-074622.png?cb=31104ea1adac926a04643a3068c9cfe8) Recommendations Dashboard ![Screenshot 2024-04-16 at 10.34.31 AM.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0d1c3c422a54ff580d1b055454e789ca860e152b7274a3fb6366cd37edb62b4b/Screenshot%202024-04-16%20at%2010.34.31%E2%80%AFAM.png?cb=84e32a4d31f213af8e1119857b162165) Actual and Potential Savings on Home screen ### Enhancement #### New Vendor Attributes The vendor dashboard is enhanced to show the vendor metadata from the vendor records. We have added Supplier Performance Management (SPM) attributes to provide more comprehensive vendor insights. ![image-20240419-115052.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_27c2cbc000ab212af98169809be72b8e36abef0577f4d4858726f8f623839933/image-20240419-115052.png?cb=c6c905911be54fd7997deb74c43b686a) * **Operational Meetings** * **SPM Meetings** * **SPM Cadence** * **Minutes Completed** * **Relationship RAG** ### Fixed Bug: * Fixed a bug while distributing to towers via allocation files, when asset relationships already exist, then the application was throwing an error, failing to insert the same relationship record again. The application now establishes a unique asset relationship by disregarding the existing one. ## April 01, 2024 Ask YäRKEN - Enabled conversational mode ## March 05, 2024 You can now create Asset Rules and split your spend across multiple assets. ![image-20240311-081708.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_848d88e63e3aa62b64ec6fb2e38a289ec0dac8c5e30b1f136d7fd435e35f4d3e/image-20240311-081708.png?cb=93d47dd0fb21642eba9e80945da48a95) ## February 27, 2024 Asset Rules can now be created using any asset type as source and not just cloud assets. ![image-20240311-090336.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_dfc04ed5a7ca7605f63342ce19663145e81257729548d3074f26dc468997b6f1/image-20240311-090336.png?cb=0e1a6ce7fbc795c2f9d9efd9a8f70d8d) ## February 20, 2024 YäRKEN now supports you on you Cloud Forecasting and FinOps adoption journey. Use our cloud forecasting capabilities to collaborate with Engineering Teams, FinOps Practitioners, Finance and Business/Service Owners to reduce your forecasting variance. ![image-20240312-073936.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_20ca499e4189910379e6af2a8f8b280c1626cf4e8dee97d8cb5d14f673ca6e4a/image-20240312-073936.png?cb=22e8ce9ff54511ca65dfe3e394308018) ![image-20240312-074024.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_317e18f7f09543e98bb768bb624dd760ffb5549110535e259e102d980a8087ca/image-20240312-074024.png?cb=a9ca994de4190caf8d7c90820992b3a6) ![image-20240312-074055.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e753706d4608a52896e236fd0ee2217e266d85817bd47c9da518efc846d221e1/image-20240312-074055.png?cb=f776c341813d3b2fe1eee343be26e98b) ## February 13, 2024 We have introduced new cloud based dashboards that allow you to ![image-20240312-074322.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_974228fb075784cfa7db1a9643103c9d9197a4a8bbf8b8d07350402694b45578/image-20240312-074322.png?cb=8da17ac69c46bdff03105c240a351797) ## February 6, 2024 Value Metrics can now have a target as an absolute value or also changing planned values month by month. ![image-20240312-075310.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a664aabedfb353ba3396a33c3c5fadbba291d56344565fdcf73e981816ddeec3/image-20240312-075310.png?cb=e8de12310643fad7e09a591bd44631c4) ## January 30, 2024 Use our new Asset Tagging and Asset Normalisation feature. When loading cloud spend you can now normalise your shifting tags into one standard tag and then use that information going forward to attribute spend to business objects like applications, products, services or teams. ![image-20240312-075556.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_31b0c81169610f1f14005861ba0614ca02863b7ded5dd9ce07974e95614da4fb/image-20240312-075556.png?cb=0fc74f1a75e4eadc152abbac144d7ff8) ## January 2, 2024 Business cases not only look at spend but also at expected outcomes and assumptions. Ideally outcomes and assumptions can be quantified, tracked and verified during and after a business case was selected and implemented. You can now use Yarken's companion metrics to create this additional dimension on your business case and set quardrails for your build and run phase. ![image-20240312-075906.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_985ba56894180163414a8bf3d38a9c7241579b6c00027e4729933a59ce8e06cc/image-20240312-075906.png?cb=429b4c6fc608f6d26fc203a0fc3d7bd5) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** [https://yarken.atlassian.net/wiki/pages/resumedraft.action?draftId=775225350\&draftShareId=ac0fb535-bb67-4927-97f6-ad0b9175895e\&atlOrigin=eyJpIjoiOTcyY2E0YWQ2ZjhjNGUzOGI4YzljZTVlZTRkM2JkNTkiLCJwIjoiYyJ9](https://yarken.atlassian.net/wiki/pages/resumedraft.action?draftId=775225350&draftShareId=ac0fb535-bb67-4927-97f6-ad0b9175895e&atlOrigin=eyJpIjoiOTcyY2E0YWQ2ZjhjNGUzOGI4YzljZTVlZTRkM2JkNTkiLCJwIjoiYyJ9) --- language: "en" --- # 2025 Changelog ## 2025-12-29 Enhancements ### Consumer Spend Cube Separation and Multi-Query Execution As part of ongoing cube performance optimizations, the Consumer cube has been separated from the Spend cube to improve scalability and reduce pre-aggregation processing time. By isolating consumer-related data, the system significantly reduces the complexity and duration of cube pre-aggregation, resulting in faster refresh cycles. In addition, multi-query execution has been introduced for selected dashboards and analytics views. This enhancement allows the application to merge data from multiple cubes at query time and fetch results directly from the server instead of relying solely on a single pre-aggregated cube. Together, these changes improve cube performance and enhance query flexibility. ![Screenshot 2025-12-31 at 6.49.13 PM-20251231-142033.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c5573fd616ca4609b2d63c9742816ae2bb9b7dbc8c4c17e4561e542f96754913/Screenshot%202025-12-31%20at%206.49.13%E2%80%AFPM-20251231-142033.png?cb=bd7979f89c726cdda6ca0c7f8cb6ceff) ## 2025-12-15 Enhancement ### Tenant Cube Enhancements: New Name Field and Updated Labeling We've introduced a new **Name** field in the Tenants cube and updated **Tenant Name** to **Tenant** **Domain** **Name** for better clarity. The new Name field allows you to assign a custom or friendly name based on your configured lookup types and upload rules. When a pipeline is created via the consent URL and users want the Name field to reflect a custom value, corresponding lookup mappings must be defined. If no lookup types or upload rules are configured, the application will default the Name field to the Tenant Name. ![image-20251231-095651.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fe224d18853fe4e207686157588b714b9a47a7a5b5669ab8adf64ddebc53f218/image-20251231-095651.png?cb=5d2164db40bbaa1166bf1d42d10f9561) ## 2025-12-08 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Ask YäRKEN for Tables We've expanded the Ask YäRKEN's capability across the application to make insights easier and faster to access. Ask YäRKEN is now available on all tabular views in dashboards and reports, helping users quickly interpret table data. We've also enabled Ask YäRKEN on GL transaction popups. ![Ask Yarken on tables-20251209-080707.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_46e0fda279a03fc4a7ed7c4b0cdbd373012fe0039ffb1d8e4904e8ad47a38025/Ask%20Yarken%20on%20tables-20251209-080707.png?cb=83c180eb6f0d377843fc2eaf94eecb7a) ### Performance Improvement -- Explicit Run Report in Analytics \& Custom Dashboards To improve performance and reduce unnecessary cube/database queries, Analytics and Custom Dashboards now executes fewer automatic calls. Previously, every change---such as adding a field, modifying filters, or updating visual settings---would immediately trigger an implicit query, causing slowdowns and unnecessary processing. With this enhancement, Analytics and Custom Dashboards now detects changes and prompts you with a **Run Report** dialog. This indicates that modifications have been made and allows you to explicitly choose when to refresh the results. The report is only re-run after you confirm, significantly improving overall responsiveness and reducing backend load. ![image-20251209-064151.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_401dbc3acd35909f77447500dd86bbdcd8cb5c4adab4bd4d454b3aedb16e111d/image-20251209-064151.png?cb=89c313d7e726fd14c6ee05b2b7ba7ddb) ## 2025-12-01 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Month Filter Fix for Reopening Charts in Analytics An issue was identified in the Open in Analytics option where updated month filters were not being passed correctly after the initial launch. For example, if a chart was opened in Analytics with filters set from January to October and later reopened with an expanded filter range (e.g., January to December), the additional months (November--December) did not appear in Analytics. This issue is now fixed. Open in Analytics always applies the latest month filter selection and ensures all newly selected months display correctly in Analytics every time you reopen a chart. ### Upcoming License Expiry Warning A new early-warning notification is added to help admin proactively manage license renewals. The application will now display a license expiration warning 30 days before the license end date. This ensures that the customers have sufficient time to renew before access is impacted. **Note**: All existing customer instances with licenses set to expire this year have been granted an extension. These licenses are now valid until 31 March 2026. ![image-20251202-145419.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6be1fe56c994ac831562e241c961f6f65242f75f5b6436ed2b10104767e88eab/image-20251202-145419.png?cb=cbe35b95fa41c4542d1e677726cad459) ### Relative Date Auto Refresh on Custom Dashboards An issue was identified on the custom dashboard's relative date filters where cloud-related metrics and charts on custom dashboards---specifically those using last n days or last n months filters---were not refreshing after cloud consumption data was reloaded. These widgets continued to reference the date or month from when they were originally created, resulting in outdated values. The widgets only refreshed if the user entered Edit mode, which was not the expected behavior. This issue has now been fully resolved. Metrics and charts that rely on relative date filters (such as Last 7 Days, Last 30 Days, Last Month, etc.) will correctly recalculate based on the current system date, ensuring they always display the most recent cloud consumption data immediately after reload---without requiring any manual editing. ### Reporting on Project ID You can now report on **Project ID** across spend, budget, and forecast data. The Project ID field is fully available in Analytics, allowing you to filter, group, and analyze financial data by project. With this update, teams can track spend patterns and compare planned vs. actual values at the project level with greater clarity. ![Screenshot 2025-12-02 at 9.36.25 PM-20251202-160645.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a19ebc364d169b7bb0d368e224023bcc6e92887d9dd4b3655a986e8f2f9cee7a/Screenshot%202025-12-02%20at%209.36.25%E2%80%AFPM-20251202-160645.png?cb=d65c6c40564c3f69e48b7f4995553107) ### Decimal Portion for Solution Rules In the Solution Rule configuration, you now enter decimal portion values between 0 and 1 (such as 0.1, 0.25, 0.75) without interruption. Previously, real-time validation prevented entering values that began with 0, making it difficult to record fractional portions. This has now been fully resolved. Validation is applied after the user finishes typing. Users can freely enter precise decimal values without interruption. ![image-20251202-161616.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_056c1cce93787f4875023c48a75acdfb27ebeb901b6b0c0d3df0541201221763/image-20251202-161616.png?cb=6f0dbe57d3e55a5fb176b0f3ff61b697) ## 2025-11-24 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Email Notifications for Insights The Insights feature now supports email notifications in addition to the existing Slack and Teams channels. This update allows you to receive Insights alerts directly in their inbox for improved visibility and flexibility. When configuring email notifications, you must specify a Notification Channel Group Name, which determines which receipts will receive the email alerts. This ensures that Insights messages are delivered to the correct recipients based on defined groups. ## 2025-11-17 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Visibility in Asset-Level Distribution on Tower Rules We have enhanced the **Destination** column in tower rules to provide clearer and more detailed visibility into how spend is being allocated to assets. Previously, the Destination column only indicated whether the allocation was going to a single asset or multiple assets, without offering any further details. With this update, the Destination column now displays the exact number of assets to which the spend is distributed. The count appears in brackets next to the asset name (or the word multiple). In addition, when hovering over the Destination column, a detailed popup now appears showing each asset included in the distribution along with its allocated amount and percentage. ![Destination column-20251120-090541.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_47b83656abb3e8ec11b31da4bad96ea2cc8f9fbd5516d48234c6db6777c8bfe1/Destination%20column-20251120-090541.png?cb=6fdc69bd97f3ee6d2edb16f9e0893593) ### Link Between Vendor and Contract Dashboards We have added a new drill-down capability in the **Vendor Details** \> **Vendor** **Contract** **Details** table. When users click any contract row, the application now opens the Contract Details dashboard for that specific contract in a new browser tab. ![Vendor Details-20251120-102057.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6626a580299f65d1984592e93a56eed7fca7b1278bd614ec1fc928793a88aec1/Vendor%20Details-20251120-102057.png?cb=13c7ef6c351ae48bdeb628d5b8bd63c0) Additionally, a new **Open in Dashboard** action is introduced exclusively for the contracts within the GL popup's expanded detail panel (accessible via View more...). This enhancement allows users to open the selected contract directly in the contract dashboard. ![Open in Dashboard-20251120-095750.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_79093a4f2109bc621806f3ee3515b4cb78bce4a8aac6f005d76717d0aee3c768/Open%20in%20Dashboard-20251120-095750.png?cb=5545b134363853ad07e6f179fb9fac1a) ### Retaining Search Value in Analytics Dropdown The dropdown selection behavior is changed for all searchable dropdown fields in the Analytics. Previously, when users typed text into a dropdown search box and selected a value from the filtered results, the typed text was cleared immediately after selection. This issue caused inconvenience when users needed to refine or select multiple similar results. With this update, the typed text is now retained after making a selection. This fix is currently implemented across dropdown-based filters within the Analytics. ![Dropdown selection-20251121-121940.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2065500ad1a652c3054308085b7e42e0b53f96e01c6a137a67ae5b0069255008/Dropdown%20selection-20251121-121940.png?cb=49e3968ae15ea6ebe39f912ff1b5a037) ### Auto-sizing in Grid Table The new table component is enhanced to provide more intuitive interaction when customizing table size. Previously, when users added more columns to the table, the overall table width shrunk, making the layout difficult to navigate. This issue is handled by setting auto-sizing of column width by default, which ensures that the table adjusts to fit new columns without compressing the existing structure. This update improves readability and maintains a stable table structure. ![Table Rendering-20251121-123258.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3901921a4948be46468b8d6fc7a9bf994e41eb6781fb2f06af2d82b654487569/Table%20Rendering-20251121-123258.png?cb=91cbf3f07ae23c7b4fe8c60ac103eb17) ## 2025-11-10 Enhancements and bug fixes ### New TBM v5.0.1 Framework Integration The YäRKEN application now supports the TBM version 5.0.1, the latest standard from the TBM Council. The new version introduces richer classification across data, AI, security, and ESG. **What changed:** * TBM v5.0.1 introduces enhanced visibility for cloud and AI investments through new **Cloud** **Services** cost pools and an **AI Models** sub-tower. It also expands the Solutions layer with AI-focused offerings. * Certain IT Towers have been renamed and reorganized to better represent modern technology delivery models. * The **Business** layer is renamed to **Consumer** layer for better identifying and describing the organizational units or roles that consume technology services. **Key changes in the applications** **Cost Pools** * **Cloud Services** is a new standalone cost pool created to elevate transparency of cloud investments for all public, private, and hybrid cloud services, including IaaS and PaaS. * **Software** cost pool is updated to **Software \& SaaS**. * **Staffing** replaces **Internal Labor** . **External Labor** is no longer supported. * **Managed Services** and **Other Operating** are introduced across multiple pools. * Several new sub cost pools are added. **Towers** * New towers such as **Smart Devices** and **Data** are introduced. * **Platform** and **Output** towers are retired. * New sub towers related to AI and IoT are added. * **Security \& Compliance** is split into **Security and Risk \& Compliance**. **Solutions** * Introduced a new solution type for **Artificial Intelligence**. * Retired the **Platform** solution type. * Added a new Solution Category for **Sustainability \& ESG** under **Shared \& Corporate Services**. **Business Units** * **Business Units** layer is renamed to **Consumers** layer. **Dashboard and reporting** * Dashboards and reports have been updated to reflect the new TBM version labels and groupings. * The cost allocation model and reference lists in the system are updated to reflect the new TBM 5.0.1. **How to use:** We've introduced a new configuration option --- **Set TBM Taxonomy Version** --- that allows you to choose the desired TBM version to apply within the YäRKEN application. Reports and dashboards dynamically adapt based on the version selected. You can now select from: * **TBM v4.0** * **TBM v5.0.1** * **TBM v4.0 and TBM v5.0.1** | **Version** | **Description** | **TBM Version Behaviour** | |-----------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **TBM v4.0** | Continue using the legacy TBM 4.0 framework for backward compatibility. | When you select **TBM v4.0** , you may still see **TBM v5.0.1** elements in the Spend Model (Designer) and Analytics, as long as the spend exists in **v5.0.1**. However, rules, and mappings logic remain restricted to **TBM v4.0** only. | | **TBM v5.0.1** | Leverage the latest TBM taxonomy, updated cost pool, sub cost pools, towers, sub towers structure. | When you select **TBM v5.0.1** , you may still see **TBM v4.0** elements in the Spend Model (Designer) and Analytics, as long as the spend exists in **TBM v4.0**. These elements available for reference and comparison. However, rules and mappings logic follow the **TBM v5.0.1** taxonomy only. | | **TBM v4.0 and TBM v5.0.1** | Use both TBM v4.0 and v5.0.1 concurrently, enabling hybrid environments during transition or validation phases. | Both **TBM v4.0** and **v5.0.1** taxonomy elements are available and included in mappings and rules. Spend allocation, modeling logic, and taxonomy-based rules evaluate against both versions simultaneously. | ![Set TBM Version-20251121-121302.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bb1051d0c5efc337c1431bd8653e693b52ac34d6fbd155b98bf6f551fe3ac000/Set%20TBM%20Version-20251121-121302.png?cb=a6e68ba0c88008d8d47449c6362a2941) **General note** * Business units to Consumers: The renaming of Business Units to Consumers applies across all TBM versions (version independent). ### New Grid in Dashboard and Analytics The new grid component has been extended to the all standard dashboards, reports, custom dashboards and analytics. ### Companion Metrics - A New Rate Column A new attribute called **Rate** has been introduced in the Companion Metrics to support accurate amount calculations. The Rate represents the per unit metric rate. When the rate is provided, the Total Amount is automatically calculated by multiplying the Rate with the Metric Value. If no rate is entered, the application will default the rate to 1. ![Rate column-20251120-102516.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7cf970107f288b447c4be4e75ff3cac6513b8ca664ffca22f3133f82ec920876/Rate%20column-20251120-102516.png?cb=eba6cdbb8659ffa331d1db762756fee4) ### Tower Rule Sorting Enhancements The tower rule sorting experience has been significantly improved to handle scenarios where a large number of rules are configured. Previously, the sorting of multiple rules using drag and drop was slow. This often resulted the rules in the wrong position. To make sorting faster, accurate, and easier to manage, the following enhancements have been introduced: * Added new grid for smooth sorting. The sorting now uses an new grid for faster loading. * Added a new sorting option, Move to Position. Instead of relying only on drag-and-drop, users can now use the Move to Position option. User needs to specify a priority number, and choose whether to place the rule before or after another rule. * Enabled multi-select rows with checkboxes. Users can now sort or reposition multiple selected rules at once. These enhancements ensures that the tower rule is more reliable and scalable when working with large rule sets without performance issue. ![Tower Rule Sorting-20251120-103529.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9b714a418ad0f648b1ef551bcee7477078be1d7a943b853fa1c5f92279808dcb/Tower%20Rule%20Sorting-20251120-103529.png?cb=394264c77c560f72679ac54ede4487fb) ### Converged Assets: A New Asset Type We have introduced a new asset type called **Converged** that helps the user in a scenario where multiple infrastructure components, for example compute, storage, and network, are managed and delivered as a single package. This makes it easier for the organizations to categorize and report spend related to the converged or integrated platforms. The converged asset can now be created or loaded and included in the reporting and allocation rules. ![Converged Asset-20251120-103258.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_82e5fec836784fedc8db5824ef5f0306a2186890c99ab38398eeee0f2280576a/Converged%20Asset-20251120-103258.png?cb=81ce33d9e2bc29defd229b4be0b4650f) ### Allocation (100%) Percentage Calculation Logic The allocation percentage calculation logic is now improved to show 100% distribution. In some cases, the allocation percentage appeared as 99% instead of 100%, even though the difference between the allocated and total amounts was negligible (at the sub-decimal level). We have fixed this by implementing a tolerance rule: If the absolute difference between the allocated and total amount is less than or equal to 1 dollar, the system will treat it as 100% allocation. ## 2025-11-03 Enhancements and bug fixes ### API Connection Creation Flow The API Connection creation process has been redesigned to provide a more seamless and secure integration experience. As part of this enhancement, the consent URL for integrating APIs (Microsoft Graph API, Power BI API, and Google API) is now embedded directly within the application that allows users to complete the authorization within the app. When creating a new connection, users can now: * Select the connection type and connect to the corresponding API through an in-app OAuth popup, where they can grant the required permissions. * Copy and share the consent URL if authorization needs to be completed externally. * Optionally auto-create pipelines for the initial data ingestion during the connection setup. ![image-20251104-123413.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8c7bf4af6b939356f74bfc5887add44de8849a6c99a52519b563cb020612e41b/image-20251104-123413.png?cb=2ddf2fe64cf82c6a1b8f643454eb1cb4) ### New Allocation Strategy on Tower Rules A new allocation strategy is enabled in the tower rules that allows users to allocate spend based on a combination of **Account** , **Cost** **Center** , and **SKU**. ![New allocation strategy-20251104-123621.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8daf2937f1e903e0d2c223f405755e05b9ef3ce824efe0209dd3e3793ea32f25/New%20allocation%20strategy-20251104-123621.png?cb=34441bd72023d8066cc1af2d1fecd334) ### Field Mapping -- Persist Default Values Across Uploads and Pipelines The field mapping process has been enhanced to retain and reuse default values defined during the mapping stage. Previously, when users selected a default value for a field, the application did not persist this value in future uploads or automated processes. With this update, the chosen default value is now stored within the mapping configuration and automatically applied whenever the same mapping is reused via last loaded mappings. Additionally, pipelines that use these saved mappings will also utilize the stored default values. ![Screenshot 2025-11-04 at 4.24.06 PM-20251104-105440.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5a77b598c17e36cc93f3233724e3dab98f3e01d62d140d769949a1d225c40da7/Screenshot%202025-11-04%20at%204.24.06%E2%80%AFPM-20251104-105440.png?cb=b34ef7e5020242e1105f6d4172d475e8) ### Custom Dashboard - Disable Links in Edit Mode When editing a custom dashboard, dashboard links are now disabled to prevent accidental navigation. Previously, if a user clicked a linked widget or dashboard while in edit mode, it could cause the user to lose their unsaved changes. With this update, all links (to other default dashboards or custom dashboards) remain inactive during edit mode. ![Screenshot 2025-11-04 at 11.42.51 AM-20251104-061350.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9bffe35f3bf255a82b2a1b7dc8a68cfbad3392ffc77e0092c8a8282fbdf03643/Screenshot%202025-11-04%20at%2011.42.51%E2%80%AFAM-20251104-061350.png?cb=5a04bd449f28b164f89c586625d3863b) ### SKU on GL Transaction Popup An **SKU** field is added to the GL Transaction popups within the Tower and Cost Pool module. ![Screenshot 2025-11-04 at 5.04.16 PM-20251104-113434.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_da432ff838774cd51e61a53cfd42ec896f66c9dca8d909e9bf017f3519c8f40c/Screenshot%202025-11-04%20at%205.04.16%E2%80%AFPM-20251104-113434.png?cb=cd166ffe6073c842ffc3aab948ee9d73) ### Prior Year Data Fixes on Charts and Reports An issue was identified when showing the previous year's data on the charts, where prior year values on charts did not show the full previous year's data. This discrepancy happened because the month filter applied on the dashboards was also being applied to the previous year's data, instead of limiting it to the current year only. This behavior has been corrected so that month filters only apply to the current year's data. The filter ensures that prior year values are excluded from the filtering conditions, and the charts show the full previous year's data. ![Screenshot 2025-11-04 at 6.47.27 PM-20251104-131919.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ea891117c6515d53d4a00a65279bf10c918aa1f4d0caca0c9e12f8e6d02a0e8e/Screenshot%202025-11-04%20at%206.47.27%E2%80%AFPM-20251104-131919.png?cb=71d09f5973bc68fbb9796868873cad2c) ### Solution Mapping Field Mismatch An issue was identified in the solution mapping process where downloading and reuploading the same file resulted in errors due to field name mismatches. Specifically, during the download, the fields Asset ID and Offering ID were automatically converted to Asset Code and Offering Code, causing discrepancies when reuploading the file. This issue has now been resolved, and the downloaded files retain the correct field names. ## 2025-10-20 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Tower Rules A new grid component has been integrated into the tower rules to enhance rule handling and user experience. The new grid improves performance, responsiveness, and usability when managing large tower rules. It supports smoother scrolling, faster data loading, and more efficient rendering of rule entries. ![image-20251029-093915.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c2ff695ef81ee371d3cfb8887a41ceef6d3978c518474ff75feb460677c89b19/image-20251029-093915.png?cb=8d4f0effaccaa483dd52bacb986db166) ### User Name in License Usage A new permission option has been introduced under Default Settings to control whether user names can be retrieved and displayed in the License Usage reports. Admins can now choose to grant or deny permission for retrieving user names by selecting **Yes** or **No**. ![Screenshot 2025-10-29 at 5.50.30 PM-20251029-122151.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_77ae4c367bf84dab5b43924dbf6f1d7624a2d6a17ed441cbffabb6af11eaa95d/Screenshot%202025-10-29%20at%205.50.30%E2%80%AFPM-20251029-122151.png?cb=2426d6df3e63f667e2788807148bbfb8) When permission is granted, the application retrieves and displays user names in the License Usage cube for better visibility and tracking. If the permission is not granted, the app will exclude user names and shows empty values. ### Error Status in Connections When a pipeline run fails, the running status is modified to show **Error** . Previously, the pipeline simply displayed the **Success** status, with the error status visible only when the user checked the pipeline's running history. ![Screenshot 2025-10-15 at 2.56.03 PM-20251015-092637.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6cd93272024f43be6064a4aa5a743b0bba6995308aec99699835b78a12ec6fb7/Screenshot%202025-10-15%20at%202.56.03%E2%80%AFPM-20251015-092637.png?cb=5f1010844bc2c4f154e1e021a13f7c47) ### Others Category The Business Unit and Solution Offering on CT charts and tables are updated to show **Others** category when the items exceed the top 20. ![image (24)-20251029-075322.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e32c55aa96f9943e2085ca02b3b020445d470b900c0cf13914fafdfc869caa27/image%20(24)-20251029-075322.png?cb=e122d6aee84a1a0335a6792b54b4a544) The Home page's Sankey chart is also restricted to 10+ items in **Others** category. However, non-home page Sankey is still limited to 20 items. ![image (1)-20251030-113601.jpeg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_49fa4ca86354c58a1aa33407919aa0cd6ab014648f6346dc6b0a030bcded7d0f/image%20(1)-20251030-113601.jpeg?cb=1f11b2d571973d4d9624dac2db494447) ### Asset Rules -- Adjust Portion Button for Rounding Precision When adding the portion to multiple assets in the asset rules, the remaining portion values were not rounding off correctly due to small differences. To address the rounding issue, a new **Adjust Portion** button is added to correct the remaining portion. With this update, the Adjust Portion button automatically adjusts the remaining portion. The button becomes active when the remaining portion is between -0.01 and 0.01. This fix ensures remaining portions always sum up accurately and eliminates manual correction. ![image-20251030-090816.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_314fe8053377e6b8dc0169487bb9e6b2f894fcd0f86568c70935ba4a2872502a/image-20251030-090816.png?cb=d4e58ad944a40f96b79db5190b7d04de) ## 2025-10-13 Enhancements ### Ask YäRKEN on Toolbar The **Ask YäRKEN** button is now relocated to the top toolbar for easier access. ![Screenshot 2025-10-13 at 6.34.51 PM-20251013-130525.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d796d9bdf89349918a2dc69b47343682b1bce90fb15ba8478647b24c37f8fea2/Screenshot%202025-10-13%20at%206.34.51%E2%80%AFPM-20251013-130525.png?cb=3d9bd51d89107e0a40e24a9158018369) ### Pipeline UI Enhancements The **Pipelines** page has been updated with several usability improvements to make managing integrations easier. You can now select multiple pipelines and perform bulk actions --- run, schedule, activate, deactivate, refresh, or delete in a single operation. ![image-20251014-144135.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_678baff1c928c22fdcb652bbeffdd30638d47547eee2dc3140eb4b8c9d5d6d3a/image-20251014-144135.png?cb=933a5267cd6f8e33d4b958e0f2a32af7) A new filter button is added that helps you quickly identify pipelines by type, status (active / inactive), and last run status (failed or success). Additionally, an export option is available to download pipeline details (including name, status, and last run). ### Auto-creation of Pipelines Using Consent Link The **Pipelines** creation process is now easier and faster. When a user accepts the application via the consent link, the system now automatically creates the required pipelines for Microsoft Graph API, Power BI API, and Google API (depending on links). As soon as those pipelines are created, they are triggered to run immediately for initial ingestion without manually triggering the run. ![image-20251014-144535.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_139933f6e8b627e2e38905b3a0997ec614b6dab2032858dbe6f9e6ea8992517c/image-20251014-144535.png?cb=4856849d7f73c17f6c7e1a33ba7dba04) By default the newly created pipelines are scheduled to run monthly on the **7th**. Existing daily and hourly schedules are left unchanged. ![image-20251014-144336.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a1bb632dc5b8e4c426494c7cac0b669dfbd8d879b82ebdc85795a838899bcf45/image-20251014-144336.png?cb=c99c47d97bf31e36611a3985fc3722ae) ### Auto-Capture of Tenant Name in Connections In the **Connections** page, a new Tenant Name column is added to auto capture and populate the tenant names for supported integrations such as Microsoft and Google APIs. If this column is not auto populated then user can opt to add the tenant name manually. ![Connections-20251013-131208.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fc393c9516b07c5c6e561c76c5837acb8c17c957ecd7c1a95f96dbfd12fd6b76/Connections-20251013-131208.png?cb=055e840c5694080a4da56ef0274545e8) ### New Columns in Connections The Connections page is enhanced with two new buttons for the consent: * **Copy Consent URL** -- copying the app consent link to clipboard. * **Redirect to Consent URL** -- opening the consent page directly. Two new status columns have also been added: * **Last Run** - showing the most recent pipeline connection execution time. * **Consent Available** - indicating whether a valid consent/authorization exists for that connection. ![Screenshot 2025-10-15 at 2.40.09 PM-20251015-091152.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7db5483a7dcb331299c4870fb16357c9ef7e3b1f369797d4e1e24753007b0e85/Screenshot%202025-10-15%20at%202.40.09%E2%80%AFPM-20251015-091152.png?cb=e430e37242f9398932b4afe571ec76eb) ### Form Configuration Fields in Budget Upload The configurable fields defined through **Form Configuration** will be correctly displayed in the Budget upload menu and are also included in the budget upload template. ![image-20251013-131437.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_dbc11754a1ccc001fcecb812c4d40c4072e5847dea018de479f2af514fffa23d/image-20251013-131437.png?cb=2e307491fc24e66fad3177850f253b31) ![Form Config-20251013-131553.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d5e86304b9930e231e9ed2436fbd81a693581adcb362572a31563927dc92ada8/Form%20Config-20251013-131553.png?cb=edcc5912ebc77fac30138163678b0d8a) ### Ask YäRKEN Feedback on Responses An interactive feedback feature has been introduced for the **Ask YäRKEN** assistant. Users can now provide quick feedback on AI responses using thumbs up (good response) or thumbs down (bad response) icons. ![Screenshot 2025-10-14 at 9.47.15 PM-20251014-162508.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_21537eb4cfb73a4efab572990aa034230281374961947c045a5056a4b0a424d5/Screenshot%202025-10-14%20at%209.47.15%E2%80%AFPM-20251014-162508.png?cb=e4f0c8df6fa758106b399836ad9f2b0d) ## 2025-10-06 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Ask YäRKEN on Custom Dashboard An Ask YäRKEN **Copilot** capability is now available directly on the custom dashboards. Users can use the Ask YäRKEN icon on the charts to ask questions or get insights about the underlying data. The Copilot is supported in all chart types except Data Table, Pivot Table, Metric, and Sankey Chart and can be enabled or disabled. The supported chart type includes a copilot option (when customizing the widgets) where users can optionally specify a custom prompt tailored to that widget's context, for example, guidance for interpreting the chart, suggested questions, or a focused data query. If no custom prompt is provided at the widget level, the Copilot will consider the global prompt set in the application settings. ![Ask Yarken-20251013-124438.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5649a95e121639ffb364abc9d603f4ee33fe7a0c89b3ac729c52596f68ad15df/Ask%20Yarken-20251013-124438.png?cb=15b817b25c7730512d835f086a9afeff) ### Custom Fields in Master Data and Account Payables Following custom fields are added in the **Master Data** and **Account Payables**: * **Custom String 1** to**5** * **Custom Number 1** to**5** * **Custom Date 1** to**2** Currently, these fields are only used for upload rules and not intended for reporting in Analytics and Custom Dashboards. However, they can be added after evaluating the performance. ![Master Data -20251010-131907.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9c6a27c536c0f3e9b3485d710dd79a23bcf13f67d66df19e3fbfc0ffd39163c4/Master%20Data%20-20251010-131907.png?cb=bf5a7d263bdc8e434a7e3caab5c46a69) ![Account Payables-20251010-132106.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ab6cd62ae2cd4e9e3cac0841d0f2112842f0dbe0e341e8fa63a80845dea94734/Account%20Payables-20251010-132106.png?cb=d0c2f2a83338acdd58939948e9b6f64a) ### Additional Columns in Solution Offerings and Services Asset The **Solution Offerings** and **Services** asset type now includes new columns to enhance data classification and grouping within the application: * **Class 1** * **Class 2** * **Group 1** * **Group 2** ![SO-20251013-125411.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1e50ec9dc842181651c855bf23b402f586d25e1d181245d92e9422d4ac877c76/SO-20251013-125411.png?cb=260aaa0670c93106afb44082db83c87a) ![Services -20251013-125255.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9e9746f732956a1efc49d334b5cf56537dd70ac0f35493e9dd735044100e59c8/Services%20-20251013-125255.png?cb=f1522c2cf80e5fdd1d0ff3eeb298ed69) ### Fix for Cloud Spend Inconsistency between Analytics and Resource Report The monthly cloud spend amount on individual resources was inconsistent between Analytics and the resource report. An issue was encountered in the monthly spend because the resource IDs were segregating the cube's data, and the amount was not aggregating within that month. ### Budget Reloads and Variance Issue When reloading the budgets, the budget amount was doubled up because the existing records were not deleted. This issue is handled and the amount does not duplicates for both Reload, Remap and Reload functionality. ## September 29, 2025 Enhancements ### Support for Multiple Authentication Providers To enable users to log in using their organization's preferred identity provider, the application now supports multiple authentication providers. Currently, **Okta** authentication is enabled in addition to the Microsoft Entra ID (Azure AD). At the login screen, users can select their desired provider and authenticate with multi-factor authentication (MFA) methods. This provides a smoother onboarding experience for organizations that use different identity platforms across their environments. ![Multi Provider Authentication-20250930-093932.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_aa9cdabfdc2059fe099a3adf72cf02b04f0387ea2ff111a75c14bcd6c6714ecb/Multi%20Provider%20Authentication-20250930-093932.png?cb=6563de3bb38ff766fbc38dd680fcedb0) ### Enhanced Tower Rules -- Distribution to Assets by Percentage We have enhanced the tower rules creation process to support percentage distribution to multiple assets. As part of tower rule creation, user can allocate tower spend directly to assets by specifying the percentage of split at the asset level. This improvement enables users to allocate tower spend more flexibly at the asset level by directly assigning percentage. ![By Asset Percentage-20250930-125415.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_14437c1677627423896791bc1e26cbb6dd6af151ebff165f0e271f55b384d8e9/By%20Asset%20Percentage-20250930-125415.png?cb=d383244224c77b4b829c8c8ce2f79c07) A new option, "**By Asset Percentage**," has been added for distributing tower spend to multiple assets within a single asset type. After choosing this option, users can select one or more assets (within the same asset type) and define the percentage against each of the assets. For example, when distributing tower spend to Application asset type, the user can select multiple assets from the same asset types, such as APP 01, APP 02, and so on, and specify the percentage of each. ![Screenshot 2025-09-30 at 6.26.35 PM-20250930-125705.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4703a23d5120e2dc10e0233a1ccf02fc6915c7a7b7941cdd6452d22c04f513c7/Screenshot%202025-09-30%20at%206.26.35%E2%80%AFPM-20250930-125705.png?cb=f5cec8ea7b3355c9bf5a932bc850c7cb) This new option also ensures that the allocation rule saves after the spend has been fully allocated (100%). To check the asset percentage distribution, the **Asset Split** column is added under the TOWER RULES tab. ![Asset Split-20250930-125904.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2d0e1dfe8df2547b70b78669cf80e157aa1565a52f04d69812d462d3f5face01/Asset%20Split-20250930-125904.png?cb=a8498f712255a500356904c7352310b2) ### New Generic Asset Type -- Miscellaneous A new asset type called **Miscellaneous** has been introduced to support more generic asset loading scenarios. This asset type can be used to load any asset data that does not fit into existing asset categories. With this new asset type, the app now provides greater flexibility in managing and mapping diverse assets without needing to create another asset type. ![Miiscellaneous-20250930-123404.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cf14368f7c8a460ab5bab55c509e2df2d2afcf698bc368619a2fcd7bf4142180/Miiscellaneous-20250930-123404.png?cb=cc5f447fbbe7f833825974cf896851cd) ## September 22, 2025 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Integration of AG Grid in Budget and Forecasting We've added AG grid into the planning and forecasting module to provide a faster, flexible, and adaptive table experience. This upgrade delivers more interactive experience when working with large datasets in budget and forecast. The new AG grid adds the customizations along with advanced table features such as column resizing, sorting, filtering, grouping, and data export. ![image-20250923-100925.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b029498002c97662643e1664fdc7c0f77eacaf9c3608efa08fd93b13de1fd9f1/image-20250923-100925.png?cb=654dd554b8ca278678e8431e42b081af) In addition, users can now customize their tables by adding or removing columns, as well as save and export their current configuration for reuse. This ensures that each user can tailor table views to their specific reporting and analysis needs. ![image-20250923-101314.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1d595ccb4eabe1632e929f190a3f3a09a38cf365231017ca7a81fdd011e8f670/image-20250923-101314.png?cb=fd8e942af4f3d5c930abdf4cb3272fbf) This integration delivers a more interactive and customizable experience in data-heavy screens, making it easier to analyze and manage information. ### Seeding Journal ID and Transaction Date The Upload Rule functionality has been enhanced with two powerful new capabilities: 1. **Generate Date Rule Type** A new rule type, **Generate Date** , has been introduced to automatically populate date fields during file uploads. When applied, this rule generates date entries in the format **DD/MM/YYYY**, where the day is always set to the 1st, and the month and year are derived from the file's loaded month and year. This helps ensure consistency and reduces manual entry errors for date-based fields. ![Generate Date-20250923-095306.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b226d6b1fd37e70ce2d1750d3cbfea449846799891e9fdab2eebb65ec0aae8d6/Generate%20Date-20250923-095306.png?cb=ad0f2ab7bce90e71dd49a9b42c410053) 2. **Journal ID Seeding** A new capability has been added to create a Journal ID sequence by concatenating multiple values, making it easier to generate unique identifiers during uploads. Three new fields have been added to the dropdown of Concatruletype: * **#Default** -- allows you to add a default editable value. * **#Sequence** -- generates a sequential number automatically. It includes a year Id -- month id of the uploaded month \& year. * **#File Name** -- uses the file name in the concatenation. ![Journal ID Seeding-20250923-095625.png](/__attachments/a_6943306eca4503a6b8fc209e1473154fb61b6845d2132aa8333c5bff3ee63ecb/Journal%20ID%20Seeding-20250923-095625.png?cb=9a9d8eb05253ef89360058449c0cc8d0) 3. **Unique IDs** The Concat rule type is now provided with a new **Unique** field. This new field is used to covert the duplicate IDs into an unique IDs by incrementing the duplicates. After executing the upload rule using unique field, the destination column concatenated with unique sequence for example, JRNL001-1, JRNL001-2, JRNL001-3 and so on, followed by user defined seperator value. To ensure clarity and avoid discrepancies, it is recommended to use a separatorvalue when applying this rule. ![Unique-20251001-080103.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5c464535fa671b241731b077b63e2b8b717dacaa850f3f7f1b4d6198e48dcfa9/Unique-20251001-080103.png?cb=b9fd6d9749ec58ec28935f31a606d349) These enhancements simplify the upload process, reduce manual adjustments, and ensure better traceability of uploaded records. ### Configurable Project ID Field for Budget and Forecasting A new **Project ID** field has been introduced for the Budget and Forecast modules. This field can be configured through the Form Configuration settings. By enabling a Project ID field, users can better align budgets and forecast with project-specific tracking requirements. ![Project ID_form sub-20250923-102238.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c351f139d6307f4938880d607fffc183277c7d4433683869ccc383dfd227507d/Project%20ID_form%20sub-20250923-102238.png?cb=099e8e7e39b2621d45af03ebaf5e6512) ![Project ID-20250923-102143.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_03ed457bfc2eaf10eec2256dd53cfd77d1ea86d87e381ada643de559e0fc8c85/Project%20ID-20250923-102143.png?cb=ce032ab2288dba4c64b0e8fa707312a0) ### New Variance Fields in Companion Metrics Cube The **Companion Metrics** cube is enhanced with two new additional fields: Variance Amount and Variance Value. ![Screenshot 2025-09-23 at 2.59.18 PM-20250923-093034.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bd1045a62fc2733e0d887ef6d8561cf480d9fe7c8708e3d961f273f54128b804/Screenshot%202025-09-23%20at%202.59.18%E2%80%AFPM-20250923-093034.png?cb=02fb156b93f8f2ef8c91901e2afc4f99) ### Unallocated Asset Spend Fix The Product and Services assets spend distribution will be filtered out from Unallocated Asset Spend. ![Unallocated Asset Spend-20250923-103402.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1d6557591940269ab3961a23ddb29ec90b5d6745d3f29644e7845fd405db06fb/Unallocated%20Asset%20Spend-20250923-103402.png?cb=eff1af8bcbcf96b3c4b357d806753189) ### Forecast Variance Filter Fix The variance percentage filter in Analytics and the Custom Dashboard will now appear in percentage form instead of decimal form. ![image-20250908-230943.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f502ba3e5b46365cde4ee3df831aec1047cafedd05e5e024c186f6163d1a4527/image-20250908-230943.png?cb=97ad98537b17accb2a4265334b7986ce) ## September 15, 2025 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Additional Fields in Planning Cube The Planning cube in Analytics now includes the following additional fields: * **Total Planning Amount** * **Previous Forecast Amount** * **Total Baseline Amount** * **Total Spend (YTD)** * **Remaining Forecast Amount** * **Variance (vs Baseline)** * **Variance (vs Previous)** ![Additional fields in Planning-20250916-074255.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_59854e30ffcc010ea3a17af408043a41c11203b287586ee276038719e41c4971/Additional%20fields%20in%20Planning-20250916-074255.png?cb=f25b3f4c5e854fbae8299e37e70d76d0) ### No Role - A New Role Type We have introduced a new role called **No Role** in user management. This allows Admins to add users into the system without immediately assigning them access permissions. Users with the No Role option will not have any dashboards, reports, or functional access when they log in, ensuring that access is fully controlled until the Admin assigns a role. ![No Role-20250916-074846.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_dba54288d693cfc06145f13891ebf8dc703e8593c86ea4d6e817eb59ecd47932/No%20Role-20250916-074846.png?cb=ac33d0fc40d45c43b2b3ae9d0ea1a45e) To support bulk user onboarding, the **Roles** field is now made optional when uploading users via file. If no role is specified in the upload file, the system will automatically assign the **No Role** to those users. This makes it easier to pre-load large groups of users into the system and assign roles later as needed. However, when creating users manually through the interface, assigning a role remains mandatory to maintain proper access control. ![Optional Role field-20250916-094357.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_65450cb883f0554fdfa5a953dce19115ad76a1e8e02a9a5e2f59f5ad89b0bcbb/Optional%20Role%20field-20250916-094357.png?cb=34ccae2be560c7c0b9bde83bd895446f) ### Sign In Activity Details - Entra ID and Google Workspace We've introduced a new capability to capture **Entra ID** and **Google Workspace** sign-in activity details for all users in a tenant. This provides visibility into user authentication across your organization. The report includes: * **Tenant ID \& Tenant Name** * **User Email \& User Name** * **Last Accessed App and Vendor** * **Last Activity Date** * **Count of sign-ins** * **Report Date** **Use cases key highlights:** * **Application usage**-- Identify which apps are last accessed across the tenant (Only for Microsoft). * **User activity tracking** -- Monitor last sign-in dates and frequency of user access. * **Account monitoring** -- Detect inactive accounts. * **Audit reporting** -- Maintain tenant-wide authentication records. * **Vendor analysis** -- Tracking sign-in activity across vendors (Microsoft or Google). ![Google Sign-In-20250916-125552.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9a5000eb36d53c6e71b84d090d3acae50d65072eced10b6e77e6cce02bb47630/Google%20Sign-In-20250916-125552.png?cb=3b488b9118599ddf497fbc3c7015a57e) ### Tracking Google Products Usage We've added support to capture and report on monthly product usage across Google productivitytools (Docs, Sheets, and Slides). This helps analysts evaluate actual adoption and optimize license tiers accordingly. **Key highlights** * **Tool adoption tracking** : Monitor adoption trends for **Docs, Sheets, and Slides** at a monthly level. * **Active users**: Understand which productivity tools are most actively used and by which user. * **Monthly activity summary**: Usage data is aggregated and stored in the Product Usage cube. **Captured fields in Product Usage cube:** * Product Date * Tenant Id * Tenant Name * Vendor * App Name * User Email * Count ![Microsoft and Google-20250916-125721.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_13e73ff4877089c576505a88b023ad210c072f0d533916ed033faff2453bb75e/Microsoft%20and%20Google-20250916-125721.png?cb=3e8fec398ff2456788516a0b6f317ed2) ### Spend Refresh Issue on Home Page The Home Page refresh behavior has been modified so that the data will be shown only for the latest cube-refreshed month. Previously, the home screen did not display the latest data unless the cube was refreshed. ## September 08, 2025 Click to expand... ### Open Custom Dashboard Charts in Analytics The charts and tables from the Custom Dashboard can now be opened directly in Analytics. An icon **Open in Analytics** has been added to each chart and table. When clicked, the selected visualization opens in Analytics with the same filter criteria applied. ![Open In Analytics-20250909-125936.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a4e0e3273484fc0966b11e4cc439b5f2276ece12466aa94e9603f67816ebd6a2/Open%20In%20Analytics-20250909-125936.png?cb=3df3c4fed975cd0713f3e155d37600cb) ### New API Integrations We have added new API integrations to expand license usage tracking and reporting. These integrations allow the system to capture richer usage insights directly from Microsoft services: 1. **Power BI API** -- Track usage across Power BI workspaces. Monitor usage patterns and users license count. ![Power BI Workspaces-20250909-150326.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3ebcd3dfe37ecf8731e3a36ec99694f78cae95f41c74eb1ef8f89a0bd976ec2f/Power%20BI%20Workspaces-20250909-150326.png?cb=e8dfa0b081a64a3f4481f35dc2d46ed5) 2. **Defender API** - Retrieve information on Microsoft Defender-enrolled devices. ![Defender Enrolled Devices-20250909-150459.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fe6eb14b491294a6b557c680e7cbe3fab080c2b2724457273b55bac4cf756570/Defender%20Enrolled%20Devices-20250909-150459.png?cb=4bb0f1ebc8b245d00d4b80aa9f2610db) 3. **Teams API** - Capture detailed insights into Teams activity, including active users, to optimize license allocation. ![Teams Activity Details-20250909-150636.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_feb4198ab3c7043db9377bcd14d34c17d1af0a2fc0bbffc23185977148ebe3e2/Teams%20Activity%20Details-20250909-150636.png?cb=3695f427562ab0cccddac460105acee4) 4. **Entra ID API** -- Access sign-in activity logs for Entra ID (Azure AD), last access app and last activity dates. ![Entra ID Sign In Activity Logs-20250909-150747.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cb51f69588296c0058c8b186bba406b45e779a71586ed6dd5280a9158cdb3bbb/Entra%20ID%20Sign%20In%20Activity%20Logs-20250909-150747.png?cb=3af1ecb3b807d05c07cdf20f4f093c2f) **New APIs unlocked** ![New APIs Integration-20250909-130610.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_91730e63ccc0351327e22e22ddd05d78dc311f9b9eafa5926ff888cbae4639b8/New%20APIs%20Integration-20250909-130610.png?cb=9af86cb594d3041c4c5a0bb6c91c7186) ### License Storage Migration All license usage and product usage data is now stored in files instead of the database. The data has been moved to S3 in Parquet format, improving scalability, performance, and storage efficiency. This change also ensures faster retrieval and better handling of large datasets. ## September 01, 2025 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Global Search - A New Search Capability on Menubar A new **Global Search** feature has been introduced in the application. This allows end users to search across configured resource types (standard \& custom dashboards, or reports) directly from menubar without navigating through multiple dashboards. The configuration for global search is managed by the admin through application Settings. While setting it up, the admin can define the following criteria: * **Resource Type** -- The type of resource to be made searchable. * **Cube Table Name** -- The data source table to query. * **Column Name** -- The specific column(s) to be included in search. * **Path \& Path Type** -- To determine navigation context and hierarchy. * **Filter Field** -- To apply additional search filters. Once the global search is enabled by the admin, you can quickly search for configured resource type. This capability can also be disabled if it is not required. ![Global search on menubar-20250905-144057.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9440778121a21af0a7322ae985dc1ae037b07a8ac5255f59c6f7d342af39e4ea/Global%20search%20on%20menubar-20250905-144057.png?cb=6195a10539e2657d3deb05d92830e741) ![Global search - Settings-20250905-134653.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b840d45f9f1aa66e15cab8f53c50886de60c31db8c171ce47575e520b5a4532e/Global%20search%20-%20Settings-20250905-134653.png?cb=f910c79d121ba38a6bed3d2267768921) ### SKU Level Budgeting and Forecasting We have enabled SKU-level budgeting and forecasting to provide more granular planning and analysis. A new optional field called **SKU** has been added in the Budget and Forecast planning module. This allows users to define and track spend, budget, and forecast values at the SKU level. Users can also specify the SKU when loading spend to track expenditure at a SKU level. ![SKU in Budget-20250905-125926.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8f732b98f427d476c94fab2189cb326d76422806f8d7c989d64f96e6f004b782/SKU%20in%20Budget-20250905-125926.png?cb=42363fee6fca6b206792bf8aad5ed80b) When the SKU is provided, the spend and budget can be compared for a given SKU and available for the reporting. This field can also be enabled through the Form Configuration. ![SKU in Spend-20250905-130308.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9fd2dfed0c1b7b5c702b3a58ab03abda664b73b73e315bb588d770f3e6c8fc53/SKU%20in%20Spend-20250905-130308.png?cb=e68ecb7f6e64d60f4c2d1c48cdc8f83c) ### Custom Dashboard Fixes Previously on the custom dashboard, when no saved reports were available, users were left without any indication or ability to proceed. There was no message explaining the absence of reports, nor an option to create a new one. The issue is addressed and the dashboard now: * Displays a clear message **No saved reports**, indicating that no reports are saved. * Provides an option to create a new report directly from the same view. ![No saved reports-20250905-075220.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e3906e025a09f0919fbb6842e888275f8a140490a5e1522e1e39d9de4618a1a7/No%20saved%20reports-20250905-075220.png?cb=0d2537f180ed013df3c52af757b87c3b) ## August 25, 2025 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Manual Tenant Configuration We have introduced a new capability to allow manual tenant setup. Admins can now directly configure the Tenant ID and domain. During configuration, admins also have the option to: * Enable **Invite Only** -- restricts access to invited users only. * Enable **Azure AD Roles** -- allows role assignments to be mapped from Azure AD roles. ![image-20250822-094341.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_449fa67a062423cbd21bd39fe9374d8695b34ce36998bc725cd3404dbe42809d/image-20250822-094341.png?cb=57ad2611c6ae3174e54224b585ae5662) The added M365 tenant is used both for authentication and for collecting M365 license data. Additionally, a delete button has been added so that admins can remove a tenant configuration if it is no longer required. ### Reload and Remap for All File Types We have extended the reload and remap functionality for all the file types. Previosly it was only added for spend files. ![Reload and Remap-20250905-131413.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_20597b66d75a8e4d61e824ad4932064b6414430b7686c6146282dc2a97a9c31e/Reload%20and%20Remap-20250905-131413.png?cb=4695b3361a06d7cf8e19d29f953ad31f) ### Multiple User Upload via CSV A new capability has been added to streamline user management. Admins can now upload a CSV file containing user details directly from the **Users**page. This allows quick creation of multiple users in a single step. * If a username already exists, the user's details are automatically updated instead of creating a duplicate. ![User upload button-20250902-074840.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8797d9bec232b9d0a8822050d9c66b6d7d3b143e70ea8409244fddc9f74ed2ad/User%20upload%20button-20250902-074840.png?cb=63dae03278a4d7c54b109be6b3df8c33) ### Piipeline - Manage the Connections A new option to manage connections has been added to the Pipeline feature. Users can now: * Define new connections for various cloud storage types. * Edit or delete existing connections. * Validate connection credentials. A **TEST CONNECTION** button is provided to verify the entered credentials before saving. This validation can also be used on existing connections to ensure they remain valid. ![image-20250905-133338.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_df5b98770f86c1499a0e8251506ca3da7f19e322a3fbbea62048b745b5fadc66/image-20250905-133338.png?cb=ad2f911c45d12532a148fcdf5280b4f4) ![Test Connection-20250905-133527.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6eee21ca866944d345050699ba38a0fa7787bac15fd8167012c11c450f6ebbb9/Test%20Connection-20250905-133527.png?cb=9943202c96daff9408abd4c18f7a9afb) ### Cloud Dashboards - Month Filter Update The following changes have been applied across all cloud dashboards: * The default global month filter has been relocated under the Add Filter option. By default, dashboards no longer display a specific month's data. Users must manually add the month filter to view monthly data, with the ability to select multiple months. * A global year filter is now available by default on the dashboard. * The Spend YTD KPI has been removed. ![Cloud dashboard - Month filter-20250905-131054.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_40172a78b03343013a1ca3072c20d3661374ebc51db36787fbcb2a7a2fa08cd4/Cloud%20dashboard%20-%20Month%20filter-20250905-131054.png?cb=98ce4a1af8be6be0c412e7d9313ce704) ### CSV Download Data Formatting Issue Previously, we used the XLSXpackage to convert and download data as CSV files. However, due to the package's default behavior, number-type strings were automatically reformatted, causing discrepancies in the actual data. To resolve this, we have updated the process to bypassthe**XLSX**package and directly generate CSV files. Now, all field and row values are wrapped in quotation marks, ensuring data format preservation and consistency. ## August 18, 2025 Bug fix ### Upload Rule - Matching Criteria in Lookup Rule Type In the Upload Rules, the Lookup rule type was not performing exact matches and occasionally returned incorrect values due to the recent field updates in this rule type. The rule sometimes provided partial matches instead of the complete value. To address this, we have introduced a new field called **Operator to use for matching**, which allows users to define the matching criteria. The available options are: * **equals to** * **contains** * **starts with** * **ends with** This ensures more accurate results when applying lookup rules during data upload. ![image-20250820-075303.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d3182a01264c34ed2722d7555e01f21efd782b525d779e40ee8d3f05518db1fc/image-20250820-075303.png?cb=d0cbdeca34d795d1686e120a7f316137) ## August 11, 2025 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Insights - A New Feature for Anomaly Detection We're thrilled to announce **Insights** , a powerful new feature designed to elevate your FinOps and TBM practices withrule-based intelligence**.** With Insights, you can now automatically detect anomalies, explain cost trends, and uncover optimization opportunities across both cloud and non-cloud spend. **Key Features \& Capabilities** 1. **Smart Anomaly Detection** * Detect unexpected spikes, drops, or unusual patterns in spending, budgets, and variances. * Proactively identify cost risks before they impact your financial goals. ![Insights Details-20250814-143453.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4cde82a9c0a506fddc1eb37761b7918bfcdce736b60ee757bb3a9426496c3ad3/Insights%20Details-20250814-143453.png?cb=2177a61ead0136814e3fe829f16fc544) 2. **Rule-Based Insight Engine** * Each insight is generated by a user-defined rule, allowing precise control over what's monitored. * Define custom rules to trigger insights based on your unique business needs. * Configure rules by selecting: * **Data sources** (cloud/non-cloud spend, budgets, etc.) * **Detection methods** (thresholds, statistical deviations) * **Metrics \& dimensions** (e.g., by provider, cloud service, account) * **Alert preferences** (on Teams, Slack, email) * Frequency, cooldown periods, and priority levels for processing insight. ![Insights Rule-20250814-143627.png](/__attachments/a_78cce04988023319cb7c523dfae969e21c2177ecf0b645f51fcd8f3ca8916531/Insights%20Rule-20250814-143627.png?cb=e6d030414cdcebe5f99921bf067df770) 3. **Interactive Visualization \& Analysis** * After rule execution, view detailed anomaly information directly on interactive charts. 4. **Resolution Workflow** * Detected anomalies can be acknowledged and resolved from the Insights screen, making follow-up simple and trackable. ![Insights workflow-20250814-143810.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_33ce3b20e7c0c91ba0455c36137b68ebb60dadd4dc4d78428cd15f1db66ee395/Insights%20workflow-20250814-143810.png?cb=61ce007f258d61ef6692c8a9f04f5fe9) **Insights user flow (Quickstart)** 1. **Create a Rule** -- Define what constitutes an anomaly for your business. 2. **Get Alerts** -- Receive notifications when deviations occur. 3. **Analyze Insights** -- Investigate anomalies with visual trend breakdowns. 4. **Take Action** -- Resolve issues or optimize costs based on findings. This first release focuses on Anomaly Detection, with additional insight types planned for future updates, enabling deeper cost, usage, and performance optimization. ### Default Field Values During Mapping We have added a new ability to set default values for any field types during the field mapping. A new dropdown option called **Provide Default** is included in every field, and the user can select and enter a default value next to the corresponding field. This default is applied only during the first upload. For subsequent uploads, the default must be set again if required. ![image-20250814-152035.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f4b4d23830db63d0226122681aed3b609cdf997ac3032e2c968a26fe9d144c9e/image-20250814-152035.png?cb=77c55521ed70913f3f52ad3cba452dae) ### Set Any Dashboard as Homepage We've expanded the capability of setting the **Default Dashboard** to users. Previously, only custom dashboards could be set as the homepage. With this update, any standard dashboard can now be set as the home screen. The existing capability of the Dashboard Only user role also extended to have access to the standard dashboard on the home page. The admin can set the existing standard dashboard as a home page in addition to the custom dashboards. ![Dashboard Only User Role View-20250814-164454.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d7610a263994083b9b25af0b2e0a671361774eed15be9017496414743a441ee8/Dashboard%20Only%20User%20Role%20View-20250814-164454.png?cb=328562faee812cd80bc7611e29109014) ### Upload Rule - Lookup Rule Type Modification The previous **Lookup** and **Lookup Table** rule types have been merged into a single **Lookup** rule type. The field names within the Lookup rule have been updated for clarity: ![Lookup Rule Type-20250814-150727.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2d7dc85f74b0b4a3083642b14c3558519ca80085553e6ff8ad245ddee3d82f38/Lookup%20Rule%20Type-20250814-150727.png?cb=f0efce231990e45b7df3f6709985e649) ### Recommendation Details UX Change The **Recommendation** **Details** popup UI changes: * Potential and Realized savings: rearrange the sequence. * Source: icons are added. * Details: wrapped text inside the container. * Status column: color-coded. * Complexity \& Value: Added the start rating. ![Recommendation UI-20250814-152255.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b98899e60c842c423cb1e1a48b80f75819593b45e723216abacf3abe860052d2/Recommendation%20UI-20250814-152255.png?cb=9388f6686519c1f024f9f9f60b21d6bb) ### Fix for Tower Rules Equally Distribution The existing tower rules for spend distribution to assets based on the Asset ID field (GL) were not being applied correctly during asset file uploads. Instead, the spend was being distributed equally across all assets. This issue has now been fixed, and the tower rules are applied properly during asset file uploads. ## August 04, 2025 Enhancements ### Budget Module -- Field Configuration via Form Configuration We have added a new capability to enable or disable the data items on the budget module. Users can now manually configure budget-related fields using the newly added **Form Configuration** option under Settings, allowing to utilize only specific data fields that are required during the budget process. ![Screenshot 2025-08-05 at 4.51.40 PM-20250805-112151.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4ef59bf04dd023a0ee2b929e69e9c9b5ee0105821053b29b5539e5ee1016e9f0/Screenshot%202025-08-05%20at%204.51.40%E2%80%AFPM-20250805-112151.png?cb=4b9c9f01c6e7d1e214444159d3089374) The form is provided with the dropdown option to select the configurable fields for budgets, such as Cost Pools, Sub Cost Pools, Tower, Sub Tower, Spend Category, and Spend Categorization. Users may use the original field names or rename them as needed. For non-TBM fields, the user can define the custom field values and set a default if no value is selected. These fields can also be disabled when not required. The form ensures that the TBM taxonomy fields for the budget are handled properly to maintain consistency. ![image-20250805-112346.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_324f55549efdfa6022bfab144543001ca47edce472a3b40c585f28b33f9f4704/image-20250805-112346.png?cb=09e40e55936c4567478f7302b12edcb1) When configured, the chosen fields appear across all areas (uploads, downloads, edit, view, push to CT, load from CT, etc.). This functionality is currently limited to the Budget module, with plans to extend it to other modules in the future. ## July 28, 2025 Enhancements and bug fixes ### Ask **YäRKEN** Enhancements **Ask** **YäRKEN** is now enhanced to better recognize and respond to domain-related and how-to questions. Additionally, the model can now explain changes in spend across parent dimensions. For example, when asked, "What caused the dip in Microsoft spend in 2025 compared to 2023?", the model analyzes underlying drivers such as cost pools and towers to provide a clear explanation of the spend variance. ![Screenshot 2025-07-30 at 3.57.32 PM-20250730-102755.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_919a11df79da540d4d1715e008fbe6243888d4d5973d37565af46d2b461b719e/Screenshot%202025-07-30%20at%203.57.32%E2%80%AFPM-20250730-102755.png?cb=0dd84b19b56f2ff4126780cb3f70b6c6) ### New Filter Values in Custom Dashboard and Analytics * The custom dashboard's new filter values: ![Filters on custom dashboard-20250730-080036.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_93ebc4599c3a6164827be548ce41e98f4387906fcb9140a30c47bf7ab2c327f9/Filters%20on%20custom%20dashboard-20250730-080036.png?cb=e621875fe03d501ffed46f3426482ca6) * The new filter values in Analytics to refine the specific date, **is relative time**: ![is relative time-20250729-101545.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2f30c0043092ac6c1902da84428be81bb6a721a60ca4e1294064f3f6babd8f64/is%20relative%20time-20250729-101545.png?cb=e0665abfc4af317cff7463cee30bedd3) ![Filters - is relative time -20250729-122603.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7382fef016c5efadb61a4422d829f7ff0cece7f0c49132709f604c6f8154a3da/Filters%20-%20is%20relative%20time%20-20250729-122603.png?cb=e30e988977c51f878d34c0b9d71cf4b4) ## Bug Fixes This release version includes the below bug fixes: * The error message for character limit exceeds shown during data upload---such as "**Value exceeds the allowable limit of 255 characters in 'String 1' column**"---did not reflect the actual column name. This has now been corrected. The error message is updated to display the real column name and allowable characters limit. Additionally the limited characters message enabled for manual loading. ![image-20250729-115357.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a636b829ac301e866b8779d4527189db739ee7be7d19d0a4cbfe50a0297bf547/image-20250729-115357.png?cb=42a75a775c8ad750f17ce34fcdda194e) * An issue was identified in the **Combination Chart** type on custom dashboards, where sorting applied to the chart was getting removed from the customized widget panel after clicking on the chart. The applied sorting is retained correctly even after interacting with the combination chart. ![image-20250729-115654.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_347fdf8bbcdf92494b16852e13328adae8c0e2b137eb6dc8ce3e1a3ff1f9b84e/image-20250729-115654.png?cb=27d7e5478cf6418e1785770be81064e0) * A partial data loading issue was found in the upload rules, where certain rows were not loading and were silently dropped without any error indication. This occurred due to the asynchronous execution of record deletion and creation in the backend, resulting in data loss. This has now been resolved. The upload process is updated to ensure that deletions are complete before new records are created. ## July 21, 2025 Bug fixes and enhancements ### New Upload Rule Type: Date Format A new upload rule type called **Date Format** has been introduced. This new rule type allows users to create the upload rules for mapping the date columns with specific format during the data upload. This is particularly useful when the upload file contains dates in a format different from the system default. If not specified, the system will apply its default date format, which may vary depending on the environment. ![Rule Type-Date Format-20250722-124133.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_99955729ddb9fd3b321d30ededdbb4743a95c20fc6473964715e9091733eb5c1/Rule%20Type-Date%20Format-20250722-124133.png?cb=1d510ab057d729a6cf6c8b6decfa174a) ### Fix for Duplicate Priorities in Cost Pool and Tower Rules Due to Deletion Failure An issue was identified in the Tower Rules and Cost Pool rules where duplicate priority values appeared after copying rules from another month. This occurred because the deletion of existing tower expenditures (performed in the backend) failed under heavy load, while the rule copying process still proceeded---resulting in duplicated priorities in a month. The deletion process has now been optimized to handle higher loads more efficiently. ![image-20250722-123403.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a29cb7ce45021e50f5d0c4a4c831ae36c9429b115ae34d66d72961eb5adcab8c/image-20250722-123403.png?cb=82261917859e480c8c72b04750397db5) ## July 14, 2025 Bug fixes and enhancements ### Enhanced Applications Chart in Solution TCO Dashboard The Applications chart on the Solution TCO dashboard is enhanced to provide detailed spend visibility. It now displays spend coming not only from Applications but also from Products and Services. A new filter called **Capability Type** is added to distinguish spend sources contributing to a particular solution. This filter is applied specifically to the chart itself and does not affect the rest of the dashboard. ![Screenshot 2025-07-16 at 4.52.13 PM-20250716-112252.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8568b8d5f756dd04b5c0fc942fa56bdcb2911d44d5cd9fae7370eac39ecde364/Screenshot%202025-07-16%20at%204.52.13%E2%80%AFPM-20250716-112252.png?cb=29d058ab87ec1f59c312793b0357a6d1) ### New Spend Classification Column in Budget Items A new optional column named **Spend** **Classification** is added to budget items. This column provides a dropdown selection with values such as **Committed** and **Discretionary**. If no selection is made, the default value is set to Discretionary. ![Screenshot 2025-07-16 at 4.55.33 PM-20250716-112623.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_73a00a7745e8faee61e396b2378081e1ea29d2912829ed8132980c82e76f58d7/Screenshot%202025-07-16%20at%204.55.33%E2%80%AFPM-20250716-112623.png?cb=e46467bea7198e932f44d825d5cd551d) ### Cost Center Charts Limited to Top 20 Records The cost center charts across all dashboards and reports have been updated to display only the top 20 cost centers, improving chart loading speed and ensuring efficient rendering. Along with this change, the chart titles have been updated to **Top 20 Cost Centers** to reflect this improvement. ### Fix for Reuploading Upload Rules File When users downloaded and reuploaded the upload rules file, the Ignore Rows rule type would fail to upload because the Destination field was incorrectly enforced as mandatory. This field is actually not required for Ignore Rows rules. This issue has now been fixed, and users can reupload the file without needing to include the Destination column for Ignore Rows. ### Lookup Type Fixes An issue occurred during the upload of the lookup types file when a user selected the option to save a field mapping for automation. The file upload process failed when the user opted to store the mapping. This bug has been resolved, and field mappings for automation are saved without errors. ## July 07, 2025 Bug fixes and enhancements ### Deep Links for GCP Cloud Data We have added a new deep link capability for Google Cloud data. Users can now navigate from a Google Cloud resource ID available in the GL popup directly to the corresponding resource page in the Google Cloud Console. This allows you to analyze specific resources in more detail without manually searching for them. ![GCP links-20250708-124939.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_05064e7ecc68c0bc840475735fea4261628d6a10242a39b708242de149964d9c/GCP%20links-20250708-124939.png?cb=4ed02a1ee2d4b9197f76728fd26aee01) ![Google cloud-20250708-124747.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_49874abffc9e47b8e1d879a3a847ecc9685c3e8b904c03533aa90a69c8c5213a/Google%20cloud-20250708-124747.png?cb=5ac805c80f65f402fd26a9c821c99238) ### Resource Explorer - A New Dashboard We've introduced a new **Resource Explorer** dashboard that analyzes daily spend trends for individual cloud resources over the past 45 days. It provides a detailed daily spend analysis for each cloud resource and helps you to track resource-level cost patterns. You can easily drill into individual resources to identify the billing account, service category, and service name to which the resource belongs. The dashboard uses an area chart to clearly illustrate resource spending trends over time. ![Screenshot 2025-07-08 at 6.23.35 PM-20250708-125341.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0d4bc4ab1056f8e6ab3173c67e26b52b20c2d2491b13e3baa816e26f1d1e1946/Screenshot%202025-07-08%20at%206.23.35%E2%80%AFPM-20250708-125341.png?cb=c5fa4edda3ebfb21e9dad5c4afedc970) ### New Filter: Consumed Unit on Monthly Consumed Quantity A new filter called **Consumed Unit** has been added to the **Resource Spend \> Monthly Consumed** Quantity chart. This filter allows you to track and analyze resource usage more precisely based on the unit of consumption (for example, GB, vCPU hours, etc.). With this filter, you can better understand the resource consumption pattern by selecting the specific consumed unit. ![Consumed Unit-20250708-125805.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0a07ad01e795376cc768d46374276aac5cc7e970d1081c53cc343e5f4e7fd7f1/Consumed%20Unit-20250708-125805.png?cb=361e04a616fe97f820abacc5aba5f417) ### Fix for Drill Down on Unknown Values Previously, when drilling down on **Unknown** values in charts or filters, the system was passing the value as Unknown instead of null. This caused charts, reports, and pop-ups to show **No Data** and fail to render properly. This issue has now been fixed. Charts, reports, and popups all work correctly for Unknown values. ![Screenshot 2025-07-08 at 6.33.41 PM-20250708-130609.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2abbc74a2bc7638d52247e30851a47d52b8d78af064b28b466c84949a1cff4e2/Screenshot%202025-07-08%20at%206.33.41%E2%80%AFPM-20250708-130609.png?cb=e8894e613cbc80331b0679e237b611db) ![Screenshot 2025-07-08 at 6.36.54 PM-20250708-130738.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3e70a8f0f9a23c217d110050be7fad011e530f2a4d3a42947fbb5f6e65264def/Screenshot%202025-07-08%20at%206.36.54%E2%80%AFPM-20250708-130738.png?cb=e417216bc33cdc0282dc7fcfb77c816c) ### CPI and LPI Edits In the Budgets and Forecast modules, LPI and CPI values are now editable when the budget or forecast is in Draft, In-Progress, or Completed status. Additionally, users can now update the budget or forecast name while in these statuses. The CPI and LPI variables can also include negative values. ![CPI-LPI edits-20250708-131153.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_abdd00ff760b9212db9ee17f22b07d733dd59e023119701d441ac549e29a65af/CPI-LPI%20edits-20250708-131153.png?cb=c7c70d563b7682338f9206f976deaf59) ## Jun 30, 2025 Enhancements ### FOCUS 1.0 Aligned GCP File Integration We've added support for loading **FOCUS 1.0** aligned **GCP** billing files directly into the application. With this enhancement, users can now seamlessly upload and analyze GCP cost and usage data in alignment with FOCUS 1.0 standards. The GCP files can be manually loaded through the application or scheduled using our Pipeline functionality. With the Pipeline feature, users can configure a connection to automatically upload files directly from a bucket storage location. Once defined, the pipeline will automatically fetch and upload the consumption files at scheduled intervals. After successfully loading the GCP usage data, users can access existing cloud dashboards for detailed reporting and analysis. With this enhancement, we now fully support ingestion and analysis of cloud consumption data in FOCUS format for AWS, Azure, and GCP, providing a unified platform to track the cloud spend for all major cloud providers. ![Pipeline_GCP-20250701-094616.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_273241daa67a7847fe44013975e33a9580bc9513814e3117fe520bed2e3404f4/Pipeline_GCP-20250701-094616.png?cb=7273cf25bd907059479427c2e2218c7f) ![GCP file integration-20250701-061734.jpg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1de252d4244959c60686a8a328d1f295dc68aca37f6dc6c5daa35d90131a4b3f/GCP%20file%20integration-20250701-061734.jpg?cb=84e5a9bbe769974833d85536a5e705fd) ### Comments Log in Budget and Forecast A new **Comments** tab is added on the Budget and Forecast details pages. This tab consolidates all comments for the respective budget or forecast. It lists comments from every line item along with associated account and cost center details, allowing you to track and review all related feedback in one place. ![Budget Detail Comments-20250702-114012.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_96ee18e8eaea47cd20a2480e07cd9bd2e332bd944f99da36eddf3e711622b674/Budget%20Detail%20Comments-20250702-114012.png?cb=e499df52042c02f6d92c2f211b130c9a) ### Info Message on Daily Spend Chart in Cloud Overview The **Daily Spend** chart in the Cloud Overview dashboard has been updated to include a clear notation when the **No Data** message appears. The info message is added to inform users that daily cloud spend data is only available for the most recent configured months (depending on environments, this could be 1, 2, 3 or any months). ![Daily spend - Cloud overview-20250702-101442.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_06528f24e6a2045f552b60b8eac781a75396927d1741014b9fb1d9a24ef9cd59/Daily%20spend%20-%20Cloud%20overview-20250702-101442.png?cb=43723e89666125429749fe2fbabd20e4) ## Jun 23, 2025 Enhancements ### Ask **YäRKEN** Enhancements We've upgraded **Ask** **YäRKEN** to handle unclear or ambiguous questions more effectively by migrating existing framework to LangGraph-based workflow. This new, modular, and agentic framework allows the AI to better manage complex tasks and adapt dynamically to user queries. The model also integrated with Vector stores for better context handling and ambiguity detection. When any word or term in the question could have multiple meanings, the AI model will proactively suggest possible interpretations to quickly guide you to the right answer. For example, when asked, *"What's the total spend on SAP?"* it will clarify the request by providing the helpful follow-up question like, "*Do you mean 'solution offering SAP,' 'application SAP,' or 'vendor SAP'?".* This upgrade enhances our AI model's contextual understanding by providing accurate responses. ![Ask Yarken Feedback-20250625-115543.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_71c2e13f4a892c3e81ad4caf076759a1b9a16f9c9f47347ce73329d23e8807c2/Ask%20Yarken%20Feedback-20250625-115543.png?cb=b00b4a838f9c3b1dae087b367e44ccd6) ### Hourly Cloud Consumption Analysis In addition to daily cloud consumption analysis, we now support analyzing consumption on an hourly basis. A new field called **Hour of Day** has been added to the Cloud Consumption Analytics cube. This allows users to report and visualize consumption patterns on an hourly basis, providing additional insights into cloud usage behavior. ![Hour of day_data table-20250626-094003.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_99e72c2fd220711bc60380677db69e0297625291f3406d63ec3db8fe33b81d30/Hour%20of%20day_data%20table-20250626-094003.png?cb=d17fb45596820ffb2e486ba5a0661119) ![Hour of day_column chart-20250626-093844.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9af04d3db8d0544025455db2ef655fc0e4d97d357e77d5df33e0d900c7dd2d58/Hour%20of%20day_column%20chart-20250626-093844.png?cb=7f9b9161d4ef897fe1c946b96a3ea06f) ### GL Popup Optimization To load less data during pre-aggregation, the GL popups now display only the most essential fields by default. If users need more details, they can simply click on the **View more** icon to open a separate side panel with related details. For example, if an Invoice Number is visible in the GL popup, clicking on it will open related details like Purchase Order (PO) and Contract information in a separate, organized side panel. This enhancement speeds up the GL loading times and reduces on-screen clutter while still allowing access to detailed data when needed. ![GL Popup_invoice-20250626-093207.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0dda8abd5a6d7bb695f54491aa3021e00d75b1d550e870d5640cbc5ae43e6626/GL%20Popup_invoice-20250626-093207.png?cb=ea20c42740e66ccf687f5264c34e1df1) ![GL Popup-20250626-093317.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5efb70da8422c3cbc03ba5e68a89712eeda8c48e0c32c26db51ebaa54639aa68/GL%20Popup-20250626-093317.png?cb=110a5ab0a36f29d7f655c7bfaa6c5f7a) This capability is currently available for GL popups related to Vendor, Account, Cost Center, Invoice, Purchase Orders, Contracts only. ### Global Filters for Forecast and Budget Planning Screens The account and cost center filters---along with their hierarchies---are now available as global filters on the Forecast and Budget planning screens. These filters work similar to the existing year and month filters in standard dashboards and persist across different pages during the user session. ![Screenshot 2025-06-26 at 12.39.47 PM-20250626-071011.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_61ff1411f009d7b0b4e1869007d11238ac58ae418ef3cd914a395a956a642aa9/Screenshot%202025-06-26%20at%2012.39.47%E2%80%AFPM-20250626-071011.png?cb=e03bd1a2cf7ef8e34c3cd860ca991f84) ### Dropdown Filters in Analytics To improve filter performance and address filter result slowdowns caused by large datasets, dropdown filters in both Analytics and admin screens have been optimized. These filters now load data in batches, retrieving approximately 50 items at a time, with additional values accessible via the **Show more** option. This ensures a faster loading time when working with filters that contain thousands of values. ![Screenshot 2025-06-26 at 12.46.35 PM (1)-20250626-072044.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_07602fea8ec61fdb97e326cb5a4c335eaa71bb2a57f6f03caf23cb4f9a4de4b7/Screenshot%202025-06-26%20at%2012.46.35%E2%80%AFPM%20(1)-20250626-072044.png?cb=c682b92239a5c13e742cc3e3beb65fe5) ### Locked Months in Forecasting In the Planning module, months that are locked during forecast creation are now visually greyed out in the detailed view, indicating that these periods are non-editable. ![Screenshot 2025-06-25 at 6.02.13 PM-20250625-123322.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ded64551abae86dfafad4351a3ef18041a93596776dd4fc82c93d0ad34032c25/Screenshot%202025-06-25%20at%206.02.13%E2%80%AFPM-20250625-123322.png?cb=12bd36b3d48304745c136cb6581764af) ## Jun 16, 2025 Bug fixes and enhancements ### Validation for Duplicate Priority To resolve the issue in the tower rules that have the same priority, a new validation check is added to prevent over or under allocation while uploading rules. If the uploaded file contains entries that have the same priority and their sum portions do not add up to 100%, those entries will be rejected with a clear error message. ![image-20250624-171559.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_145b9e870dd59b5fc1d45de4173fd35c20061c1068141db11fb08dadbc84af13/image-20250624-171559.png?cb=377be7e99ad5eaeda47f48f251b12c06) ### View Button for Non-Draft Budgets The **View** button is enabled in the Budget Details page for budgets that are In Progress, Completed, Cancelled, or Approved status. When viewed, all budget line items are greyed out and non-editable to prevent any modifications. For budgets in Draft status, the Edit button remains unchanged, and full editing is allowed. ![Screenshot 2025-06-25 at 3.57.27 PM-20250625-102906.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_227fa786cb090e953de1010b9c33dbf07631fbed3a7b816b4b437bd8a2b19062/Screenshot%202025-06-25%20at%203.57.27%E2%80%AFPM-20250625-102906.png?cb=d7a41f44d4e40ab3a8481512de932088) ### Copy From Option The**Copy From** functionality for mapping and rules is now enabled directly within the sub-menus of Cost Pools, Towers, Solutions, and Business Units. ![image-20250625-113240.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_780b631bbc4660ea828d459c3d8833f4c1d9041eb76db91d700b65fbe2581e86/image-20250625-113240.png?cb=48f791c6034f6a0a5cfc8de99f89436a) ![image-20250625-113405.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6dd5f02a6cd11324f30938f025d5ec4cfeee98827d7f1dd0488bea325f10d8f4/image-20250625-113405.png?cb=70a80d2d7111cfb22f6dbd46fe5c7503) ## Jun 02, 2025 Bug fixes and enhancements ### Email of Nominated Admin on Error Page To provide a clear point of contact for the support, the support email address on error page and access denied page can now be customized to include nominated admin email. However, the default email address is set to [support@yarken.com](https://yarken.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/~63fc7b21feb4b150c575f62c/pages/242253825/Login+Process+How+to+manage+the+users+User+Management). ![image-20250611-044110.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_155ea081daf9ecd7004d4fa8a00e5a8b9d4d560e8434d02af215f74ef468834d/image-20250611-044110.png?cb=30c5753cb1d51d9f32146de1761f126c) ![image-20250611-044013.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_062a984575e412e84ab64587bb0ac19f269255340ba086a75afa6e45c496dbdb/image-20250611-044013.png?cb=e54dd7130740cf229d213241b72e8898) #### Bug Fixes This release version includes below bug fixes: * Certain fields within the Filter section in the Custom Dashboard did not enable users to manually enter characters with spaces; however, pasting a string with spaces worked. This issue is fixed, and users can now enter text with spaces directly into these fields. * The chargeback process can now efficiently handle a large number of records. ## May 26, 2025 New dashboards and enhancements ### New Dashboards This release introduces new dashboards exclusively designed for tracking license utilization and application activity. #### License Usage A new **License Usage** dashboard displays monthly license usage data for a specific product. It helps you track: * **Total licenses** * **Consumed licenses** * **Available licenses** The dashboard offers visibility into monthly license consumption trends and may be expanded to include additional charts and tables in future updates. ![image-20250611-071856.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d3e55486a7ce577207f016bc5a9d2ac1f91053af549e8bff45f1e756efde89fd/image-20250611-071856.png?cb=73a0851f9623792264a48481bc1e6fc2) #### Application Usage The **Application Usage** dashboard record the monthly usage count for a specific application. It helps you track and monitor how often an application is accessed or used over time, providing insights into monthly application consumption trends. ![image-20250611-072007.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_685042c00e364ec5a79eba456cef15790b0ebf8bb2fe170e587ba97354fe835f/image-20250611-072007.png?cb=c17eb1c9eca048d9d34d8d1d655d7c28) ### New Consumption Data Uploads In addition with the Cloud and Mobile consumption uploads, we now support data uploads for: #### Product Usage Users can now load month-on-month usage details for specific products. The uploaded data supports reporting and enables tracking monthly user-level engagement across different applications. While uploading, users can select the vendor associated with the data. ![image-20250611-065659.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8a673c2f262378c113efd5cfcf6c0b7b2f32174b161749d7ada83e21f66e9e27/image-20250611-065659.png?cb=9914ebdef099877dcca52c6b93b09c51) #### Individual License Usage The **Individual License Usage** allows users to upload month-on-month individual product license usage data. This upload helps in the monitoring and reporting of license consumption by tracking license usage at the user level. Users can assign the usage data to a specific vendor during upload. ![image-20250611-063438.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_85687bd16de445d358e42901e04420923a08b1f9c407fdf86e13ada809ed85c2/image-20250611-063438.png?cb=cfdfa2a3d3ce58c7b626351d47b8f34f) #### Tenant License Usage Users can now upload month-on-month individual tenant license usage data for reporting. This data helps track license allocation and license availability at the tenant level. Users can assign the usage data to a specific vendor during upload. ![image-20250611-063839.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4d1d06e3539cf567c37f43f8ec3f14986767d7d753f7cf72f4055b94e54440f2/image-20250611-063839.png?cb=f31f35c269e2dfe60ef67c01431d75ea) ### Alerting Enhancement #### Cloud Spend Alerting A new metric type **Cloud Spend** is added in the **Alerting** feature. Users can now configure cloud spend alerts based on specific cloud fields such as Resource Name, Resource Type, Provider, and define threshold values to trigger alerts when spend crosses the defined limits. ![image-20250528-121103.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_67dbd811dc84ac15998fd2761675ce7cd8641750988b63d9ecdf94f43744bfa1/image-20250528-121103.png?cb=82a1f4d75bb97a625c26ca73bb7f7343) In addition, **Timeframes** value for all the fields are updated to include the day fields -- **Current** **Date** , **Last n days** , **last n days (include current)** , **Last n days** , **Last n days (include current)**. #### Vendor Count Alerting A new metric type called **Vendor Count** is introduced in the alerting feature that monitors the number of vendors assigned to cost pools or towers. Users can now configure alerts that trigger when the vendor count in the cost pools or towers exceeds or falls below the defined threshold value. ![image-20250528-121833.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_871893d773fe66a5cbf08beb666c1a8347803a1d980344e806710015eef6307f/image-20250528-121833.png?cb=c238b7e5d38763cf47c419a350766271) ## May 19, 2025 Enhancements ### Microsoft Graph API Integration We have introduced a **Microsoft Graph API** integration into YäRKEN application, allowing you to seamlessly sync Microsoft 365 license and product usage details. This new API integration enables the users to automate license data retrieval and use comprehensive license information for reporting and analytics. ![image-20250521-090316.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2cee44372a252214af64bf41665d84b4734316e837a3d1f53eba6637acc413eb/image-20250521-090316.png?cb=dbfc505238f89abd5b4b042157ced2b5) The integration is designed to work through the Pipeline feature. Users can set up a new pipeline connection to sync **License** **Details** or **Product** **Usage** **Details** using **Tenant ID** , **Client ID** , and **Client Secret** . Users can also schedule pipeline run that automatically sync data at defined intervals. Once the data is fetched, it becomes available for use in the **License Usage** analytics cube. ![image-20250521-090521.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0a3fad017983ce6a2293cb0ab3bccaaa860fa6304b7930c79b8ab45e15d55b21/image-20250521-090521.png?cb=f4b4de19edc51a2210975765580fa418) ![image-20250521-090610.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c910323b9ae1640c11974468f379f213afce7b99d8c9aab49de5898a769b8653/image-20250521-090610.png?cb=4a3857d6a39d86891c3cf64764535c12) This new API integration provides greater visibility into license allocations and product usage trends across the organization. #### New License: Contract Value Management We have introduced a new license---**Contract Value Management** ---designed specifically for contract tracking and reporting. As part of this change, the existing contract-related dashboards, **Contract Portfolio** and **Contracted Spend** , are moved under this new license. In addition, the **License Usage** reporting cube is also brought under this new license. ![image-20250521-091457.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_616bc3d905896ffdc6e4e82744886abd7dc454c1b0cdf5b284dc469ea0cba9b5/image-20250521-091457.png?cb=13b611e12f9f3986bc1daa6330d93ddd) #### New Alert Metric: YTD Spend Variance % An alerting feature is now included with a new metric type called **YTD Spend Variance %** that allows you to set alerts based on the percentage variance between actual YTD spend and prior year spend. This metric tracks the difference between the current YTD spend and the previous year's YTD spend, highlighting any significant increases or decreases. ![image-20250521-091821.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_908f9cde7f91d65fe4064aef8439c768d754d94985bc71e521e11190c194f4d2/image-20250521-091821.png?cb=df9fa1e3e6213da4a4ab77e7ea667864) #### Cloud Consumption: Tagging Compliance To support tagging compliance tracking in the cloud consumption data, a new field called **Tagging Compliance** is introduced. This field is now available to map during cloud data upload. Using this new field, users can define upload rules to automate tagging compliance by customizing the tagging rules or rely on the default application tag. Additionally, we have enabled reporting to track tagging compliance through new fields in Analytics. * **Tagging Compliance**: Tagging compliance of selected resource. * **Tagging Compliance Billed Cost**: Total billed cost of tagged resources. * **Tagging Compliance %**: Percentage of tagged billed cost versus total billed cost. ![image-20250521-114606.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_62466e75f99e81788f03bd910488e3d7eefb79e7793705e1339dba49a658386d/image-20250521-114606.png?cb=24a0f52c125e4cc4f8a20863988049fd) #### Dropdown Filter Performance To improve performance and user experience across standard dashboards and reports, dropdown filters are enhanced to support pagination. Previously, filters fetching datasets with thousands of records led to slow load times. With this enhancement, filters now load 50 records at a time, and a **Show More** option is provided to load additional values as needed. Moreover, the filter search works seamlessly by displaying search results through all records. This enhancement significantly improves filter response when navigating large datasets. ![image-20250521-100708.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_49b73b6ebcb729200a8fb94d35e83a151cf1a118ab14f8808b30919eb26d74d5/image-20250521-100708.png?cb=fbd4c0d51147aed8fc804ea77c535c94) #### Application ID in Analytics and GL Transaction The **Application ID** field is now exposed in the **Spend** cube (under **Expenditure**) and in the GL transactions across all dashboards except Platform-related dashboards. ![image-20250521-101239.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3fec1413c3b18218615d1e116f8d1083ae965b96397b9cb31de50bd74fa3592d/image-20250521-101239.png?cb=e61531b2b50e39241df59e770199b36b) ## May 12, 2025 Enhancements ### Fixed Asset: New Asset Type A new asset type called **Fixed Assets** is introduced, which allows adding and managing monthly data specific to fixed assets. This new asset type helps in tracking long-term assets with reporting for fixed resources. ![image-20250514-083851.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fc26355edcfab8451eed2f90f6a4ed6c97d6efe1dcd8728aa6e1a6dd79a4d0e5/image-20250514-083851.png?cb=604af5d33983be9e3d188a713f277f3c) #### Remap and Reload Spend Files The file reload behavior for spend data is significantly improved in the application. Previously, when reloading an existing file, the system reused the same mapping fields automatically without offering an option to modify them. With the new updates, a new **Remap and reload** capability is enabled on UPLOADED FILES section that allows users to reupload the file with the ability to edit or update the mapping fields before processing. ![image-20250514-073644.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6cfb89bc4169d5c7e2795ea1cccdba192a8f4718aa73ecd8f8d9fb5614a125ea/image-20250514-073644.png?cb=898b8ce7130f6fa82f88fbf38f54fe6f) #### Budget and Forecast Management Column Updates Following updates are made in the forecasting and budgeting view: * **Expense Type** : The column is now hidden by default and can be viewed by enabling the **Show** **Detailed View** toggle button. New columns added * **Baseline**: Displays the baseline amount sourced from Cost Transparency (CT). * **Latest vs Baseline**: Shows the variance between the latest forecast and the baseline value. Renamed forecast columns: * Budget -\> **Previous Forecast** * Remaining Budget -\> **Remaining Forecast** * Forecast -\> **Latest Forecast** * Variance -\> **Latest vs Previous** ![image-20250514-085652.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a2fa370408b363b33a6fe574af74f5dd61db33f794fcccf7d004252dc4c61216/image-20250514-085652.png?cb=b437122cdac04e96858e80241897a4b2) ## May 05, 2025 Enhancements ### Cube Refresh Enhancements #### Cube Granularity We have enhanced the cube refresh capability to provide better visibility and control in managing cube refresh operations. * Detailed Cube Listing: Instead of summarizing cubes, the UI now displays each cube at its actual granularity---Cube, Aggregation, and Partition. * All cube availability: The Cube Refresh page lists all available cubes explicitly. * Manual refresh option: Users now have the ability to refresh cubes at a more granular level. This means specific cube partitions can be refreshed independently without triggering a full cube refresh. ![image-20250509-174447.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_576f029ff53706176c9f4aab30e2372ea4ba0292e6607ac0f8011f8a68b0ddee/image-20250509-174447.png?cb=e5cec68469c2ba66ba7f2d2805cbb497) #### Cube Refresh Behaviour The cube refresh behaviour is modified to manage the system performance more efficiently. Auto cube refresh is now paused immediately after a data change, and corresponding dependent cubes move to pending status, indicating that new or updated data has not yet been processed. Users must manually refresh the pending cubes to reflect the latest data changes or wait for the system to auto-refresh them after 24 hours. Any cube in a pending state will not reflect the latest data in dashboards, reports, or analytics. User can manually refresh individual cubes directly from the screen or choose to refresh all pending cubes at once. ![image-20250509-175318.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ff63ea53aae901f350aed1a93845cc70850f83bd511e2851a10e48ddf76c2f09/image-20250509-175318.png?cb=93b0064102c430b0822ca2f9c78bc227) New columns in the Cube Refresh page: * **Data Last Changed**: Displays the most recent date when data was updated in the corresponding cube. * **Last Refresh Date**: Indicates the last time the cube was refreshed (sourced from the cube API). This change gives more control over cube refresh operations and helps avoid unnecessary system loads. #### Pre-Aggregation Toggle in Analytics for Admin A new **PRE-AGGREGATIONS** toggle button is added in the Analytics section for Admin users to control pre-aggregation behavior. When enabled, this setting allows admins to view the most recently updated or edited data from the cube directly, without requiring a manual refresh---ensuring quicker access to aggregated data. When the toggle is turned off, data is fetched from the underlying database, which may not include the latest changes until the cube is refreshed. ![image-20250509-175726.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2d875407de8470411d0dc60e6cabf0ca9455c0b76af9c652d8ba26a38425a65b/image-20250509-175726.png?cb=e913f9130a0146c67e68c1c31580c103) ### Admin Role Enhancement: Full Access to Budget and Chargeback Features The Admin role now includes full access to all budget and chargeback-related activities by default, without requiring any additional specific roles. #### Grand Total Row in Table View The table view for spend, forecast, and budget now includes a new **Grand Total** row. When users switch the data view of charts in reports or dashboards to the table format, a Grand Total row now appears at the bottom that calculates the total values across the columns. ![image-20250509-180318.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e005f63e4b67d717e33971733c8eda6de20fc501623139238a19772dab98ab67/image-20250509-180318.png?cb=3f8770a887fcf3e7bd1790e3c1343cb7) ### Null Handling on Sankey Chart Null values previously appearing in the Sankey chart have now been addressed. When a TBM element is missing or undefined, the chart will now display the label **Unallocated** in place of null. ![image-20250509-181019.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_09a15ca2441743294c62a7b555e5fa08833e3d05987d1b23a0723a47e648dc77/image-20250509-181019.png?cb=48396f7efbee5985dd15dc5f7f83cd1d) ### Scrollbar Overlap Issue Fixed Resolved a scrollbar issue where the horizontal scrollbar overlapped the content in the last row of tabular data. Users were unable to view the bottom row while hovering to scroll left or right. With this fix, the scrollbar no longer blocks the last row view. ## April 28, 2025 Enhancements ### Cost Center Owner Report - Spend Variance Prediction The **Quarterly** **Variance** and **Variance** **Prediction** columns from the **Spend Variance** chart are now color-coded. * **Positive** variance is shown in **red** * **Negative** variance is shown in **green** Previously, these charts used a single color (blue) for all variance values. ![image-20250430-122832.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9b2451d5649efc12b585b95bfda206a2c6b666bbd1c9eb7a386777700100ea62/image-20250430-122832.png?cb=583dbab0de5b90d0988163fc405e6e24) ### Cost Pool or Tower Rules Priority for Cloud Cost pool or tower rules for the cloud will take negative priority values and will not conflict with GL-based rules, whose priority is restricted to positive numbers. ### Load Format - Number with Commas The application now supports number and currency values with commas (e.g., 1,000 or $2,500.75) when uploading files. Previously, such formatted values were not correctly parsed and were treated as `null`. ### Custom Dashboard Enhancement #### Link Dashboards via Widget The custom dashboards now include a new capability to add the links for default dashboards and other custom dashboards as well. * **Dashboard selection**: While configuring the widget, users can select the dashboard type---Custom or Default---and choose the target dashboard from a dropdown list. ![image-20250429-120135.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4e5950b231bfd8e6d0879d004bbba08ecec2921a69771116c8aebee01e9b6e8c/image-20250429-120135.png?cb=0b5b7e92badeb2663f5a7da8944fd133) * **Drill-down**: Once a link is defined, clicking on it takes the user directly to the selected dashboard. * **Dashboard title**: The dashboard title can be renamed, and users can change the text format for better visual alignment. * **Enable/disable**: A toggle switch is available to activate or deactivate the link without removing the configuration. ![image-20250429-112158.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_550a3de4a0146350c4c0097f21bd30586766d5ae3c9da1a8ca3b5cf59b08790d/image-20250429-112158.png?cb=821259aa2a25cbea6865b8382ca63eba) #### Hyperlinks in Text Widget A new hyperlink option is added to the custom dashboard's text widget where users can now add links to external websites, internal resources, or documentation directly from the dashboard. The **Body Text** box allows you to insert any valid URL into the text content. ![image-20250429-113008.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b0bbdbf53a4a6f75ea077d9f580b3b1f6139f2cd4129d228154ee3ea207d369e/image-20250429-113008.png?cb=609c4e637f9abfb5096fae157d3021d0) ## April 21, 2025 Click to expand... ### What's new #### License Usage Cube in Analytics A new **License Usage** cube is introduced in the **Analytics**. This cube is designed to provide detailed insights into tenant license usage, product usage, and individual license usage. It allows users to: * View and compare license usage on a monthly, quarterly, or yearly basis. * Track total, consumed, and available licenses at the tenant level. * Check product license count for individual users. * Analyze active users per application. ![image-20250425-114747.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0f7d42aaa2c03b586e829f110c2166f53677f957dfced710751b8456f828efbe/image-20250425-114747.png?cb=aacf8f55ecae1629d7337294a450a8d5) ### Enhancements #### Contract Number on Budget The Budget now includes a new field called **Contract Number** to better track budget entries related to specific contracts. #### KPI order on Dashboards The KPI order on the dashboards is updated to improve clarity and prioritization. #### Forecast Renaming The Forecast menu item under **Planning** is renamed to **Cloud Forecast**. ## April 14, 2025 Enhancements ### Filter Refinement on Dashboards The filter values across key dashboards---**Cost Transparency** , **Finance** , **Vendors** , **Technology** , **Platform** , **Applications** , **Solutions** , **Business** **Units**---along with their associated reports, have been updated to reflect the more relevant and accurate filtering for analyzing data. Updated filter includes: * Account, cost center, and vendor: **Cost Transparency** , **Finance** , and **Vendors** * Sub cost pool, cost pool, sub tower, tower (TBM partial): **Technology** * Cost pool, sub cost pool, tower, sub tower (TBM full): **Platform** , **Applications** , **Solutions** , **Business** **Units** ### Integrations - Compressed Upload for Split Cloud Billing Files We have handled the uploading of bulk cloud billing files from the cloud storage account (S3 bucket or Azure blob storage) using the Integration. The application now automatically compresses and combines split cloud billing files into a single file before uploading to the YäRKEN application . ## April 07, 2025 Enhancements ### Default Dashboard Assignment Admins can now assign a **Default Custom Dashboard** to users via User Management. This is especially useful for **Dashboard-Only** users, but is also extended to other roles. ![image-20250421-063813.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4d673e57c61e8620fde14d5fb3e51e0e32ec78a9355357a76ef907318100bf48/image-20250421-063813.png?cb=c13c645af7487ce5ad664d7c494bb1d8) ### Apply Filter Button on Filters Introduced an **Apply Filter** button across all filter panels. Filters now apply only after clicking this button, instead of auto-refreshing results upon selection. ![image-20250421-055118.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_148876f0292f63691234bcbbc61ad65844df8873cc3230ae18062f569600932b/image-20250421-055118.png?cb=9b50d1a786dcf08cd45d448a6061da21) ### Budget Allocation The budget allocation logic for **Cost Pools** , **Towers** , and **Solution Offerings** in Designer has been updated. Budget is now allocated using the same rule-based logic as spend, ensuring consistency. Previously, the allocation view in Designer relied directly on the Budget file, which has now been corrected to reflect the actual allocated values based on rules. ![image-20250421-055700.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4c879c6ea06d473bf4f61da6220d828a0859f9319f58e8345df651b9bf46e5e1/image-20250421-055700.png?cb=2e50a24be28ec72b4b3a18e61c5a2966) New Budget Allocation ![image-20250421-055733.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ad13f36e05fe3333f9963e69f4f99c901d874ad7289a87cf571a21a744b17360/image-20250421-055733.png?cb=4a4f55a74575ea66ea1a0feb274c6b13) Budget tab is no longer available in Cost Pools, Towers, Solution Offerings ### Auto Cube Refresh Toggle Fix Turning **Auto Cube Refresh ON/OFF** no longer triggers an immediate cube refresh. ![image-20250421-060137.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_98c39a8ae99ba6feada8ec273ae035c93dc9a6fb5c82479d306d91ea81f4d47f/image-20250421-060137.png?cb=2816e850808092262bcfebf18ba11d53) ### Filters Panel in Analytics The **Filters** panel in the Analytics is now open by default with default selections for the **current year** and **current** **month** when the user accesses any cubes. ![image-20250421-061454.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_daa7918b7fd23fbb0ec43f9d8b2e3d8ee5bf0134c99f6d2f378146bf63d643de/image-20250421-061454.png?cb=3273a963c886fe9ecbbc6ab71ac02b0d) #### Integration Terminology Update We have renamed **Integration** to **Pipeline** , and **Storage Account** to **Integrations** throughout the application. ![Screenshot 2025-04-21 at 11.47.36 AM-20250421-061954.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_401d82d4b9193ba463655e4174465277f30342e2ecc1f6b230c4d82860a497fd/Screenshot%202025-04-21%20at%2011.47.36%E2%80%AFAM-20250421-061954.png?cb=51d9bbad54fc1fdaa76140f262cf8116) ### Licensing Fixes Addressed two issues related to licensing behavior: * Licenses will now remain active until the end of the expiry date, instead of expiring a day early. * The license expired banner will now be cleared immediately after a new license is applied, without requiring a server restart. ### Improved GL Popup UX The GL popup is enhanced by grouping values based on filter types, for examples, Month, Accounts, and Cost Centers. ![image-20250421-063030.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6fc1c93698be72cf79ad4e038923b84e68e8a11b712033f5ad00ae01c16e862f/image-20250421-063030.png?cb=41154661f16d2fee089fd42718ff518e) ## March 31, 2025 Enhancements ### Dashboard Only - A New User Role We have introduced a new user role named **Dashboard-Only** . This role can be assigned by an admin and is intended for users who should only have access to a specific custom dashboard. Users with this role will not have access to other menus, and the home page will only be available. The home page will display the assigned primary custom dashboard. If no dashboard is assigned, users will see a message stating, **No Dashboard Assigned**. ![Screenshot 2025-04-09 at 17.19.59-20250409-115109.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0b470e02791ab9247a1df3be9bd4723af8106eb38465d94e88de0fbf54d78997/Screenshot%202025-04-09%20at%2017.19.59-20250409-115109.png?cb=b87aaa41ca791fbc57ec8743f72d6380) *Screenshot: Dashboard-Only user's screen* ### Alerting Enhancement #### A New Metric Type The alerting feature now allows users to set the alerts for the **Cost Pool Spend** and **Tower Spend**. These two new criteria have been added to the metric list. ![image-20250409-112615.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1b1e1996254129c390263c52ef5c223b0c7278d8ba8f2f29b697c5f8ada0c9ec/image-20250409-112615.png?cb=e4e66ee6a784a37350a0cacaa00564fb) #### Timeframe The **Alerting** feature has been enhanced to offer more flexible options in the **Timeframe** dropdown after selecting a metric. Previously, only the current month or year could be selected. Now, the dropdown includes additional options, such as last/next month, last/next year, YTD, and Previous YTD. When selecting last or next month/year, users are required to specify the number of months or years to evaluate. ![image-20250409-113643.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3b9322a5e039edb9d961c3e00c6a3aba640e3e558409b0fd381030437d68c1ee/image-20250409-113643.png?cb=b0909fb1fd0ab2897525adbcef242ed0) ![image-20250409-113814.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_27bc706fd09a7200e92d956d326832b9e58e965253e428ff1637629fd887376d/image-20250409-113814.png?cb=867bb78fde17c16539ed48d0723f52a3) ## March 24, 2025 Enhancements ### Expense Type on Home Page An **Expense Type** filter has been added to the home page, with the default value set to **OpEx**. This filter applies to all widgets on the home page. ![image-20250409-090111.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_60164c777f9a234a53bb5a554f3c6134bbf25d0205c42dade22cc434fb9b29e9/image-20250409-090111.png?cb=a924ae3203bdb2a5f65000c93b7685dc) *Screenshot: Expense Type filter on home page* ### Account Level Access We've introduced a new capability that allows administrators to assign specific accounts to users. This enhancement ensures that users only have access to data relevant to those accounts. Admins can now manually assign accounts to users from **User Management** \> **Account** **Access**. Once an account is assigned to a user, only data linked to that account will be accessible to the user across dashboards, reports, and any applicable views. To access data, users must have both account and cost center permissions. For newly created users, no accounts will be assigned by default. ![image-20250409-084559.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b6a84ffa256efd2b8d052fa8647330ebb8b9c25fc89076ae9030b8487a0aacb5/image-20250409-084559.png?cb=99e531073005baa1ec3e58131617adb9) ### Data Mapping Template A clear notifications will be shown at each step to inform you if a data mapping template or integration with the same name already exists. * If the strategy is different, you'll see a prompt: **A data mapping template named \[template name\] already exists with different fields. Do you wish to replace it or create a new data mapping template?** ![image-20250409-072245.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f369929a8b9dc02b6c56d88b5a194c3018562c8a6924e3df7c2bbba2ee5b5e57/image-20250409-072245.png?cb=805ac412173190d18a15aa539de8a3ef) You can then choose to either update the existing template or create a new one. * If the strategy and name are the same, the system will skip the template prompt and take you directly to the integration creation form. **Integration checks:** Before initialising the create integration form, the system checks if an integration with the same name already exists. If it does, an informational message will appear: **An integration and a data mapping with the same name already exist.** ![image-20250409-072348.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f3340e279d46cac56f3e1b335dc74bcfe65b685fe572f3f33ab726246c562f9c/image-20250409-072348.png?cb=c9ab5271a3340fdfa6ba1709e694acb1) ## March 17, 2025 Enhancements ### Budget and Forecast Values On the **Budget Details** page, the forecast value is now displayed alongside the budget data. Similarly, on the **Forecast Details** page, the budget value appears along with the forecast data. Additionally, a **Variance** calculation has been introduced on both pages. ![image-20250409-063404.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_223ffd99615ca96af6ba41725314a9fdb857e73e68628a0833adcc761756bc67/image-20250409-063404.png?cb=7b455608730263fa023d2efa96b67e13) *Screenshot: Showing Forecast and Variance on Budget Details page* ![image-20250409-063514.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_667b8e091e0a65118f5541bbe4207d590d4ea5f8267437c49518f1daa373f3cb/image-20250409-063514.png?cb=ebe9d595a345c689312aefbfd76da644) *Screenshot: Showing Budget and Variance on Forecast Details page* ## March 10, 2025 Enhancements ### Forecast Overview We have introduced a new **Forecast Overview** dashboard under the **Planning** menu to provide a comprehensive analysis of forecasted spending. This dashboard compares the forecasted values against the approved budget, visualizing monthly forecasted trends for better financial planning. The charts on this dashboard allow you to identify the top 20 vendors, cost centers, accounts with the highest forecasted spend. The Monthly Forecast Details charts provide a forecasted spending pattern on a month-by-month basis. ![Screenshot 2025-03-27 at 12.54.45 PM-20250327-094759.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_02ab7c922cf71b488475a5befa2c7c6d591f91da7608955cc37732ffa95f4253/Screenshot%202025-03-27%20at%2012.54.45%E2%80%AFPM-20250327-094759.png?cb=d15bda25b273141dcb1b8e9c23da479e) ### Top Values on Tooltip We've improved the manual mapping experience with the value preview feature. On the manually mapping screen, the application now displays the top three unique values as a tooltip when hovering over the field. This helps you to quickly identify the most relevant values mapping without searching through the field. ![image-20250327-112615.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_856d83a12e2429015e354f83f36c79e28ca15c74b1f59d4e95e8aaadb0a6fdf6/image-20250327-112615.png?cb=40a3e901f1a0c1334b15f0667ebab2ff) ## February 24, 2025 Enhancement ### Upload Rules - Comment Box We have enhanced upload rules by adding a commenting feature on it. Users can now add optional comments when creating or modifying rules. These comments are also included in the downloaded and uploaded file for reference. Additionally, two new columns---Updated On and Updated By---have been introduced to track the updates in the upload rule. ![image-20250311-091736.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d8cb37f98428c28c5f6ef587ca5ae88403dd9cad4cff2d62334841b9aafbb49f/image-20250311-091736.png?cb=32f01d4b289c600163a37c6e6918418e) ## February 10, 2025 Enhancements ### Custom Logo on Menu bar Our platform now includes a new personalization option that enables you to load a custom logo on the menu bar. This enhancement provides businesses more flexibility to personalize their interface within the applications. With this update, you can upload your company logo or any custom image to the menubar. ![Screenshot 2025-02-24 at 12.27.37 PM-20250224-065839.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_15ff4e19bab06fe28e2a51cd6a77c4c7137e032d69e600a928a62085b94e2d19/Screenshot%202025-02-24%20at%2012.27.37%E2%80%AFPM-20250224-065839.png?cb=d387e2f3137473d1784889294a08737e) Users can easily upload their preferred logo or image through the platform's settings menu. The uploaded logo will replace the default icon and appear prominently on the menu bar. The platform supports a variety of image formats and automatically adjusts the logo's size to fit the menu bar. ![image-20250224-065639.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_91209173a179cd23569ff2346d81b6d38d391a7a293f8601335821001723febe/image-20250224-065639.png?cb=abae65b35d7ef51336088bce3b3f0f43) ### Extract Column - A New Rule Type A new rule type called **Extract** **Column** has been introduced in the upload rules functionality. This rule type allows users to extract specific data during file uploads. The data is extracted from text fields by defining a **Regex** **Pattern** (regular expression). ![image-20250224-102234.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_591c1fb118f5da68dcb0e634752dd8e2d18198e132b4c1746db5728a6cff3ef4/image-20250224-102234.png?cb=240b3c5ad38cd4bb12b5755623e788b2) By specifying a regex pattern, users can target and extract specific portions of text or any custom data format. The extracted data can then be mapped to the destination column. This new rule type provides flexibility in the data extraction process by identifying the data patterns. ### Forecasting on Standard Dashboards The bar, column, and cumulative charts that compare spend against budget now includes a third parameter for forecast comparison. If no forecast or budget values are available, the chart will not display any values. ![image-20250311-095336.jpeg](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4698071fed4d09a8c951b06596af1f538078403cbbeff3363408cbb7c451dcb0/image-20250311-095336.jpeg?cb=5a625ce00dd957ffc373f63f3797a189) If no forecast or budget values are available, the chart will not display any values. For cumulative prediction charts, the forecast values will be used for spend predictions if available. If no forecast is provided, the system will revert to the usual logic of predicting spend based on the average. ## January 27, 2025 Enhancements ### Cloud Consumption: Parquet file upload Our platform now supports the uploading of Parquet files from both AWS and Azure using the Integration feature. The main goal of introducing support for uploading Parquet files from AWS and Azure storage accounts is to improve our platform's data integration capabilities. ### Copying the Data We have extended the data copying capability to cost pools, towers, solutions, business units, and assets. This allows you to copy the rules, mappings, and assets from any specified month to any year. You can easily replicate the standard rules or mappings to improve the consistency and ensure uniformity in data management and reporting. ### Account and Cost Center Hierarchy We have implemented a comprehensive account and cost center hierarchy structure, which is now extended up to five levels. The new account hierarchy provides a more granular categorization of accounts. Similarly, the new cost center hierarchy enables the precise structuring of cost centers. This enhancement facilitates more detailed and accurate reporting on accounts and cost centers. ## January 06, 2025 Enhancements ### FOCUS 1.1 Mapping for Azure Mapping updates for Azure FOCUS 1.1 have been integrated in the application. ### Budget Distribution We improved our budgeting process by implementing a new budgeting approach, which uses the prior year's actual values as the foundation for the current year's budget, simplifying the budget preparation. *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # 2026 Changelog ## 2026-09-08 Enhancements ### Heat Map visualization for Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards now support a new **Heat Map** visualization, making it easier to compare values across two dimensions and identify patterns, concentrations, and outliers at a glance. You can configure row and column dimensions, select a measure, limit displayed values, and group remaining values under Other. The Heat Map also supports totals, drill-down, configurable themes, and Ask Yarken for deeper analysis. Additional appearance settings provide greater flexibility to align the visualization with your dashboard design. ![Screenshot 2026-09-08 at 5.45.53 PM-20260908-121642.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_afeb7931a9611e68abe7d6de8b0a387acabe0d3b536e6c96805bd3333df00ee7/Screenshot%202026-09-08%20at%205.45.53%E2%80%AFPM-20260908-121642.png?cb=cd6fe2db455d9ef83157695bc97e82c8) #### Scatter Chart visualization for Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards now support a new **Scatter Chart** visualization, helping you compare two measures and identify relationships, clusters, and outliers across your data. You can configure measures for the X-axis and Y-axis, display point labels, and show supporting values in a side list. The chart also supports configurable axis ratios, quadrant labels, colors, and hover details to provide additional context while exploring the data. This visualization is useful for comparing performance across categories and highlighting areas that may require further investigation. ![Screenshot 2026-09-08 at 5.51.55 PM-20260908-122223.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_890af1bfd1acd81bc9fcbc9a46f34c811ad8aa085c64a282da5f237c73d3f495/Screenshot%202026-09-08%20at%205.51.55%E2%80%AFPM-20260908-122223.png?cb=27f7ad178b6b6ec2a841fda341bd865b) #### More control over Cloud Publish distribution Cloud Publish now gives you greater control over how cloud spend is distributed when publishing to selected Spendmodels. For each selected model, you can choose the required distribution level: * **Expense** * **Cost Pool** * **Tower** This allows you to stop the publish process at the required level instead of always distributing cloud spend through the full allocation flow. The **Cloud Summary** dialog now displays the selected Spend models and their chosen distribution levels before you select **Publish** cloudspend. ![Screenshot 2026-09-07 at 2.40.44 PM-20260907-091053.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_194f6b68ad17585bba1079b7f2b91a9676a21a584404bbc8328736aeac7fba63/Screenshot%202026-09-07%20at%202.40.44%E2%80%AFPM-20260907-091053.png?cb=e9c197c4d2ef236651136836c4c7aabf) #### Z-Score bounds for Analytics and Custom Dashboards Line charts in **Analytics** and **Custom Dashboards** now support **Z-Score Upper** and**Lower Bounds**, helping you identify values outside the expected range based on recent historical data. You can configure the **Z-Score Threshold** and **Lookback Data Points** used to calculate the baseline and upper and lower bounds. The default threshold is **2.5** , with a default lookback of **12 data points**. Z-Score bounds are available for supported **Line Charts** with a date or month axis and a defined reporting period, making unusual changes easier to identify for further investigation. **Note:** Z-Score bounds are a chart visualization and are separate from Z-Score anomaly detection rules in **Insights**. ![Screenshot 2026-09-08 at 4.31.23 PM-20260908-110152.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6f8e55ccb5aaf58e18258e2812487cd8a532b0af1d5edc9ced869dc779254435/Screenshot%202026-09-08%20at%204.31.23%E2%80%AFPM-20260908-110152.png?cb=3716a99fb8aa54c2d6729ef317a628df) ## 2026-09-01 Enhancements ### Graph Explanation Copilot #### Graph Explanation Copilot on chart and graph The **Graph Explanation Copilot** now provides a conversational way to investigate dashboard data. Instead of receiving only a static chart summary, you can open Ask Yarken from a supported chart or widget and continue with follow-up questions. Ask Yarken keeps the selected dashboard and widget as context. You can explore trends, compare reporting periods, investigate other supported widgets on the same dashboard, and ask Ask Yarken to adjust supported filters such as Year, Month, Expense Type, and Entity. Graph Explanation Copilot remains scoped to the current dashboard and does not combine data from other dashboards or external data sources in the same contextual conversation. ![image-20260901-112308.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_92cc01353a291c47d16ed0bd7cecd3028da4063b2e3a9d708345c5dd6be2dd17/image-20260901-112308.png?cb=380172c49e1546c64a3562a05b5724e3) #### Custom Dashboard enhancements ##### Ask Yarken widget for Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards now include an **Ask Yarken** widget, allowing users to ask questions directly from the dashboard and explore the data in context. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 2.48.17 PM-20260901-091849.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9501096f152a9596e8fe87c90ec136c4aea162674fb8d518004b81148b792701/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%202.48.17%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-091849.png?cb=eadd46ce513e6c95337962dadc2f0f68) You can customize how the widget appears and guide users with suggested questions. The widget allows you to: * Choose a visual style: **Gradient Sweep** , **Quiet Field** , or **Frosted**. * Select **Custom** style to configure the widget Background Color and Text Color. * Choose whether suggested questions appear as **Link** or **Pill** styles. * Define the placeholder text shown in the Ask Yarken input. * Choose whether suggested questions appear on the same line or the next line. * Add up to three suggested questions manually. * Let Yarken generate suggested questions from the widgets already available on the dashboard, then review and edit them before saving. * Use the widget without suggested questions if you prefer a simple question box. This makes it easier to create a more guided and contextual Ask Yarken experience directly within a Custom Dashboard. ##### Previous-year comparison for KPI widgets KPI widgets in Custom Dashboards now support a dedicated Compare with prior year option, making it easier to track changes in key metrics over time. When a year is selected, you can compare the current value with the previous year and display the change as a value, percentage, or both. Previously, prior-year comparison relied on selecting **Delta Value** and **Delta Percentage** columns. When **Compare with Prior Year** is enabled, these delta columns are now disabled for selection to avoid duplicate comparison logic and keep the KPI configuration consistent. ![Screenshot 2026-08-27 at 5.34.20 PM-20260827-120451.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f3ce66fab8dd5811ca6ec542c9f24e5d48b13c2f35a9208956984297945d6a64/Screenshot%202026-08-27%20at%205.34.20%E2%80%AFPM-20260827-120451.png?cb=700c8267f45f9d97a4af457502b0d3ab) ##### Proportional Bar visualization for Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards now include a new **Proportional Bar** visualization for comparing metrics across categories. You can display a metric alongside its previous-year value and percentage change, making it easier to compare performance and identify changes across categories at a glance. The comparison uses the same filters applied to the selected period. The visualization supports multiple categories, flexible layouts, and both financial and non-financial metrics, making it suitable for a wide range of reporting scenarios. ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 5.58.16 PM-20260831-122822.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e50587da5eca017f5d19d700c0a2dcb14782fed78d75379593b7e37b2282598c/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%205.58.16%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-122822.png?cb=ba796c6320171d94c73d3a2bbdc3a443) ##### Dashboard background color for Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards now support a configurable dashboard background color, giving you more control over the overall appearance of your dashboard. The **Dashboard Settings** are accessible when you click an empty area of the dashboard. From there, you can select your preferred background color under **Appearance**. ![image-20260831-111144.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b4dff77ba7ebf597cf1cc83810238e3413313678a05affe24064f57b6fc61da3/image-20260831-111144.png?cb=b51f511f9eb0ce87f5f9e2134f8abcec) ##### Linear trendline for Analytics and Custom Dashboards Analytics and Custom Dashboards now support a linear trendline for column chart visualizations. The trendline uses linear regression to extend existing data patterns and show projected trends across future periods. Both cumulative and linear trendlines now support configurable line colors, making it easier to distinguish trendlines within a chart. ![Linear trendline_original copy-20260901-061323.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6bfbd2c8aece9c804539273ee57c24ddf7ac16e8e2832c703cd61010a2d1fb07/Linear%20trendline_original%20copy-20260901-061323.png?cb=ab35fbc6bb7f2cb7c7c24677f2145688) ##### Improved data table pagination and totals Data tables in Custom Dashboards have been enhanced to provide more flexibility when working with large datasets and more accurate Grand Totals. You can now choose between: * **Server-side pagination** --- loads data page by page, helping improve performance when working with larger datasets. * **Client-side pagination** --- loads the full dataset into the browser, which can be useful for smaller datasets and local filtering. The **Grand Total** now reflects the complete dataset rather than only the current page. When local table filters are applied, the Grand Total is hidden to prevent displaying a misleading total. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 4.55.57 PM-20260901-112615.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5951cd17fbb685658e1fe85679c31eb37f2a5cdb91eafe918586609df00832cd/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%204.55.57%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-112615.png?cb=e3c886482eadb2966ae936d27d9a1160) ### 2026-08-25 Enhancements #### Custom Dashboard enhancements ##### Daily trend lines and forecasting Custom Dashboards now extend trend lines and forecasting to support daily time-series data. Daily charts can display cumulative actuals alongside forecast values, providing more granular visibility into current trends and projected performance across the selected reporting period. ![Screenshot 2026-08-25 at 12.31.43 PM-20260825-070519.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cfaa4e16f3957d402aa1f42aaad511975c934ba6c87287a90adefe606c405190/Screenshot%202026-08-25%20at%2012.31.43%E2%80%AFPM-20260825-070519.png?cb=6716c6325def11e84cfdc91889779e23) ##### Insights in Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards can now support the creation of **Insights and anomalies** report directly within dashboard data tables, making it easier to review important findings alongside other dashboard metrics. The table experience includes: * Severity-based visual indicators for values such as Low, Medium, High, and Critical * Insight icons for easier identification * Time information to provide additional context * Optional table headers that can be shown or hidden based on the dashboard layout Insight data is surfaced through the **Insights** cube, providing a consistent way to bring anomaly information into Custom Dashboards. ![Screenshot 2026-08-25 at 5.37.05 PM-20260825-120750.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d7b329495282824b09bcb1f3b53d21fc488f1b4c6fbcaf51ff8cfa49b47ec345/Screenshot%202026-08-25%20at%205.37.05%E2%80%AFPM-20260825-120750.png?cb=a51beaac478b0f8b1efbb946cd542bc4) ##### Customize metric (KPI) widget enhancements KPI widgets in the custom dashboard now support customizable icons, giving dashboard designers more flexibility to visually distinguish key metrics. You can: * Show or hide icons on individual KPI widgets * Select from a library of Yarken-styled icons * Customize the icon color to match dashboard themes or status indicators ![Screenshot 2026-08-24 at 4.11.52 PM-20260824-104331.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_00e6f3b598dc17bc1f3e2ee8117d0b779e749c21ef50f4aabf805e5c8188eebc/Screenshot%202026-08-24%20at%204.11.52%E2%80%AFPM-20260824-104331.png?cb=c295df7b3fed181054094ea0b6db8a51) ##### Enhanced Dashboard Shortcut widget The **Dashboard Shortcut** (link) widget now offers more customization options to create clearer and more engaging navigation within Custom Dashboards. You can use enhanced layouts, styling, and icons to make important links easier to identify and better align them with your dashboard design. ![image (8)-20260825-062008.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7938c90649dc0fc04bff420fd4e3edc463324c221daabef93ebc05180e9450a2/image%20(8)-20260825-062008.png?cb=663a1a98b00e8436f402a1785903e03a) The existing Dashboard Shortcut (dashboard link) can also be switched to a new layout to show icons on the widgets by enabling the **New Layout** option in the Bar appearance settings. ![image (9)-20260825-062143.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a45e4718712d73c96ed123fafc9cdab135731c548832f56ddf4160cd871bb9f8/image%20(9)-20260825-062143.png?cb=c788a46eab917b36807812ac635d2e44) ### 2026-08-18 Enhancements #### FOCUS 1.2 support Yarken now supports additional fields introduced in **FOCUS 1.2**, expanding the cloud cost and billing data available for ingestion and analysis. Newly supported fields include: * **InvoiceId** * **PricingCurrency** * **SubAccountType** * **PricingCurrencyContractedUnitPrice** * **PricingCurrencyEffectiveCost** * **PricingCurrencyListUnitPrice** * **BillingAccountType** These fields can be mapped during data ingestion, enabling richer cloud cost reporting and analysis. ![image-20260818-112121.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_86c614b55ac9913bc00d578b06f0ca69f69862bb26d46ba7683d2b0a4dc76433/image-20260818-112121.png?cb=e0690c828b126361c3241184c515a155) ![image-20260818-112218.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e36dff4fd5a166edcf2cd83e51d53a03a252b5843a739660111b379994e86ed4/image-20260818-112218.png?cb=a3fcbc249cb21fe7c7d7b8898b1be5b2) *** ** * ** *** #### Analytics report view and edit permissions Analytics reports now support separate view and edit permissions, giving you greater control over how shared reports are used. You can allow users to view a report without permitting changes, helping protect shared report configurations across your organization. ![Screenshot 2026-08-18 at 2.20.26 PM-20260818-085033.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_daa9f5af62aa1fda3e7dfe1ec335807634b3846551df703a473f6eac215a76c6/Screenshot%202026-08-18%20at%202.20.26%E2%80%AFPM-20260818-085033.png?cb=aa2f9d7bb0cf0f5b5b734317027e5b5c) Users without edit permission will not see the **Save** option but can still use **Save As** to create their own copy. Edit permissions are also retained when reports are imported or exported. *** ** * ** *** #### Custom Dashboard visual enhancements **Custom Dashboards** now offer a cleaner and more consistent visual experience, with refined card styling and spacing, updated text styles, and cleaner widget presentation. Global filters have also moved to the top of the dashboard, and a widget-count indicator is now available, with a warning when a dashboard contains more than four widgets. ![Screenshot 2026-08-18 at 12.56.41 PM (1)-20260818-074203.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_305c9ea7496ad4abdaeac8a004757e9cc58b44c6aa1d7e687380449af967984e/Screenshot%202026-08-18%20at%2012.56.41%E2%80%AFPM%20(1)-20260818-074203.png?cb=a17ef71d54b5558d063afdac28d85134) *** ** * ** *** #### Simplified Settings navigation **Settings** have been reorganized to make related configurations easier to find and reduce duplicate entries. Key updates include: * Default year and month settings are moved under **Financial** **Settings**. * **App Personalization** is now called **Custom Branding**. * **TBM Taxonomy** is now called **Taxonomy**. * **Foreign Currencies** and **Exchange Rates** are now grouped under a single **Currencies** page, with separate tabs for each. * **Channels** and **Channel Groups** are now grouped under **Notifications** , with separate tabs for **Channels** and **Groups**. * Contract-related settings have moved from **General \> Default Settings** to a dedicated **Contracts** page. **Note** : Existing configuration values in the **Admin \> Settings** are retained automatically, so no action is required after the update. ![Screenshot 2026-08-17 at 4.51.29 PM-20260817-112237.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5b5082060b339c83ea1c5efa174e31db8a6626dc71360cab9a3be9961ed37651/Screenshot%202026-08-17%20at%204.51.29%E2%80%AFPM-20260817-112237.png?cb=2bda7fc3dc610211034aeb395fbd5e58) ### 2026-08-11 Enhancements #### Delete existing expenses before file upload The **Expenses**file upload process now includes an optional delete before load capability, allowing you to delete existing data for the target month before importing a new Excel file. ![image-20260811-053809.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d53258eb853d6ebd739589136d67fa4946efd0ecbb9a78817868a324ca3a67e3/image-20260811-053809.png?cb=b89a90bc996bffc2242660a27f2d6712) A confirmation message is displayed before deletion, and the standard upload process continues once confirmed. The selection is preserved during the reload of the same file. This selection is also retained when automating the files using Pipelines, helping prevent duplicate spend when complete datasets are loaded repeatedly. The deletion is also recorded in Audit Logs for traceability. *** ** * ** *** #### Custom dashboard \& Analytics enhancements ##### Cumulative lines and forecasting Custom Dashboards and Analytics now support cumulative lines and forecasting for timeline-based column charts, providing greater visibility into historical trends and expected future performance. ![Screenshot 2026-08-13 at 3.04.31 PM-20260813-093508.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b8cece773aac71301311bb4e419cd6d069c56bbfe9714616b4acc426e68942e9/Screenshot%202026-08-13%20at%203.04.31%E2%80%AFPM-20260813-093508.png?cb=fcb1e5e50f868f78249ab0d0941336de) You can apply a trend line to supported measures and extend the visualization with a forecast for the remaining time periods. Forecasting can be enabled or disabled as needed. The current forecasting methodology uses a cumulative average to calculate projected values. ##### End-of-year forecast KPI Custom Dashboards now allows you to create an end-of-year forecast KPI widget (metric). Select a financial metric to project the total spend at the end of the financial year based on historical spending data. ![Screenshot 2026-08-10 at 4.35.06 PM-20260810-110632.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c1618b6feb37044134a6b161d6366e518ff30bf67ca82096675ea40abd88639f/Screenshot%202026-08-10%20at%204.35.06%E2%80%AFPM-20260810-110632.png?cb=73b647f9da4c75c474bb92c7549034af) *** ** * ** *** #### Refresh control added to Cost Explorer Cost Explorer now includes a **Refresh** button next to the filters. You can update multiple filter selections first, then refresh the data when ready. ![Screenshot 2026-08-11 at 10.23.25 AM-20260811-045420.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ee873cd605f4b53bf213550896e8d03178f1df8a0560a014c19d1dc28a755d54/Screenshot%202026-08-11%20at%2010.23.25%E2%80%AFAM-20260811-045420.png?cb=8bfd481b742204c9f1740e4bb904482d) This avoids reloading the page after every filter change and improves the overall filtering experience, especially when working with larger datasets. *** ** * ** *** #### AI Usage reporting standardization AI Usage reporting has been standardized to improve consistency and cost visibility across AI services. For **Cursor**, AI usage data now follows a standardized field mapping structure, including consistent service category, provider, service name, collector source, charge category, and billing account values. AI Usage terminology has also been updated to use more provider-neutral field names: * **Prompt Tokens** → **Input Tokens** * **Completion Tokens** → **Output Tokens** ![image-20260811-152309.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d81ade3f3202729970422364ca34a840b43cc6b1652f16d36309f71f8256f450/image-20260811-152309.png?cb=4e4b1023aab409ac201e2fbfebc25752) ### 2026-08-04 Enhancements #### An AI Service reporting ##### AI Service field added across asset types A new **AI Service** field is now available across all asset types, providing deeper visibility into AI-related spend and infrastructure. ![image-20260804-103848.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_63d1cd70fa1d5bb917f37137540dc7b6e48d7022b239baa01fe8711c963e6d40/image-20260804-103848.png?cb=3a92f88526158da2ae45fd8847b33869) The field is also available in **Analytics → Asset TCO → From Assets**, enabling users to report on AI services alongside existing asset metrics. ##### AI Service mapping for Cloud Consumption You can now map **Cloud Consumption** spend directly to **AI Services** using **Upload Rules** . When cloud spend is published, the configured mappings automatically populate the **AI Service** field for **Cloud** assets in the selected reporting month. ![Screenshot 2026-08-04 at 3.14.02 PM-20260804-094425.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4e3161792c01a725a8139042e9778267b44bf5f685fbc2eef314920a6011bc5e/Screenshot%202026-08-04%20at%203.14.02%E2%80%AFPM-20260804-094425.png?cb=34de2329e0437659d5d040bcfa9a4afe) This enhancement makes it easier to categorize AI-related cloud spend and improves reporting and TCO analysis for AI services. *** ** * ** *** #### Automated Cloud Recommendation asset association Cloud Recommendations are now automatically associated with the appropriate **Applications, Products, or Services** during data ingestion, improving visibility into realized and potential savings from recommendations across dashboards. * Recommendations are matched using **Resource ID** as the primary identifier. ![Screenshot 2026-08-04 at 3.11.30 PM-20260804-094205.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_dc21182b1e3a3fa9491910f43d914503921e57cfa13cd92d7c02133d8ad2452f/Screenshot%202026-08-04%20at%203.11.30%E2%80%AFPM-20260804-094205.png?cb=8a224b4ddd2c7e788d0297ba06bfc24a) * Asset association is determined using a priority order of **Application Tag** , **Service Tag** , and **Product Tag**. * The association process runs automatically for both manual file uploads and Workflow Automation integrations. * Existing manual associations are preserved and take precedence over automatic associations. This enhancement improves the accuracy of recommendation-to-asset mapping and provides better visibility into cloud optimization opportunities. *** ** * ** *** #### AI-Driven Automation for Insights We have enhanced the **Insights** feature by integrating **AI Studio Automations (Beta)** directly into the anomaly detection lifecycle. When an anomaly is triggered, the full context of the insight is automatically passed to the AI workflow, enabling more intelligent, context-aware analysis and response. ![image-20260803-092305.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_118b183570357a3f3e85609c4504f748e88637a911c541d5e7a6d160d034e5f4/image-20260803-092305.png?cb=aea5a6de98ef6aaa3601fa9036095a10) **Key Capabilities**: * **Automated Triage**: Automations can now automatically update an insight's status (e.g., Acknowledge, Resolve), adjust severity levels, and add comments to the timeline. * **Human-in-the-Loop**: You can now include an approval step within the workflow, ensuring a specialist reviews the AI's findings before actions are finalized. * **Flexible Notifications**: Configure notifications to be sent via Email, Microsoft Teams, or Slack. These can be routed to specific channels, groups, or individuals, both within the app and externally. *** ** * ** *** #### Owner Tag for cloud resources **Cloud Consumption** now supports an **Owner Tag** field, enabling you to map business owners directly to individual cloud resources. To streamline this process, a default upload rule automatically identifies and processes Owner Tags during data ingestion, ensuring resource ownership is consistently maintained. ![Screenshot 2026-07-30 at 3.27.19 PM-20260730-102639.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a14f54831c0683508686d6526db038ca121a51471316b9c4775be6b359760545/Screenshot%202026-07-30%20at%203.27.19%E2%80%AFPM-20260730-102639.png?cb=cc919c5d8d1f68468432bc32254a9327) ### 2026-07-28 Enhancements and bug fixes #### AI Usage dashboard for Cursor We have introduced a new **AI Usage** dashboard to help you monitor and analyze your organization's Cursor AI usage and associated costs. ![image-20260728-072031.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8396adfa82f4a4bd709098212ecd30c8c5e0354b9291711efff40480ece2cc91/image-20260728-072031.png?cb=a474e7bbaded83aa1e087ec08cba5133) The dashboard provides visibility into key AI usage metrics, including monthly spend trends, spend by AI model, prompt and output token usage, cache utilization, and a comparison of Cursor-native and third-party AI models. These insights help you understand AI adoption, monitor usage patterns, and identify opportunities to optimize AI costs across your organization. Cursor usage data can be automatically ingested through an **Advanced Integration** , ensuring the dashboard remains up to date with the latest usage information. The dashboard is accessible through **Reports** \> **AI Usage** \> **Cursor**. *** ** * ** *** #### AI Specialist widget added to the homepage The **Spend by Expense Type** chart has been replaced with the **AI Specialist** widget on the homepage for **Admin** users. The widget provides a quick overview of the available **AI Specialists** and their purpose. This widget appears only for Admin users who have been included in the **Ask Yarken** beta feature access. Admin users who are not included in the beta access list will continue to see the **Spend by Expense Type** widget. ![Spealists widget on homepage-20260728-085609.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_468981fd3e1f37261ddf44fb060b429e7aadc2a994231c3feabab2524188edae/Spealists%20widget%20on%20homepage-20260728-085609.png?cb=fa89947467919c68c2dcda7b228c6363) *** ** * ** *** #### Improved Cloud Publish allocation accuracy Resolved an issue where the **Cloud Publish** process incorrectly distributed Cloud asset spend across all towers and sub-towers within a vendor. The allocation process now accurately assigns spend to the appropriate towers, sub-towers, and assets based on actual allocation data. As a result, Cloud asset spend in the **Asset TCO** cube now aligns correctly with the corresponding tower and sub-tower values in the **Consumption** cube. ### 2026-07-21 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Advanced Integrations and Automation Yarken now supports **Advanced Integrations**, enabling you to automate data exchange between Yarken and external systems using pre-built automation recipes. Advanced Integrations reduce manual effort, improve data consistency, and help streamline recurring integration tasks. Advanced Integrations are deployed by Yarken during implementation. After deployment, administrators can authorize external connections, manage automation recipes, and monitor integration activity directly within Yarken. ![image-20260721-174209.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fb1bd6bb3fe73c8ac6d04de8093a917f7bb6074e4d29cf00b453b45bb2f03bc4/image-20260721-174209.png?cb=3b1a74b62c1d4a1ef05b925dc51766b1) This release includes: * A new **Advanced** tab in **Connections** for authorizing external applications. * A new **Advanced** tab in **Pipelines** for managing deployed automation recipes. * Support for **AWS Trusted Advisor** integration to automatically import cloud optimization recommendations. * Automated file uploads from supported cloud storage providers using automation recipes. * Improved visibility into connection status and automation execution history. ##### Benefits * Reduce manual integration tasks through automation. * Simplify the management of external system connections. * Improve visibility into automated integration processes. * Help ensure consistent and reliable data synchronization between Yarken and connected systems. ##### Availability Advanced Integrations are deployed as part of your Yarken implementation. Contact Yarken Support if you would like to enable additional advanced integrations for your environment. *** ** * ** *** #### New feature: Contract Extraction We've introduced **Contract Extraction**, a new capability that helps organizations onboard and manage contracts more efficiently by automatically extracting key information from contract documents. ![Screenshot 2026-07-21 at 12.30.53 PM-20260721-070202.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6f08cbc2f27266326b96bf28682f8d93fb83ef9ba72dc3deb36af6f8c716b022/Screenshot%202026-07-21%20at%2012.30.53%E2%80%AFPM-20260721-070202.png?cb=34c33c2e5ed09b113c2fbd2c163a0780) You can now upload contract PDFs and have Yarken automatically identify and extract important contract details, reducing the need for manual data entry and accelerating contract setup. ##### What's included ###### Automated contract extraction Upload contract documents and automatically extract key contract information, including: * Vendor Name * Contract Description * Contract Amount * Start Date * End Date * Vendor Information ###### Review and validation workflow Extracted information can be reviewed and updated before publication. Contracts that require additional attention are automatically flagged for review, helping users maintain accurate contract records. ###### Contract publishing Once validated, extracted contract information can be published directly into Yarken, streamlining the contract onboarding process. ###### Contract Explorer Contract Explorer enables users to search and interact with contract content using natural language. Users can ask questions such as: * What are the payment terms? * When does the contract expire? * What are the renewal conditions? * What are the termination requirements? Responses include supporting references from the original contract document, making it easier to verify information and locate important clauses. ###### Benefits With Contract Document Extraction, organizations can: * Reduce manual contract data entry * Accelerate contract onboarding * Improve contract data quality * Increase visibility into vendor agreements * Quickly locate key contractual information * Enhance contract management efficiency *** ** * ** *** #### Multi-Cube Analytics (reporting) Yarken Analytics now includes **Multi Cube**, an advanced capability that enables you to create reports and dashboards using data from multiple analytics cubes within a single view. Instead of being limited to a single dataset, you can now combine dimensions and measures from different cubes to generate richer, cross-domain insights --- without requiring manual data exports or offline consolidation. ![image-20260717-071023.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8a108e1f5afa13eaaa430cb57639eac75773c65544a14c3da495abc2b8ac6ca6/image-20260717-071023.png?cb=d864babf4b71a1d38be824b4498a3ca8) ##### What's included ###### Cross-cube reporting * Combine fields from multiple cubes in a single report * Create cross-domain analytical reports spanning operational, financial, and usage data * Build advanced visualizations using related datasets * Reduce manual data exports and offline data preparation ###### How it works * Multi Cube Analytics dynamically combines data from multiple cubes at query time using shared business identifiers. * At runtime, the Analytics engine retrieves and joins the required data from the selected cubes and presents results as a unified dataset within the visualization. *** ** * ** *** #### Service Principal authentication for Azure Blob Storage Yarken now supports **Service Principal** authentication for Azure Blob Storage connections. This authentication method uses Microsoft Entra ID to securely access Azure Blob Storage without requiring a Storage Account Access Key. It is recommended for organizations using role-based access control (RBAC) because it provides more secure, auditable access to storage resources. When creating an Azure Blob Storage connection, you can select **Service Principal** as the authentication type and provide the required credentials. Pipeline execution requires the Service Principal to have sufficient permissions to read billing export files from the configured storage container. ![Screenshot 2026-07-21 at 11.38.05 AM-20260721-060825.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_16b192be3037a41e95c31b10fcea51fc6f212af7d58b31f9a38b1a43064ec66e/Screenshot%202026-07-21%20at%2011.38.05%E2%80%AFAM-20260721-060825.png?cb=9613ce7cb8ff727f8385d3b0e759b535) *** ** * ** *** #### New By Usage split type for Asset Rules A new **By Usage** split type is now available for **Asset Rules**, enabling you to distribute costs based on usage data instead of fixed percentages or existing allocation methods. When configuring a rule, you can select a usage table, choose the dimension that identifies the destination assets, and allocate costs using a numeric measure such as Billed Cost or Quantity. The initial release supports Cloud Consumption data, with support for additional usage tables planned in future releases. ![image (5)-20260721-065547.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fe8cfee8a8ff36bf089d51c6b5af7a2fea9bda4019e94a680b3c484de83a0da7/image%20(5)-20260721-065547.png?cb=a031b101b8ecd3306d0efa7eaa99b494) *** ** * ** *** #### Rule enable/disable support added You can now enable or disable rules across the following rule types: * Upload Rules * Cost Pool Rules * Tower Rules * Solution Rules * Lookup Rules * Consumption Rules * Asset Rules Disabled rules are excluded from processing during data reloads while remaining available for future use. Rule status is also preserved during import, export, and copy operations, making it easier to test, troubleshoot, and manage rule configurations without recreating them. ![Screenshot 2026-07-21 at 6.47.14 PM-20260721-162512.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7f16087a7bc092e63a4101f4cc0baddcb6d891497cc3b39d7d785ef35063ecf9/Screenshot%202026-07-21%20at%206.47.14%E2%80%AFPM-20260721-162512.png?cb=de94aa5787e70e5115cb45ad7df97204) *** ** * ** *** #### Companion Metrics linked to Solution Offerings **Companion Metrics** can now be associated with **Solution Offerings** in Master Data, extending the existing metrics capability available for Contracts. Configured metrics are displayed in the Solution Portfolio and Solution TCO reports, enabling you to analyze operational metrics alongside solution cost and performance. ![Screenshot 2026-07-21 at 10.06.04 PM-20260721-164229.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7570fd557b1ab2876c33cc087019b6435dab0ea91d3af5fcf6452babdc966efe/Screenshot%202026-07-21%20at%2010.06.04%E2%80%AFPM-20260721-164229.png?cb=3c77563049f881a069ecf349a7f669b2) *** ** * ** *** #### Updated terminology for financial models To better support **Spend, Budget,** and**Forecast** models, reporting terminology has been updated to use **Expenses** where the data is not limited to the Spend model. This update applies across Cost Explorer, Analytics, Custom Dashboards, and Finance Overview, providing more consistent terminology when working with multiple financial models. Labels that specifically refer to the Spend model continue to use Spend. *** ** * ** *** #### Insight Rules deletion Insight Rules can now be deleted even when related Insights already exist. Previously, these deletions failed due to dependency errors. Deleting an Insight Rule now removes only the rule and does not affect any Insights that were already generated. *** ** * ** *** #### Pipeline scheduling Pipeline scheduling now supports the configured instance time zone instead of UTC. The system-generated timestamps---including pipeline schedules, trigger times, and execution logs---are displayed consistently across the application. ### 2026-07-07 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Insight anomaly charts Insight anomaly charts now use the frequency configured in the Insight Rule to aggregate data and detect anomalies. * Data is aggregated based on the selected frequency (for example, weekly or monthly) before anomaly detection is performed * Z-score calculations are applied to the aggregated data rather than individual data points * Detected anomalies are displayed using the same frequency as the configured Insight Rule (for example, weekly anomalies are shown on a weekly timeline) ![image-20260707-074719.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_14b178633240bb32caab07afc610b63ec3c1b7ecdcdda3664c5499b33ee6d199/image-20260707-074719.png?cb=0c74f268244a0bd9647b4f44da29aa4e) * Insight execution continues to follow the configured rule frequency This enhancement provides more meaningful anomaly detection by aligning the analysis and visualization with the selected reporting frequency. *** ** * ** *** #### FOCUS template support in Pipelines Pipelines can now be configured directly using the FOCUS default template, eliminating the need to upload a file before creating a pipeline. * Configure pipelines with the FOCUS default template without a prior file upload ![image-20260701-092147.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b666654356257f3ac4bfa09a04f5724bd0cda2796eae3e35a114d233777d0089/image-20260701-092147.png?cb=b51b2c5f767c9b2d625c8d57a37bfa2a) * Account, Cost Center, and Vendor fields are now populated through Upload Rules instead of manual entry. These mappings must be configured before data can be published. * Date format selection has been improved. When you select a cloud provider data mapping template (for example, Azure Cloud Consumption), the appropriate date format is automatically pre-selected, with the option to change it if required. ![Screenshot 2026-07-01 at 2.48.09 PM-20260701-091900.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e9b87c8effaeaa7a18fd0d6e70597bc7a5e19921dbe27846f9cc05831d23cab2/Screenshot%202026-07-01%20at%202.48.09%E2%80%AFPM-20260701-091900.png?cb=f03a1e6db5b1543f0925eb60be719456) This enhancement simplifies pipeline configuration while ensuring required mappings are consistently managed through Upload Rules. *** ** * ** *** #### Chargeback locking across models Chargeback month locking has been enhanced to ensure consistent protection of data across all models. * Chargeback locks now apply across all models, with lock indicators displayed for affected months * Chargeback can only be created in the **Spend model** (default model). Other models such as Budgets, Forecast, and any custom models (including custom spend models) are not allowed to create Chargeback. However, when Chargeback is created, the month locking is applied across all models. * Copy To operations for rules, mappings, and assets automatically skip chargeback-locked months * Assets and Cloud Consumption are locked during the chargeback month to prevent changes * Cloud Consumption cannot be published or unpublished for chargeback-locked months * Model import and copy operations automatically skip chargeback-locked months ![Screenshot 2026-07-01 at 3.29.17 PM-20260701-105822.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cac28d9c1ac91f27e2dd3a53cdaa5edca0d74800a2c475bdfc9ca744ac49e779/Screenshot%202026-07-01%20at%203.29.17%E2%80%AFPM-20260701-105822.png?cb=440002b8d1b0578c55d63de33cdf5e34) * Background Processes record any months skipped due to chargeback locks, providing full traceability ![Screenshot 2026-07-01 at 3.24.46 PM-20260701-105702.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9b34bba1f9f389ea1ec4858555eb46a5ab68c4b1c34b53d132dadc977481c2bc/Screenshot%202026-07-01%20at%203.24.46%E2%80%AFPM-20260701-105702.png?cb=e995ca695a28db7e7838baef982d7745) This enhancement helps preserve data integrity by preventing updates to periods that have been locked for chargeback processing. *** ** * ** *** #### Increased character limits for text fields The maximum character limit has been increased from 255 to 512 characters for text fields such as **Asset Description** , **Journal Line** , and **Expense Custom Strings**, allowing more detailed information during file uploads. ![image-20260630-080147.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_93320730906a2b850ba4b2875496f458c53c91dd7369ebf9648792f13a9a022c/image-20260630-080147.png?cb=a2d2a483d71d0d2303738e26d672c64c) Previously, rows containing text fields that exceeded the allowable character limit were rejected during upload. Now, these rows will be uploaded successfully, with the exceeding text automatically truncated to fit within the maximum limit. ### 2026-06-23 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Insight Rules: Multi-Value dimension selection You can now select multiple values within a single dimension when creating or editing Insight Rules. This means broader monitoring coverage with fewer rules. ##### What's new Previously, each dimension in an Insight Rule accepted only one value. For example, setting **Provider = AWS** and **Category = Compute** meant the rule monitored only AWS Compute spend. To monitor Azure Storage as well, you had to create a separate rule. ![Screenshot 2026-07-07 at 1.29.34 PM-20260707-115925.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bfe860458c206f90c59b125f95c8a89c5341252dbefc9cd7949e55e78f2b509d/Screenshot%202026-07-07%20at%201.29.34%E2%80%AFPM-20260707-115925.png?cb=9ddf3626eea328f1eca99f661f33396a) Now, you can select multiple values per dimension within a single rule. For example: * **Provider** = AWS, Azure * **Service Category** = Compute, Storage ##### How it works * Within a dimension --- values are combined using OR logic (e.g., AWS *or* Azure) * Across dimensions --- values are combined using AND logic Using the example above, the rule monitors: **(AWS OR Azure) AND (Compute OR Storage)** --- covering AWS Compute, AWS Storage, Azure Compute, and Azure Storage automatically. ##### Benefits * Fewer rules to manage --- cover multiple scenarios in a single rule instead of creating one per combination * Broader monitoring --- a single rule can track spend across multiple providers, categories, or other dimensions simultaneously * Simpler maintenance --- update one rule instead of many when thresholds or conditions change *** ** * ** *** #### Global filters in Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards now support global filters, allowing you to apply filters across multiple widgets from a single location. The following fields are available as global filters: * **Year** * **Month** * **Expense Type** * **Entity** You can also enable or disable global filters for a dashboard and choose whether specific widgets should participate in global filtering. *** ** * ** *** #### Configurable cloud providers Cloud providers are now fully configurable through a new **Provider** settings interface available under **Admin** **\>** **Settings \> Provider**. * Add and manage cloud providers without relying on predefined values ![Screenshot 2026-07-07 at 1.18.47 PM-20260707-074907.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fbd7c358f60bb2c2331e8f4dfc4d0a86d0c5d7f507b8ea4c35fb97b4802c234c/Screenshot%202026-07-07%20at%201.18.47%E2%80%AFPM-20260707-074907.png?cb=6f160933a565cc37d2da271dccd31f54) * Newly added providers automatically follow the **FOCUS** format and service category structure * Service categories for **AWS, Azure, and GCP** remain non-editable to preserve consistency * View service category to TBM mapping details, including sub-category mappings * Easily understand how service categories map to **Sub Cost Pools, Cost Pools, Towers, and Sub Towers** This enhancement provides greater flexibility in managing cloud providers while improving visibility into service category mappings and TBM classifications. *** ** * ** *** #### Alerting and Insight Rules management improvements We've added new capabilities to make **Insight Rules** and **Alerting** easier to manage, review, and migrate. * InsightRules can now be exported and imported in JSON format for backup, sharing, and migration across environments. ![Screenshot 2026-07-07 at 1.21.30 PM-20260707-075246.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_559a66d2e9e3d985f2f3ca2044cbf4e7a7bce522728f869015ac79ec2d9638e1/Screenshot%202026-07-07%20at%201.21.30%E2%80%AFPM-20260707-075246.png?cb=e9b4985dc7770d2f79e36c8218b710d0) * Alerting now includes an Uploaded Files tab to browse and manage previously uploaded alert files. * Edited records that were originally loaded from a file are now automatically de-linked from the source file, ensuring modified records no longer remain tied to the original import. *** ** * ** *** #### Fixed an issue with multi-level spend allocation Resolved an issue where multi-level cost allocations were not fully represented across Analytics and Cost Explorer. Allocation relationships are now correctly processed across multiple asset levels, ensuring accurate visibility into distributed spend. Cost Explorer displays direct allocation relationships, while Analytics provides end-to-end allocation traceability through derived relationships. ### 2026-06-09 Enhncements #### Consumer Spend cube now support model-aware reporting The **Consumer Spend**cube is now model-aware, enabling more accurate reporting when working with multiple models. The **Usage** , **Total Usage** , and **Unit Spend** metrics now reflect data for the selected model. Previously, these metrics displayed aggregated values across all models, making it difficult to analyze consumer usage and unit costs for a specific model. ![image-20260610-092105.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bfb8369f31688225e8121307e99e934b76b5c75286a1cefe285eb9fad62e15bd/image-20260610-092105.png?cb=82d0e656949f75e163425a0f3b473708) ### 2026-06-02 Enhancements #### New Region field in AWS S3 connection The connection for AWS S3 is now included a **Region** field to support region-specific configurations. ![Screenshot 2026-06-02 at 9.38.08 PM-20260602-160913.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4d209168cacc4ebf308edda4de7efe55ed08b239e730a305946bc1f95fe0987d/Screenshot%202026-06-02%20at%209.38.08%E2%80%AFPM-20260602-160913.png?cb=183c7bff15a307fd8346af618f934bce) *** ** * ** *** #### Daily charts in Insights The Z-score anomaly detection now uses a four-day incremental analysis window prior to the execution date, reducing false positives in daily chart evaluations. *** ** * ** *** #### Model name added to navigation breadcrumbs Navigation breadcrumbs for Cost Pools, Towers, Solutions, and Consumers now include the model name alongside the month. For example: Towers \> Jan \> My Spend Model This makes it easier to identify the model currently being viewed and reduces confusion when working across multiple models such as Spend, Budget, Forecast, and custom models. ![Screenshot 2026-06-01 at 6.07.32 PM-20260602-144041.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8c90990fffc201d5c2ce7d6d6f22637133e1ff71ab33b6e59c8d6665cd274d58/Screenshot%202026-06-01%20at%206.07.32%E2%80%AFPM-20260602-144041.png?cb=db6cf1cc6ac937bd45820ca975b4cc3d) ### 2026-05-26 Enhancements #### New role - Cost Model Manager A new administrative role, **Cost Model Manager**, is now available in User Management. This role offers wide admin access for cost model management but limits user provisioning to enhance security and compliance. Users assigned this role can perform most administrative operations, except: * Adding new users * Managing users * Providing access permissions This enhancement supports better delegation of administrative responsibilities while maintaining controlled access. ![image-20260526-044320.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_fc63119dde47c9137eb7820b8f01d0b40b74998537bfc4e2313d9c48ae865189/image-20260526-044320.png?cb=81b744323355f4df187925d1efda8fa1) ### 2026-05-14 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Import and export the Workforce Planning You can now export and import Workforce Planning data sets. * Export includes all columns within Workforce Planning * Import supports optional fields and validates that no more than one plan value exists per person per name * Referential integrity checks verify all referenced data during import * Financial values are automatically recalculated after a successful import In addition, Workforce Planning configuration can now be exported and imported from **Settings**, including: * Roles * Rates * Accounts This allows teams to back up configuration data, review it externally, make updates, and re-import changes efficiently. ![image-20260514-093306.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_073c216fea2e48a903bf39eef04038a0aa6c1614a08d3c701a5651a9a24c49b2/image-20260514-093306.png?cb=87e13eae6f5bda9d01f53bb1c1eaefa5) *** ** * ** *** #### Duplicate rules A new **Duplicate** action is now available across rule management screens, making it easier to reuse and modify existing rules. * Duplicating a rule creates a new rule directly below the original, with the subsequent priority * The duplicated rule retains the original configuration This capability is available for: * Upload rules * Cost Pool rules * Tower rules * Asset-to-asset rules * Solution Offering rules ![Screenshot 2026-05-11 at 2.52.33 PM-20260511-092335.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7717e65c892d0f1548009026f8898c0038ee283076a8a31b36ae78f4fa395d2e/Screenshot%202026-05-11%20at%202.52.33%E2%80%AFPM-20260511-092335.png?cb=1eca0eae1d40bfa709b605c6310d1dbe) *** ** * ** *** #### Automatic rule creation from Budget and Forecast uploads When uploading **Budget** or**Forecast**files, Yarken now automatically creates rules based on mapped dimension columns. * Mapping **Cost Pool + Sub Cost Pool** or **Tower + Sub Tower** automatically generates corresponding rules * Entries with the same Cost Pool and Sub Cost Pool are aggregated during processing * Ensures rule creation remains aligned with uploaded planning data Edit or delete behavior: * Uploaded **Expenses** data can be edited or deleted * Deleting entries also removes the related auto-created Cost Pool and Tower rules * Auto-created Cost Pool and Tower rules cannot be edited or deleted manually *** ** * ** *** #### Ask Yarken enhancements Ask Yarken now supports reporting and analysis of * Unit costs across Solution Offerings and Consumers * Services and products ![image-20260511-120953.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e40fe125e1e8ea6b41bdd35e5191692c926bec2333f0287cadb7cb7c36c8dee2/image-20260511-120953.png?cb=04e282f39c81e23d93b087dd3b24462a) *** ** * ** *** #### Reload prompt after new releases To improve reliability after releases and prevent client-side caching issues, the application now displays a **Reload**prompt when a new version becomes available. Users are prompted to refresh the application to load the latest version. ![Screenshot 2026-05-06 at 3.02.40 PM-20260506-093250.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_939231bf0c75cf214f8054d892b97a1859c08294b63710453f7f9f03870f89aa/Screenshot%202026-05-06%20at%203.02.40%E2%80%AFPM-20260506-093250.png?cb=957ed6ede9492463162e99d0d9171bf3) *** ** * ** *** #### Entity assignment validation corrected during login Resolved an issue where non-admin users could intermittently see a **"No entities assigned to you"** message during login, even when a valid or default entity had already been assigned. Entity validation during sign-in now correctly recognizes assigned entities and allows users to access the application as expected. ![image-20260511-072025.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b73238d7a4995a4d9445de6e4750c1cc82db0b41deb143ac08496e00b1909504/image-20260511-072025.png?cb=ae5b53863e4942e9c8c31254e906e390) ### 2026-04-28 Enhancements #### Workforce Planning We've introduced **Workforce Planning** in Yarken --- a powerful new capability that enables you to plan headcount and automatically translate those plans into fully aligned financial budgets and forecasts. ![image-20260428-055245.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_00bbde63f8846931c9b603440d1e22bf76501dcca69025f961884fef9c7d6f4c/image-20260428-055245.png?cb=6338893b0e926f99d320e35ce7530f93) ##### What's new Workforce Planning extends your existing Budget and Forecast process by providing a purpose-built experience for managing workforce costs---typically the largest component of IT spend. With Workforce Planning, you can: ###### Plan headcount by role * Define roles with standardized compensation rates * Plan employee or vendor headcount across months * Map workforce plans to cost centers, entities, and accounts * Support both full-time and flexible allocations ![image-20260428-060338.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_63ce038bde75e2cbeabf91d22af9625ecc48eaf869e013828349a9230fe0e82d/image-20260428-060338.png?cb=f2fb9cdbeb1fd25aa32e5ed01b7cf4df) ###### Align workforce with your organization * Distribute costs across multiple financial accounts using configurable rules ![image-20260428-060728.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e4fcd3165f9707075a91a70982616eee827df15b76839a370cf9ae26c7ef1bc1/image-20260428-060728.png?cb=512115a2b4ccdf583467710f12c91ee2) ###### Automatically generate financial budgets * Convert headcount into account-level budget entries in real time * Eliminate manual calculations and spreadsheet-based tracking * Ensure financial accuracy and consistency across all plans ![image-20260428-055722.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d2c4fe60683f67a172c4db8474a4f108a2c9a9ae00e3e45b002b92284c77c162/image-20260428-055722.png?cb=ac0c35210002a42f7f08e4cba66785a7) ###### Integrated with Budget \& Forecast workflows * Workforce Planning is fully embedded within your existing planning process * Submit, review, and approve workforce plans using the same workflow * Ensure headcount and financial impact are validated together #### Copy a Model You can now copy model data directly within the Yarken Designer. * Copy data from another model and year into the currently selected model (same type) * If the target model already contains data, it will be overwritten during the copy process ![image-20260428-065032.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_788fc28c1533ab647f0c0c2a9e2223e173f60b51764f3e245bee010da26ab119/image-20260428-065032.png?cb=85b2e2fa048983a819705a18e575b151) #### Multi-model publishing for cloud spend and planning data Cloud spend and Budget/Forecast publishing now support instead of a single destination. * You can select the model when publishing cloud spend or Budget/Forecast data ![image-20260428-124559.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_639c1c0ad0da33b1a9df01e194942813ea637eef42523e1499fb36d349c9ec54/image-20260428-124559.png?cb=3e44bbdeb168fdda8de2f366b3876881) * For cloud spend, a default **Spend**model is preselected for faster publishing. The model also supports unpublish behavior, allowing you to remove cloud spend data by unpublishing it from a specific model. ![image-20260428-124645.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bdfef1410c99d3df3ebe311e89cfef8c1a3dfa1849711a89c11d9b6005e8a513/image-20260428-124645.png?cb=aadf436399137ba3674a00e87ccdab6e) #### Ask Yarken enhancements ##### Stop response option added in Ask Yarken Ask Yarken now supports stopping an active response while it is generating or querying data. You can cancel an in-progress response when needed, giving them more control during longer queries or analysis requests. ![image (37)-20260428-123348.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2bd03e393a4a28f471182a3cdbbb84339f80cf785505487025fce5585b0a191a/image%20(37)-20260428-123348.png?cb=5fa876f12bd7aff60d207f6a3f71fcee) ##### Organization context setting Ask Yarken now supports an **Organization context** setting to provide additional business context for responses. * Define company-wide goals, processes, or policies (e.g., cost reduction targets) * Context is applied automatically to improve the relevance and accuracy of responses * Helps align AI outputs with organizational objectives * Supports up to 500 characters of contextual input ![image-20260428-123540.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2bd1ca74eb27e9fd03e5425a2d9f202dc6428e6ad72d2a536acb915b586be12e/image-20260428-123540.png?cb=74858cef2068aa42700d99aefc72566e) ##### Search lookup Ask Yarken now includes **Search lookup**, a tool that helps identify entities when a user's question contains an unclear or ambiguous term. Search lookup can search across dimensions such as vendors, applications, cost centers, accounts, and consumers to find relevant matches in the system. When multiple matches are found, Ask Yarken can either: * Ask the user to clarify the intended result * Make a judgment call automatically This behavior is configurable from the **Search lookup: Ambiguous matches** setting. ![image-20260428-123637.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_efc49066f31901bf454fe4d338816fcce53847d6ac22eb1141a4c89b3f4296f7/image-20260428-123637.png?cb=ba385c66e26dd167f8c27cf7dccc36a2) For example, if ServiceNow exists as both a vendor and an application, Ask Yarken can prompt the user to choose whether they want vendor spend, application spend, or both. ![image-20260428-123732.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d6069c38dbac91294262b249be7edd50797b757ac9b8eeb84cea005deab910b7/image-20260428-123732.png?cb=a7e3a637e4f5fdaa11cf4129a7151b09) #### Standardized display format for code and ID Updated the Designer UI to consistently show **Code/ID** and **Name** together as **\\|\** across Master Data, Assets, Cost Pools, Towers, Solutions, and Consumers. This standardization applies throughout all screens/views, as well as filters (dropdowns/search) and rule creation/selection options. ![image-20260414-113911.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1f689b9ba3db10436092d948fb0b5cfff7e7afdf48d1c5deb102aecf3d97e3c1/image-20260414-113911.png?cb=fccdb58c8b5b983ff628ad7b9a94d00f) #### Asset Mapping -- Copy From / Copy To The Asset Mapping is included with new **Copy Asset Mapping From** and **Copy Asset Mapping** **To** options to reuse configurations across months instead of manually recreating them. ![image-20260428-124452.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a3bd45e4315ad659a00db3c0b8f83aff7d0efd23e48bc9096b3756e62a18cc8a/image-20260428-124452.png?cb=0460320096be0de2faf2101c3b3ae8fb) #### Solution Offering portion validation Validation has been added for Solution Offering portion values during upload. For each Asset Type + Asset ID, the total portion across solution offerings must equal 1. If the total is below 100%, affected rows are flagged with a row-level error so users can correct the allocation before proceeding. #### Asset mapping warnings scoped to current upload Asset mapping warnings were incorrectly carried over from previous uploads, causing users to see warnings even when uploading valid files. Validation logic has been updated so asset code checks are performed only against the current upload. Warnings and errors are now correctly scoped, ensuring users see messages only for issues relevant to the file being processed. ### 2026-04-14 Enhancements #### New P\&L Report (Account-based) We have introduced a new **P\&L Report**(Account-based) to enhance visibility into account-level financial performance across Actuals, Budget, Forecast, MTD, and YTD. The report leverages the account hierarchy (Level 1 and Level 2) to present both detailed and aggregated views, and includes key metrics such as **Total Operating Expense, Addbacks,** and**EBITDA**, with EBITDA driven by Companion Metrics configuration. ![image-20260413-115612.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c2cbe7cc9f0e3961506b83f19adb443e5971c5ab1f4c972c017f0210ca5585d7/image-20260413-115612.png?cb=66c22d885cc901597cf9783cc7231436) #### Model export and import You can now export and import model data to support backup, migration, and replication across environments. * Export model data for a selected year as a ZIP file containing CSVs for Cost Pools, Towers, Solutions, and Consumers * Export includes model data, rules, and mappings *(upload rules are not included)* * Import ZIP files to create or replicate model data for a selected model and year * For successful replication, ensure master data and asset data match the source model * Importing data overwrites existing data for the selected model and year ![image-20260414-113543.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ce8f10c7cf8c78d2d00ee71e18567399d847b76d58033bde219de30f0e9e42e1/image-20260414-113543.png?cb=41d69abf4ca389c104c795b248b8e00b) #### Journal ID constraint updated We have removed the unique database constraint on **Journal ID** to provide more flexibility in handling journal data. * Multiple records can now reference the same Journal ID, supporting scenarios where a single journal entry spans multiple line items or allocations * Ensures smoother data ingestion without validation failures due to duplicate journal references ### 2026-04-06 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Download asset mappings You can now download all asset mappings---including both file-uploaded and manually created mappings---from the ellipsis menu. ![image-20260407-063111.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_803907c56e741801b93709e742e5951e2bdd3d267ea0b81ccab359bf84c41fa5/image-20260407-063111.png?cb=d925e77119ee1427bbbb02a631ae3b88) #### Export Audit Logs We have enabled export of the Audit Logs with support for exporting up to 1000 records per file, allowing you to retrieve and analyze larger activity histories. ![image-20260407-063526.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_db260ce8cb682cad0d65ece564e2a4b95d2a82a8c3e05804ed245c242f5757df/image-20260407-063526.png?cb=4b08fca1809b88361ec0af3c17b36a6c) #### Background processes corrected Background process tracking has been corrected to accurately reflect running and completed statuses across operations such as Tower Rules copying and other related processes. Processes now remain in a running state until fully completed, and the process list displays the correct status and timing, improving visibility and reliability of long-running operations. #### Asset rule copy and upload performance improved We optimized asset rule copying and asset uploading to reduce processing time during bulk uploads. ### 2026-03-31 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Model comparison in Analytics We have included the ability to compare multiple models in Analytics and Custom Dashboards. * You can now compare the default model with additional custom models within Spend cube. * When custom models are defined, dynamic measures are automatically created in Analytics, enabling seamless comparison alongside existing default model metrics. ![image-20260331-094310.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d1dae15cd13ff3f975e24ef7665dd51825ecbb6f3ac735fb08e111497428ccb4/image-20260331-094310.png?cb=dead697c4f5854e33fdd9843848a6c43) #### Asset rule - extended filter conditions in "By Spend" split type When creating asset rules manually, the "**By Spend"** split type now supports extended filter conditions across all asset types. Previously, filter conditions could only be applied to the selected target asset. This update enables more flexible allocation by allowing additional conditions across all relevant asset types. ![image-20260407-091106.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_96e63dc1e795c60eb982f74c275c0c62cc2b225c5886191b3dc48116421c4892/image-20260407-091106.png?cb=dd755d9a8fdfc77c62b159fcc1f14a4c) #### Enable or disable AI features globally Admin users can now enable or disable **Ask Yarken** and **Copilot**across the application from AI Settings, providing centralized control over AI functionality when needed. ![image-20260330-092359.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_628756b601e8a16631815b797ee6ca015023d08603933b47f9615dd3e52bd6fd/image-20260330-092359.png?cb=ba89e485cddf6be0472bb71f32fea2af) #### Custom dashboard - widget and dashboard filter issue Resolved an issue where combining widget-level filters with dashboard-level filters could cause charts to load inconsistent results in custom dashboards. Filters are now applied correctly across both widget and dashboard levels. ### 2026-03-25 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Model management We've introduced model management capabilities that allows you to better organize and configure new models * Create additional custom models of type Spend, Budget, and Forecast as needed. * Delete user-created models when no longer required. * The three default system models---Spend, Budget, and Forecast---are always available and cannot be modified or deleted. ![image-20260324-092725.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_36ce97fea3bca758e1be731a3bb37ef829de13c5e0fc494d46d29c78e9a263d4/image-20260324-092725.png?cb=fde7539b8329810e762efc57fff3d704) #### Copy rules and mapping across the models You can now copy mappings and rules---including Cost Pool, Tower, Asset, Solution Offering, and Consumer rules---between models. This capability is also supported through the **Copy To** functionality, enabling easier reuse of configurations across models. ![image-20260331-103644.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_1464436cd40831afd1197976de4f6a090eec07cb901a11c922da02d7cc3ee7c1/image-20260331-103644.png?cb=18798e06fc0ff90b1310f4d574c14812) #### Model filter in Cost Explorer Cost Explorer now includes a Modelfilter, allowing you to view data by selected model. The filter defaults to the **Spend** model. ### 2026-03-17 Enhancements and bug fixes #### Model configuration and navigation improvements * Lookup Types moved outside model and year. They are now managed independently of model and year, simplifying configuration and ensuring consistent usage across all models and time periods. ![Lookup types-20260317-090418.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b4bedc7a4a6cb8e008bd01734ea8e22949f0c521025602f6f308c6d48368fe07/Lookup%20types-20260317-090418.png?cb=ded0fc47836b542c2dfeb5ea4a66487f) * Upload rules are now independent of models; however, you can optionally specify a **Model** in the filters for more precise rule application. ![image-20260317-122038.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2c052e9388fc131dac6301b17c8271587801dc12c146b66b7e2176fd4c32eca4/image-20260317-122038.png?cb=9470649c32bfaa50c4129ce12aacfd34) * Naming for Spend has been standardized across Designer, with **"Expenses"** now used as the common term for model elements, while metrics in Analytics continue to be labeled as **Spend, Budget,** and**Forecast**. ![image-20260317-125800.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2c79157c8192a88b4fb637552bdc05e374431e0ac0b9df36d920dabe1cdb1968/image-20260317-125800.png?cb=e56582e87787abf951181accff3ff977) #### Consumer Spend cube The **Consumer Spend** cube now includes additional fields to support budget and forecast analysis: * **Consumer Budget** * **Consumer Forecast** * **Budget Variance** * **Forecast Variance** ![image-20260317-123611.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a3901d5d04a08c8fde1bcca6bdb9bf19cf71ae9131cd60442dc4bc670a75bf6f/image-20260317-123611.png?cb=897101d486dc38e0fdb95e9d74ec3bff) #### Chargeback report visibility and improvement Resolved issues affecting Chargeback report visibility and added safeguards to protect the chargeback definition. * The default Chargeback report now appears in **Settings → Chargeback** even when no custom reports are configured, ensuring the chargeback view is always available. * Newly created Chargebackreports from Analytics are now visible immediately in **Settings → Chargeback** after creation. **Additional safeguards:** * The default chargeback definition report cannot be deleted from **Saved Reports** in Analytics. * If a user attempts to delete the report configured as the chargeback definition, a popup message prevents the action. * Mandatory columns (Consumer ID, Solution Offering ID, and Consumer Spend) in the chargeback definition report cannot be removed. ![Chargeback deletion popup-20260317-063858.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cf25bc85b05ec97c2de5cdc4b02f1df94fa5deeb6f342226980aec8279e31081/Chargeback%20deletion%20popup-20260317-063858.png?cb=06927509ad550adeb54297944f6bf3b7) #### Relative date filters corrected in custom dashboards Relative date and month filters (such as current month and current year) in custom dashboards now recalculate based on the current system date. This ensures dashboards always display the most recent and accurate data, instead of relying on the date when the dashboard was created or last saved. #### Spend flow display corrected in Designer model chart Fixed an issue in the Yarken Designer **Spend Mode**l view where the spend flow from Cost Pools to Towers displayed $0 values in the cost pool flow indicators, even when the downstream spend was correctly allocated to towers. The visualization has been corrected so that the spend between cost pools and towers now accurately reflects the allocated amounts. ![image-20260317-071532.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b909a88156c9fa3ee38b46f5410605ccd7d856a4b20c5a386fd8b0e493e16c96/image-20260317-071532.png?cb=9560dcdc733a3fbe6d4773671295abec) #### Node limit for Sankey charts in custom dashboards Resolved an issue where Sankey charts in custom dashboards were truncated when too many nodes were present. A new **Node Limit** option has been added to control the number of nodes displayed. Nodes exceeding the configured limit are now grouped under **Others**, ensuring the chart remains readable and fully rendered. ![Node limit in custom dashboards-20260317-064637.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f0bdea1e1c024b10bfe43d86211694c62176583e2489d21567e7052b61e5eeb8/Node%20limit%20in%20custom%20dashboards-20260317-064637.png?cb=6736c641f681ae7a1cb58998957bdda7) ### 2026-03-03 Enhancements #### Financial models in Yarken Yarken now supports a new **Models** concept to structure financial planning and analysis data. Models act as reusable structures that organize Spend, Budget, and Forecast data. Default models are available out of the box, allowing teams to begin working immediately. ![image-20260309-100451.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_47c9ccb71669b71b89ce6d9de15e3029c22ecaffc34b4a09f65c845d81ba7966/image-20260309-100451.png?cb=035d31dff090875b8a40aad7ff5fad25) ##### What's included * Default models: **Spend, Budget,** and**Forecast.** * Models can be applied across: * Spend, budget, and forecast * Rules and mappings (including Upload Rules and Lookups) ![image-20260227-062656.png](/__attachments/a_73ed5ebce77739f25813b69f92e9fe5aa42b056addf79d080d1d885d185ad664/image-20260227-062656.png?cb=e9b28457511754c9f25580600a6d85d9) * In **Pipelines**, data mapping templates are now based on the model linked to the template. * Years are independent of models. Users select a model, and all years remain available within it. ##### Publishing behavior * **Cloud Spend** can be published only into the **Spend** model. * **Budget and Forecast** data are published directly to their respective models, ensuring clear separation between planning and actuals. ##### Important scope note Models do not apply to: * Master data * Consumption data (cloud and mobile) * Assets * License usage (tenant, individual, product) * Accounts payable * Companion metrics Data in these areas remains shared. ##### Why this matters The new model structure enables: * Loading actuals and budgets into defined planning models * Comparing multiple forecasts, budgets, and actuals * Supporting different allocation strategies between budgets and actuals This provides clearer separation of planning scenarios while keeping reporting flexible and consistent. #### Entity support in Planning, Business Case and Ask Yarken ##### Entity-level support in budgets and forecast Budgets and forecasts now support entity-level management, allowing different planning cadences per entity. **Budget updates** * Entity is stored on each budget line item. ![image-20260227-070503.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d2702426da661a700f8d36ff24624a69eb548e581000b0ff27be2eb10c77e39a/image-20260227-070503.png?cb=ec3c4594679ea8fc338524bb871ecf47) * Budget access respects entity-level permissions. * The Budget overview page includes a global Entity filter. * CT loads and file uploads respect the user's entity access. * When a budget is pushed as Baseline, it replaces the existing budget for that entity. **Forecast updates** * Forecasts follow the same per-entity model as budgets. ![image-20260227-070326.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0ed220310d82b4d4ccf9747223ccc471eb28fda9dbf2bb0a0d15dc30a4710c41/image-20260227-070326.png?cb=98656657fa18f1a1202155e0c3377b6f) * When a forecast is pushed for an entity, it replaces the existing forecast for that entity. This update improves visibility, control, and alignment between planning and entity-based reporting. ##### Business Cases now support entity at the line level Business Cases are now entity-aware at the line level, improving alignment with multi-entity reporting. * You can assign an Entity to each Business Case line item (cloud and non-cloud), for both manual entry and file-uploaded line estimates. * The global Entity filter is respected in Business Case views. * Actuals and estimates are now matched by Entity, ensuring more accurate comparisons between Business Cases and actual spend. ![image-20260227-063547.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8166b0eb54eca659f6e53ed2202c06674b81725e4f66ac5b3aec91f7d25639af/image-20260227-063547.png?cb=fee87c2abd9fd58d84197b891001ffc4) ##### Ask Yarken - Entity-level responses Ask Yarken now fully respects entity-level access controls. When users have permissions across multiple entities, responses and data visibility are constrained to only the entities they are authorized to access, ensuring consistent permissions and accurate reporting behavior. #### Modify uploaded spend records You can now update uploaded spend line items (GL entries only) directly within the application. * Edit key fields such as spend, SKU, Towers, and other supported attributes. ![Screenshot 2026-03-09 at 4.09.10 PM-20260309-103928.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5fcdf3be6cceeb0d87ab024554d0cca7dfc4707964d8318e87038950e39f70f4/Screenshot%202026-03-09%20at%204.09.10%E2%80%AFPM-20260309-103928.png?cb=1d907f7f35f4a7115a1232a06916e5c2) * Changes are applied on top of data processed through upload rules. * Once a line item is edited, it is de-linked from the original uploaded file. If the original file is later reloaded or deleted, the modified spend records remain unaffected. ![image-20260309-104116.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7d6e0ae8a40808cbc6d652e04cb0afb9e727332e80e85ae0399826c8956d310d/image-20260309-104116.png?cb=ac1c7ded1c434c0bd93898621eb3de84) * Edits respect locked months (including post-chargeback periods). * Updates trigger downstream rules for the affected spend records. * Budget/forecast or cloud spend published to CT cannot be edited or deleted. This enhancement provides greater flexibility to correct or refine spend data without requiring file re-uploads. #### Improved cube refresh experience The cube refresh experience has been enhanced to provide greater visibility and control over partition-level processing. * Cubes that contain partitions are now clickable, allowing users to drill down and view detailed information for each partition. ![image-20260311-061537.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2ca54b6f4366d6c1a3b0639eb1d39eab197e70aa3bc28d0989d3d78b1cfbaf88/image-20260311-061537.png?cb=f62376c80810ba8073f0108f20780711) * Partition-level pending status is now visible. When data changes occur, affected partitions move into a **Pending** state. ![image-20260311-061644.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_589e9a6ea0a01ba23f34949bc3c41ab5e351cc1132700841805fe2a9a3d96ebb/image-20260311-061644.png?cb=2cd677550942f6459981f2b17a8ebad6) * From the partition view, users can refresh individual partitions or refresh all partitions within the cube. * The **Refresh** action in the cube view refreshes all partitions (both pending and previously refreshed) to ensure the cube is fully up to date. * A new **Refresh Pending Partitions**button allows users to refresh all cubes and their pending partitions in one action, streamlining bulk updates across the application. #### Rule Summary column added to rule exports When exporting Cost Pool, Tower, Asset, and Solution Offering rules to CSV, a new **Rule Summary** column is now included. This column provides a human-readable representation of the rule JSON for easier review and validation. ![image (22)-20260227-122428.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b61e1e0f1a9d984c6f0109cdb2d3eea7d8557f3a164ac4785bb2dd2bd06740bf/image%20(22)-20260227-122428.png?cb=d566e1fa20b6d4a853b16597766fe577) #### Validation added for missing master data in mappings We've introduced validation when loading consumer, solution, or asset mappings to prevent missing master data from being silently ignored. * If a mapping references a consumer, solution, or asset that does not exist in master data: * An warning message is shown in notification. ![image-20260225-054759.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_80e7cd7dbc4defa25bee75d9ea41423706a9ee07e203de713ec68c3b931074a5/image-20260225-054759.png?cb=3dadf03974956a09ec4a93af0ee8e466) * The entry is marked as **"Not found"**, with a hover message indicating the ID is not available in master data. ![image-20260225-054903.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_29ff35e6aa1c24a7d2d8d05239f6751cfb99bcc059218720f221765c4f4559f8/image-20260225-054903.png?cb=0da95fd1dbb7efc7d7542553f80dd73c) * Rows with missing identifiers are automatically sorted to the top for easier review. Once the missing identifier is added to master data and the mapping is refreshed, the "Not found" indicator is removed automatically. #### Updates to Towers, Solutions, and Consumers rule views We've updated the rule configuration experience across **Towers** , **Solutions** , and **Consumers** for better clarity and consistency. **Towers** * Unassigned spend is now clearly labeled as **Unallocated Cost Pool Spend**. * Tabs have been rearranged for a more consistent experience. ![image-20260225-055110.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_cb2665d246572cf13241dd5e64597e2240f0c6cb00ef97626b9301c3b05b4eb9/image-20260225-055110.png?cb=2ac4322b8e71c20cfcc4e5099a5eded1) **Solutions** * The rule creation experience has been refined with two default manual strategies: * Mapping strategy 1**:** **Asset Type, Asset ID (name)** * Mapping strategy 2**:** **Any Attribute** (from asset to solution offering) * A new **Unallocated Asset Spend** tab has been added. * The **Rules** tab has been renamed to **Solution Rules**. ![image-20260225-055219.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ea3ef55dbfd221cd44f4533ddd21012597c9600d6866693c9e69f26e2566ad45/image-20260225-055219.png?cb=4aed1f51884e4db72db2c4de97aeb809) ![image-20260225-060354.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4f35fab02f8614f05a8434aa5502c10cd85310c11384b893568bc0e7eea485bc/image-20260225-060354.png?cb=532131ccffcdd70c1bca7ce4e8f224eb) **Consumers** * A new **Unallocated Solution Spend** tab has been added for improved visibility into unmapped spend. ![image-20260225-055658.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_bc6c6c197311579cd0cd3ef83c0aacdb1e87030e9cd83b338ed7d4255de04df6/image-20260225-055658.png?cb=37472e1b26e6bce6a7e2e8506a90a871) #### Additional columns in Finance Overview tabular view The **Finance Overview** tabular view now includes four additional columns: Month, Cost Center, Account, and Vendor. These fields are now queried to display granular data in the table. The same columns are also available in drill-down reports and GL popups. ![Finance overview-20260310-121017.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b0f700c50d14838a76b94e7c82d08a1a2c06e3b3dbe06f98b1dc6b233a067581/Finance%20overview-20260310-121017.png?cb=f2292a2bd00e277e8dbe8c62a05e629d) #### Fix for grand total for pivot table rows The row grand total is now enabled for pivot tables in both custom dashboards and analytics. ![image-20260227-104302.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c525a1f5d2d1063721695ca84ce5088431e38c6404c40f0fa4dfa98b17d601d0/image-20260227-104302.png?cb=e9f81f33f41ac719a7478961417e4fcb) #### Calendar date range fixed in Cloud Consumption cube Fixed an issue in the **Cloud Consumption** cube where calendar date ranges returned data only for the start date. The underlying function has been updated to include both the start and end date year and month IDs, ensuring data is fetched correctly for the full selected date range. ![image-20260227-105131.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_11c02e53bf0939b692662b16ea992bf74925bf7c17c0b1cca5bd0ed13be83868/image-20260227-105131.png?cb=3924970afe75c1b32cdf2f6251e7db70) ### 2026-02-17 Enhancements #### Multi-Entity support now available in Yarken Yarken now supports multi-entity structures across the platform, allowing organizations to manage and report spend by region, business unit, or legal entity---all within a single Yarken instance. This enables clearer ownership, cleaner reporting, and more precise access control across financial and cloud spend. ##### What's included **Default entity (automatic)** * Every environment now includes a built-in **Default**entity. * All existing data, including users, maps automatically to the Default entity, ensuring uninterrupted reporting. **Entity setup in Settings** * Entities can now be configured in **Settings**. * Each entity supports: * **Entity Code** and **Entity Name** (required) * Region, country, owner, and description (optional) * The Default entity cannot be removed, but it can be renamed and updated. ![image-20260217-095603.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_348c19b74b3f85811bd42ee9ae8f43ec124b238b08f1d37a63374f9d856937ea/image-20260217-095603.png?cb=7be905692fe14853e234b9b646deab0b) **Entity-based access control** * Entity visibility is now permission-aware: * Admins automatically have access to all entities. * Non-admin users must be assigned access to one or more entities through **Admin → User Management → Entity Access**. ![image-20260217-095844.png](/__attachments/a_d66d46d0094519a6d908d8b348d8e30273d3e7c84f6210e2d91103cab21316ef/image-20260217-095844.png?cb=851b20d523cca23e40b347656d0ec3f2) * If a user is not assigned access to any entity, they will see an error at login until access is granted. **Entity attribution across spend and cloud** * Spend and cloud data now support an **Entity** field. * If no entity is provided, records default to the **Default**entity. * For cloud consumption uploads: * Each upload can carry its own entity. * Entity can also be set or overridden using upload rules. * The cloud spend summary view now shows the entity. * Published cloud spend data include entity attribution for consistent downstream reporting. ![image-20260217-100237.png](/__attachments/a_006b066148b1108b8ca0c0b2ce2f8e94b98a76f1fdc4f4f21d5c55739cfab75e/image-20260217-100237.png?cb=636053ea6ba2ecd5f9be013fce9bad3c) **Reporting and analytics filters** * A new **Entity** global filter is now available across the application. ![image-20260217-100358.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c95d6ea9b2ec934e35836d13412743ba383d2c6dbd4d73f63e519daa33df28fe/image-20260217-100358.png?cb=a59dfe8278ec1a4b816524133abdcc9f) * The filter supports multi-select, with: * All entities selected by default (preserving existing report behavior) * Consistent sorting across dropdowns and filters * Clear display when multiple entities are selected * Cost Explorer now includes an **Entity**filter next to the month filter. #### Updated branding and UI We've refreshed the Yarken product experience to align with our new brand identity. This includes an updated logo across the application (including Ask Yarken), refreshed brand colors, updated loading screen visuals, and a new favicon. ![image-20260217-133645.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_396d60bb98d1789dcb743d45938128d32ef8bad09886548d1372b28bfaa66ee6/image-20260217-133645.png?cb=7a7ece83e0a73ff0de6dba5bf945af40) #### Planning exchange rates added for budgets Yarken now supports separate planning exchange rates for budgets and forecast. This includes: * A dedicated planning (budget) exchange rate table, separate from actual exchange rates * Monthly exchange rates for all selected foreign currencies * CSV import for planning exchange rates ![image-20260217-055519.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_280a787dc6cc0c3ad97964385380af337b81fd8b7b66e38a0edf65f39df6d9f9/image-20260217-055519.png?cb=f23a0617d21fc652ee53d97497eb9287) #### Ask Yarken enhancements for currency and spend detail ##### Preferred currency support * Ask Yarken now displays spend in the user's preferred reporting currency, converting values from the base currency when needed. ![image-20260218-121653.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5b9cc3e26760eec04afced43b2b4af06c16c72ec301e6a36d54612266e41ac55/image-20260218-121653.png?cb=034b4f28d64b3a3e28602e24119e3f36) ##### Journal-level spend line item access * Ask Yarken now supports deeper spend drilldowns using newly exposed journal-level dimensions, including: * Journal ID * Journal Date * Journal Transaction Date * Journal Line Description * Journal Project ID * Journal Invoice Number This enables more granular visibility into journal-based spend data. ![image-20260218-122543.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d4dc0471061c6cf8dc9be9cd5621bd08ec60d425de311e4193946be1a4bf3d5d/image-20260218-122543.png?cb=31317f01d86db6d7e9ae4ed4e0317e39) #### GPT-5.2 support and improved AI model switching Yarken now supports **GPT-5.2** as a globally selectable LLM. When the global model is set to **GPT-5.2** or **Claude**, AI features continue to work consistently across the product, maintaining feature parity and quality regardless of which model is enabled. #### Budget and forecast line items now support any currency You can enter budget and forecast line items in any supported currency. Each budget or forecast has its own planned exchange rates. * Budget planning rates are copied from the planned exchange rates. * A currency selector is now available in the budget/forecast line item editor. * Line items are stored in their original currency, and automatically converted to base currency using the configured budget planning exchange rate. * Both values are visible: * Original currency + amount * Converted base currency amount **Note:** Planning exchange rates must be configured for the required months before creating a new budget or forecast. ![image-20260217-070644.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f5acf784199adc52193babe87a7788ffb96ffcfb1828cb6904a191f581c112e9/image-20260217-070644.png?cb=310b6f01c419fa037415aef898076b6d) #### Refresh budget/forecast exchange rates You can now update future planning exchange rates to support more accurate multi-year budgeting. * Budget owners can update exchange rates for unreleased budgets and forecasts. * In active forecasts, updated rates can be applied by selecting **Update Currency Exchange Rate**, which recalculates affected amounts. * Once a budget is submitted, its planning exchange rates are locked to preserve approved figures. ![image-20260217-072431.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6278fc1c6d6b89b9df81b8d24bb99e0ac25f512c0551fe0ce1838cf3afa3e0e7/image-20260217-072431.png?cb=57e57d7802c69a5d1adee000dce2253e) #### Improved Tower rules sorting across pages Tower rules sorting has been improved so selected rules can now be moved correctly between pages. Navigation arrows are enabled when needed, allowing rules to be repositioned across pages during sorting. ![image-20260217-074630.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_639543cbbab66012e3920226044afbfb66ced3a62c3071d6de46661b167b5b5c/image-20260217-074630.png?cb=ace75abfe6fef78fb3f1d6030f711e56) #### Unallocated consumer spend visible in Sankey charts Fixed an issue where unallocated consumer spend was not displayed in Sankey charts across environments. Related bar charts continue to show this spend under Unknown. ### 2026-02-09 Enhancement #### Improved login matching and observability for Entra ID / OpenID Login for customers using **Entra ID** or **OpenID** is now more resilient when identity providers return either a username or an email. During sign-in, Yarken now matches users by username first, then falls back to email, and automatically updates stored user details when they differ from the identity provider. Failed login attempts are now captured with improved visibility: * Logged in Yarken**Audit Logs** with full email details for administrators * Logged in **New Relic** using obfuscated identifiers for privacy, including timestamps and clear failure reasons ![image-20260204-091055.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ace2ed23fc5f98ea26a0fb41df73bfc6ac35eeee336a1be73bc8eb4c05a179e8/image-20260204-091055.png?cb=22751b38e94688d4cf5cfdc1bd7064be) ![image-20260204-091131.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f8f1035e86c76a13d5338350c684a84878bc5b5990bb235e3f14484017b05dd2/image-20260204-091131.png?cb=23d199bafae69e9a0462d05659ff1d3e) #### Conversion-only currency option added Foreign currencies can now be configured as conversion-only. On the **Foreign Currency Selection** screen, a toggle controls whether a currency is available for reporting or used only for conversion (for cloud data, budgets, and forecasts). The toggle is enabled by default, making the currency available for reporting. Turning it off restricts the currency to conversion-only use. ![image-20260216-125806.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_421ea0e3d37014758711d760c6985887ad705e810d84d9da36e1b09fd7426b7c/image-20260216-125806.png?cb=d0e2928452037f99f33d818bb28b62c0) ### Relative month filters corrected in Analytics Fixed the behavior of timeline relative month filters to prevent incorrect results across year boundaries. * **Is current month/quarter** now applies only the current period and ignores any year filter. * **Is last month/quarter** now correctly reflects the previous calendar month/quarter (year is not considered). * **Is current year** is no longer applied by default. Instead, only the current month is applied by default across all Analytics cubes. ![image-20260211-141019.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_ba092c839c95c3496c14bdc39fee728049bdf90da5c63a58245ae2124100a16d/image-20260211-141019.png?cb=b195c0665d466b090c0dda4013b353b0) #### Fix for budget values in Finance Overview Fixed an issue where budget values appeared as zero in the **Finance Overview** transaction details view, even when budget columns were enabled. The issue was caused by an journal ID filter in the GL popup, which was only applied to spend and not for budget, prevented valid budget data from displaying. The filter has been corrected, and budget values now appear as expected. ### 2026-02-02 Enhancement #### New asset allocation method: Split by Spend A new **By Spend** split type is now available when creating manual asset rules. This option allocates asset spend proportionally based on existing allocated spend across target assets. Additional filters such as Cost Pool, Sub Cost Pool, Tower, and Sub Tower can be applied to control which spend contributes to the allocation. Changes take effect immediately. ![image-20260205-122104.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_320bcdfbb33aa33b329d8028c3ba3bc3d19a01aa19200acc86a336d758e26c10/image-20260205-122104.png?cb=2e19a3bb351dd9cca26347ec7d1c48f5) ### 2026-01-26 Enhancements #### Additional dimensions in Consumer cube The **Accounts** , **Cost Centers** , and **Vendors** dimensions are now available in the **Consumer** cube in **Analytics**, enabling more detailed consumer spend analysis. ![image-20260127-122803.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_4c744693bf6e186f7eba1a98c9c2174b1dee8dff1163d7f97adbe3cb4811a5a1/image-20260127-122803.png?cb=275382edb479a8b0daba1765fbb45969) #### Cache Management for Yarken Designer A new **Cache Management** capability has been introduced specifically for the **Yarken** **Designer** page to improve performance and responsiveness. The cache is managed internally by admin via **/admin/cache**. Once the cache is built, the Designer page loads quickly on subsequent access. Any data modification automatically invalidates and refreshes the cache to ensure the latest data is reflected. ![image-20260127-124009.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_972a4f63e37771043ddc8badf53e2757d07b3c85b84dd1b536d8d2e900dfe606/image-20260127-124009.png?cb=7ff6f6f8fa7b288f559db13d71b1a12a) ### 2026-01-19 Enhancements #### Multi-currency support across Yarken Yarken now supports end-to-end multi-currency handling, allowing teams to upload, store, analyze, and report spend in both base currency and foreign currencies with full traceability. ##### What's new **User-level reporting currency** * Users can select their **Reporting Currency** directly from their profile. ![image-20260120-115714.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b71180ae1c390707e9961682e0d02d6e19f1e8197b43c32e977b0b3dd2499f92/image-20260120-115714.png?cb=41fed8f64687da0bccbe4e8112180c25) * The list includes the environment base currency and currencies configured under **Settings → Foreign Currency**. ![image-20260120-115450.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_805575e1236b0118f3dbc0c6a7535a262c50bcfda670f79e990875b12f22f12a/image-20260120-115450.png?cb=4d6b52a95ff4beca63199cf0e978a129) * Changing the currency re-renders all on-screen data instantly. **Exchange rate management** * Exchange rates can be configured from **Admin → Settings → Currency Exchange Rate**. ![image-20260120-115348.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_87e6f643dc487b8e7b5bd876de286ea0937b92996e78a9356422b7f73a483cc4/image-20260120-115348.png?cb=ef03ae1d174bf4024ba52712b5700f9b) * Rates are maintained monthly by year, enabling accurate historical conversions. * Bulk upload is supported to load multiple currency rates at once. **Spend uploads with foreign currency tracking** * Additional columns---**Foreign Amount** , **Exchange Rate** , and **Foreign Currency**---are added to actual spend uploads to track the original source values for spend that has already been converted using an exchange rate. ![image-20260120-120150.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6110755c9790fa179ad9bf8400425a7fd4f746a52f107714ec9b9b5363482c5b/image-20260120-120150.png?cb=8081b02c1c9a7a4e3ed26cebeaeaea71) * The system stores both the original source currency and the converted base currency per transaction. * Multiple currencies are supported within a single file. * These fields are available in **Analytics** and as hidden-by-default columns in GL popups. **Cloud spend currency handling** * During cloud file uploads, costs are converted to base currency using the month- and year-specific exchange rate, based on the cloud charge period start date and billing currency. * If no exchange rate is found during upload, a default rate of 1 is applied. **Analytics and dashboards** * Spend can now be analyzed using base currency or the original foreign currency, along with the applied exchange rate. * Multi-currency values are supported across Analytics and Custom Dashboards. If no exchange rate is defined for a given month, spend for that month appears as zero in the dashboards and reports. #### Ask Yarken is now agentic and reasoning-driven Ask Yarken has been upgraded from a workflow-based assistant to an agentic, reasoning-driven AI built for financial and IT spend analysis. Instead of relying on fixed workflows and predefined SQL generation, Ask Yarken now interprets intent, evaluates context, and determines the best way to answer each question. This delivers more accurate explanations, deeper insights, and greater flexibility when working with complex financial data. ![image-20260120-120752.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8cb76f6432d31bc83af271d284c2e06c0450e8b4379e900cc7609e48d4fed623/image-20260120-120752.png?cb=2732fdcd8d9f59472b3268d3b63a9bd5) ##### What's new **Agentic reasoning** * Applies logical reasoning to understand intent and context before responding. * Adapts its approach based on the question, data relationships, and prior interactions. **Deeper spend and variance analysis** * Explains *why* spend changes occur, not just *what* changed. * Breaks down variances across cost pools, towers, vendors, and time. * Supports cross-dimensional analysis for more complete financial insight. **Stronger domain expertise** * Improved understanding of **FinOps** , **TBM**, and IT financial management concepts. * More accurate responses to procedural, instructional, and analytical questions. **Data visualization** * Generate column charts, line charts, pie charts, and stacked visualizations **Access-level permissions** * Respects Account- and Cost Center--level permissions. Responses generated by the agent are limited to only the data the user is authorized to access. **Improved workspace** * A new full-screen experience supports longer queries, deeper analysis, and clearer results. ##### SOP (Playbooks) support for Ask Yarken (Beta) Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are now supported for Ask Yarken (Beta) to ensure guided and consistent AI responses. Administrators can manage SOPs from **Settings** \>**Playbooks**, including instructing the model, downloading existing SOPs, and importing updates. ![image-20260120-120410.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_c6672a2bdb389e0d223e721d866217fd1702c18d6f22dae87e203a4e19493350/image-20260120-120410.png?cb=d054b82c7bfa2c393fb5003bf99a696d) ### 2026-01-12 Enhancement #### Global search **Global Search** functionality now includes the search results for the Cost Center Owners, allowing them to find relevant records directly from the search bar. Results are scoped to the cost centers they own. Selecting a result opens the corresponding Cost Center Owners report. ### 2026-01-05 Enhancements #### Charts and mapping aligned with TBM v5.0.1 As part of the TBM v5.0.1 implementation, we updated terminology and mappings to reflect the latest TBM standards. 1. Labor charts * Labor charts now follow TBM v5.0.1 terminology. * **Internal Labor** and **External Labor** are replaced with: * **Staffing -- Internal Labor** * **Staffing -- Staff Augmentation** * The **Labor** and **Labor Trend** charts on the home page reflect these updates. ![image-20260106-115916.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_dc0c30aa7a9243663ad407b6047ddf082c44e3f62e1d3e873b39db2bcc326962/image-20260106-115916.png?cb=19b059b15930378dabf4730409e4de79) 2. Cloud consumption mapping * Cloud consumption now uses the following structure: * Cost Poo**l:** **Cloud Services** * Sub Cost Pool**:** **Cloud Service Provider** 3. Sub tower mapping * Instead of allocating tower consumption to a generic **Cloud** sub-tower, the Tower and Sub-Tower assignments will now be determined based on FinOps (version 1.3) Service Category \& Sub-Category. 4. Dashboards and charts filter * All charts affected by the **Cloud** Sub Tower and **Outside Services -- Cloud Service** **Provider** filters have been updated to reflect the TBMv5.0.1 changes. * **Outside Services -- Cloud Service** **Provider** (v4.0) → **Cloud Services - Cloud Service Provider** 5. TBM 4.0 behaviour * Existing TBM 4.0 implementations continue to use the **Cloud**sub-tower with no changes. #### Cloud spend publishing aligned with TBM v5.0.1 With the TBM v5.0.1 implementation, cloud spend publishing now aligns with the updated TBM taxonomy, including new Cost Pools, Sub Cost Pools, Towers, and Sub Towers. Cloud spend publishing is driven by the TBM taxonomy version configured in the application's default settings. #### Publishing behavior by TBM version * When the taxonomy is set to **TBM v5.0.1**, cloud spend is published using the v5.0.1 taxonomy structure. * When the taxonomy is set to both**TBM v4.0 and v5.0.1**, cloud spend is still published using the v5.0.1 structure, including updated cost pools and towers. * When the taxonomy is set to **TBM v4.0 only** , cloud spend continues to publish using the **l**egacy TBM v4.0 taxonomy and allocation logic. #### Service category derivation The logic used to derive Cost Pool and Tower from Service Category can now also be configured using Upload Rules and Lookup files. --- language: "en" --- # Account Details The Account Details report provides a breakdown of the selected Accounts spend. This allows you to see a detailed breakdown of your Account spend for a particular month. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total year-to-date spend across all included IT costs. Annual Budget Budget for the full year Budget (YTD) Budget allocated for the current year-to-date period. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Spend This chart shows the monthly trend for month-on-month and cumulative Year to Date spend. Spend is shown as Total Spend and Budget for each month. Click on any month column to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Account Spend Details This chart shows the monthly account spend trend for contracted and non contracted spend. Spend is shown as contracted spend, non-contracted spend and total spend for the filtered account. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart Name** | **Data Cube** | |-----------------------|---------------| | Monthly Spend | Finance | | Account Spend Details | Finance | --- language: "en" --- # Account Budget Details The **Account Budget Details** report provides a detailed multi-year budget view for a selected Account. This report is accessed by drilling down from the **Top 20 Accounts** chart in the **Budget Overview** dashboard and is scoped to selected account. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Each KPI shows annual budget values for multiple years, the total budget, and the percentage change from the previous year. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Budget Details The **Monthly Budget Details** chart shows the selected Account's monthly budget allocation across multiple years. Click on any month to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Cost Centers The **Cost Center** chart displays the budget allocation for the selected Account across associated Cost Centers over multiple years. Click on any vendor to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Top 20 Vendors The **Top 20 Vendors** chart provides a breakdown of budget allocation by Vendor for the selected Account. Click on any vendor to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Budget Details The **Budget Details** table provides a list of all budget associated with the filtered account. The budget amount is shown with the CPI-LPI percentage, budget status, and budget creator's name. Click on any row to drill into the related GL transactions. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart Name** | **Data Cube** | |------------------------|-----------------| | Monthly Budget Details | Budget Planning | | Cost Center | Budget Planning | | Top 20 Vendors | Budget Planning | | Budget Details | Budget Planning | --- language: "en" --- # Account Forecast Details The **Account Forecast Details** report provides a comprehensive breakdown of forecasted spend for the filtered account. It enables you to compare forecasted costs against budgets and analyze how forecasted spend is distributed across cost centers, vendors, and months. For help on how to navigate dashboards and filter data: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Forecast The **Forecast** chart provides a high-level comparison of the annual forecast and budget in the filtered year. Use this chart to understand whether forecasted spend is trending above or below budget. ### Monthly Forecast Details The **Monthly Forecast Details** chart shows forecast versus budget by month for the selected year. Use this view to compare the monthly forecast and budget distribution. Click on any month to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Top 20 Cost Centers The **Top 20 Cost Centers** chart shows forecast versus budget by cost center. Use the chart to identify cost centers driving the largest portion of forecasted spend. You can spot cost centers that are forecasted above or below the budget. Click on any cost centers to drill into the the related GL transactions. ### Top 20 Vendors The **Top 20 Vendors** chart displays forecast versus budget by vendor. Use this view to identify vendors with the highest forecasted spend and compare forecasted vendor spend against budget allocations. Click on any vendor to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Forecast Details The **Forecast Details** table provides a list of all forecasts and budgets created for filtered criteria. The table shows the details such as CPI-LPI percentage, budget status, budget creator's name, and total amount. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart Name** | **Data Cube** | |--------------------------|-----------------------| | Forecast | Budgets and Forecasts | | Monthly Forecast Details | Budgets and Forecasts | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Budgets and Forecasts | | Top 20 Vendors | Budgets and Forecasts | | Forecast Details | Budgets and Forecasts | --- language: "en" --- # Account Overview The Account Overview page provides a list of all your accounts. This allows you to see an overview of their current spend, budget and variance before selecting one to see a more granular breakdown. --- language: "en" --- # Accounts Payable ## Overview **Accounts Payable** in Yarken Designer allows you to manage supporting financial records such as **Invoices, Purchase Orders, and Contracts**. These records provide additional context for vendor spend and help you to track the expenses at vendor-level. Accounts Payable data enriches reporting and transaction details by connecting spend to: * Vendor invoices * Purchase orders * Vendor contracts * Cost centers * Accounts * Vendors Once Accounts Payable data is added, invoice and related details can be viewed in transaction detail lists across applicable reports. *** ** * ** *** ## What is included in Accounts Payable Accounts Payable includes the following datasets: * **Invoices** * **Purchase Orders** * **Contracts** These datasets work together to create a commercial trail from contract commitment to purchase order and invoice. *** ** * ** *** ## Recommended data relationship Accounts Payable records are most useful when they are linked correctly. Recommended relationship: **Contract → Purchase Order → Invoice** * A **Contract** defines the commercial agreement with a vendor. * A **Purchase Order** can be linked to a contract. * An **Invoice** can be linked to a purchase order. All three can be associated with vendors, cost centers, and accounts where applicable. *** ** * ** *** ## Recommended load order To ensure records can be linked correctly, load data in this order: 1. **Vendors** in Master Data Vendors must exist before linking invoices, purchase orders, or contracts. 2. **Accounts and Cost Centers** in Master Data Required if Accounts Payable records need to be associated with accounting or ownership structures. 3. **Contracts** Load contracts before purchase orders if purchase orders need to be linked to contracts. 4. **Purchase Orders** Load purchase orders before invoices if invoices need to be linked to purchase orders. 5. **Invoices** Load invoices after vendor and purchase order data is available. *** ** * ** *** ## Invoices Invoices represent vendor bills received by your organization. Each invoice captures details such as invoice number, invoice date, invoice amount, vendor, and optional links to purchase orders, cost centers, and accounts. Invoices are useful for validating vendor spend and providing invoice-level visibility in transaction reporting. Invoices help you: * Track vendor billing details * Link invoice spend to vendors * Associate invoice records with purchase orders * Provide transaction-level detail in reports ### Mandatory fields When adding or uploading invoices, the following fields are required: * **Invoice Number** Unique identifier for the invoice. * **Invoice Date** Date associated with the invoice. * **Invoice Amount** Total amount of the invoice. * **Vendor Name** Vendor linked to the invoice. ### Optional fields You may also provide: * Invoice Description * PO Number * Cost Center Name * Account Name * Custom String fields Use optional fields to improve traceability and reporting context. **Notes**: * Vendors must exist in Master Data before they can be linked to invoices. * Add purchase orders before invoices if invoices need to be linked to purchase orders. * Invoice details become available in transaction-level reporting where applicable. *** ** * ** *** ## Purchase Orders Purchase Orders represent official purchasing documents issued for products or services. They capture what was ordered, the agreed value, vendor information, and optional links to contracts or cost centers. Purchase Orders help you: * Track approved purchasing commitments * Link invoices to purchase orders * Link purchase orders to contracts * Analyze spend by vendor, contract, or cost center * Improve governance over committed spend ### Mandatory fields When adding or uploading purchase orders, the following fields are required: * **PO Number** Unique identifier for the purchase order. * **PO Date** Date associated with the purchase order. * **PO Amount** Total value of the purchase order. * **Vendor Name** Vendor linked to the purchase order. ### Optional fields You may also provide: * PO Description * Requester * Status * Contract Number * Cost Center Name * Custom String fields **Notes**: * Vendors must exist before purchase orders can be linked to them. * Add contracts before purchase orders if purchase orders need to be linked to contracts. * Cost Center Name is optional but recommended when ownership or departmental reporting is required. *** ** * ** *** ## Contracts Contracts represent vendor agreements that define commercial terms, committed amounts, and contract periods. They help track long-term obligations, negotiated agreements, and contract-related spend. Contracts can be linked to vendors and optionally to cost centers or Companion Metrics. Contracts help you: * Track vendor commitments * Compare contracted amount with actual spend * Compare planned and actual values in the companion metrics * Link purchase orders to vendor agreements * Monitor contract start and end dates * Support vendor and contract portfolio reporting ### Mandatory fields When adding or uploading contracts, the following fields are required: * **Contract Number** Unique identifier for the contract. * **Contract Amount** Total contracted value. * **Vendor Name** Vendor linked to the contract. ### Optional fields You may also provide: * Contract Description * Contract Type * Actual Spend * Start Date * End Date * Status * Active * Cost Center Name * Custom String fields **Notes:** * Vendors must exist before contracts can be linked to them. * Start Date and End Date are optional but recommended for contract lifecycle tracking. * Use **Active** to indicate whether a contract should be treated as active in the application. * Actual Spend can help compare usage or billed amounts against the contracted value. ### Manage Contract Metrics The **Manage Contract Metrics** option allows you to associate one or more [**Companion Metrics**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/companion-metric.md) with a contract. These metrics can then be used for reporting and performance tracking within the **Contract Portfolio** dashboard. By linking metrics to contracts, organizations can compare planned metric targets against actual metric values and monitor whether contractual obligations, service levels, or consumption targets are being achieved. **Note:** Only metrics that have already been configured in **Companion Metrics** can be linked to a contract. **Why use Contract Metrics?** Contract Metrics help provide additional business context beyond contract spend. They can be used to track key contractual measures such as: * Number of service requests * Transaction volumes * User counts * Support tickets * Storage consumption * API calls * Service utilization metrics * Other business or operational KPIs Once linked, these metrics can be analyzed alongside contract spend in reporting dashboards. #### Add a metric to a contract To link a Companion Metric to a contract: 1. Navigate to **Accounts Payable \> Contracts**. 2. Locate the required contract. 3. Click the **Manage Contract Metrics** icon in the **Actions** column. ![image-20260611-101924.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_78c2b67439331e19a792bd923f06dfe1e0f462ea01014b99927daf67f4d3d33b/image-20260611-101924.png?cb=e07e7d79b1dbdec8340e72e312b3eda7) 4. In the **Manage Contract Metrics** window, select a metric from the **Metrics** drop-down list. ![image-20260611-102005.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_2fa18c1a6f9764904798943b3663e0bf338f0c884eab155a5ae2acba5a0651f5/image-20260611-102005.png?cb=3d97232f416948898a9a13de1694e725) 5. Click **Add**. 6. The selected metric is added to the contract and displayed in the metrics list. The list displays: * Metric Name * Target Value * Unit of Measure *** ** * ** *** #### Remove a metric from a contract To remove a linked metric: 1. Open **Manage Contract Metrics** for the required contract. 2. Locate the metric in the list. 3. Click the **Delete** icon. 4. Confirm the action if prompted. Removing the metric only removes the association between the contract and the metric. The metric definition remains available in **Companion Metrics**. *** ** * ** *** #### Viewing linked metrics After metrics are linked to a contract, they are available for reporting within the **Contract Portfolio** dashboard. ![image-20260611-102640.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b7ab4070c755274bcfd287c1a3f145b55381903a83f03ee7fac55690a8894fc6/image-20260611-102640.png?cb=60933cfa153010a3d0afcd1589b16b3d) The Contract Metrics visual can be used to: * View metrics associated with a contract. * Compare planned and actual metric values. * Review contractual performance against agreed targets. This helps organizations evaluate both the financial and operational performance of their contracts from a single reporting view. **Notes**: * A contract can have multiple metrics linked to it. * Metrics must exist in **Companion Metrics** before they can be associated with a contract. * Removing a metric from a contract does not delete the metric definition. * Contract Metrics are used for reporting and performance analysis and do not affect contract spend calculations or allocations. * Changes to metric targets or definitions should be managed through the **Companion Metrics** configuration. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step [Load Accounts Payable data](https://help.yarken.com/yd/load-accounts-payable-data.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** [Matser Data](https://help.yarken.com/yd/master-data.md) [Companion Metrics](https://help.yarken.com/yd/companion-metric.md) --- language: "en" --- # Accuracy Trend Use this article to understand how forecast accuracy changes over time across teams or for a selected team. The Accuracy Trend dashboard helps you review whether forecasts are becoming more accurate or less accurate through the financial year. It combines a monthly spend chart with a deviation view so you can compare total movement and accuracy together. By default, the dashboard shows all teams for the selected financial year. You can apply a team filter to focus on one team. *** ** * ** *** ## Monthly Spend Monthly Spend shows the month-by-month relationship between forecasted spend, actual spend, and prior year spend. Use this section to: * Compare forecasted and actual spend across the financial year. * See whether actual spend is moving ahead of or behind forecast. * Add context with prior year spend when reviewing seasonality or recurring patterns. The dotted or future-oriented forecast view helps show expected values for months where actual spend is not yet loaded. Hover over a month to review the values shown for that point. *** ** * ** *** ## Deviation RAG Status Deviation RAG Status shows the percentage deviation across months using the configured RAG thresholds. Use this section to: * Monitor whether forecast accuracy is improving or declining across time. * Compare team performance month by month. * Identify months that fall outside expected tolerance. This section is especially useful when the Monthly Spend chart shows a visible gap and you want to confirm whether that gap is within the accepted threshold. *** ** * ** *** ## How to interpret the page A typical review pattern is: 1. Start with **Monthly Spend** to identify where forecast and actual values begin to separate. 2. Check **Deviation RAG Status** for the same months to confirm whether the difference is low, medium, or high. 3. Apply a team filter if you want to isolate one team's accuracy trend. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step If you need a team-specific view, open [Team Forecast](https://help.yarken.com/yd/team-forecast.md). If you need to review longer directional movement in year-to-date values, open [Forecast Trend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/forecast-trend.md). *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Forecast](https://help.yarken.com/yd/forecast.md) * [Team Forecast](https://help.yarken.com/yd/team-forecast.md) * [Forecast Trend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/forecast-trend.md) *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # Forecast Activity Logs Use this article to understand how to track forecast changes across teams and months. The Activity Logs page provides a searchable audit trail of forecast modifications. It helps you understand when a forecast changed, which team was affected, who made the change, and what values were updated. Activity Logs are useful when you need to validate a recent change, review update history before discussing variance, or trace how a team's forecast evolved over time. *** ** * ** *** ## What the log shows Each log entry can include: * Date and time of the update. * User who made the change. * Team name. * Forecasted month. * Previous forecast amount. * Updated forecast amount. * Forecast discrepancy or variance context. * Comment added with the change. *** ** * ** *** ## How to filter the logs You can filter the logs by using the following criteria: * Teams * Months Use filters when you want to narrow the audit view to a specific team, review one forecast month, or reduce noise before exporting or discussing the changes. *** ** * ** *** ## How to search the logs Use the search option to find specific entries by relevant keywords. This is helpful when you already know part of a team name, a user name, or a comment value and want to find matching activity quickly. *** ** * ** *** ## When to use Forecast Activity Logs Use this page when you need to: * Check whether a forecast was recently updated. * Confirm who changed a forecast amount. * Review comments entered during forecast updates. * Investigate why a forecast no longer matches an earlier discussion or review. *** ** * ** *** ## No data on the page If the page shows no data, review the selected year and applied filters. A blank state usually means there are no matching forecast updates for the current selection or the selected teams do not yet have activity in that period. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step * [Accuracy Trend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/accuracy-trend.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Forecast](https://help.yarken.com/yd/forecast.md) * [Forecasting Overview](https://help.yarken.com/yd/forecasting-overview-admin.md) * [Team Forecast](https://help.yarken.com/yd/team-forecast.md) *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # Add and configure a Dashboard AI Narrative widget ## Overview **Copilot availability** Dashboard AI Narrative is a Copilot. An administrator must enable it under **Admin** **\> AI Studio \> Channels \>** **Copilots** before you can add the widget to a custom dashboard. Use the **Dashboard AI Narrative** widget to turn information from your custom dashboard into a written summary. The widget reviews selected dashboard reports and widgets and generates a formatted narrative that can highlight key findings, explain possible drivers, and identify areas that may need attention. Narrative generation runs in the background, so you can continue working with the dashboard while Yarken prepares the narrative. *** ** * ** *** ### Before you begin Before adding an Dashboard AI Narrative widget, confirm that: * **Ask Yarken Beta** is enabled. * Your user account has the required **Yarken AI licence and feature access**. * An administrator has enabled **Dashboard AI Narrative** under **Admin \> AI Studio \> Channels \> Copilots**. * You have permission to create or edit the custom dashboard. ### What the Dashboard AI Narrative widget does Use the Dashboard AI Narrative widget to: * Review reports and widgets on the current dashboard. * Generate formatted narrative content from dashboard data. * Apply the dashboard's active filters when generating and displaying the stored narrative. * Generate narratives in the background without blocking the dashboard. * Add instructions to control the narrative's focus, tone, and level of detail. * Regenerate the narrative when the underlying data, filters, or configuration changes. The Dashboard AI Narrative widget works directly within the dashboard. You don't need to configure a separate Automation to generate the narrative. ## Add an Dashboard AI Narrative widget 1. Go to **Analytics \> Custom Dashboards**. 2. Open the dashboard. 3. Select **Edit**. 4. Select **Add Widget**. 5. In the widget panel, select **Dashboard AI Narrative**. ![Screenshot 2026-08-07 at 12.19.58 PM-20260807-065035.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_29463069811a7ab0a1640b23dfd0b4eb218c9ac2da94469015a997665be5d506/Screenshot%202026-08-07%20at%2012.19.58%E2%80%AFPM-20260807-065035.png?cb=594edf20db840d2a84ce3301b7a5ee2a) 6. Select at least one dashboard widget to use as a source for the narrative. ![Screenshot 2026-08-07 at 12.21.55 PM-20260807-065215.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0771980a039934fcaeb359f98cb9d5beca5a926d229c1107ec0dcaf302901d70/Screenshot%202026-08-07%20at%2012.21.55%E2%80%AFPM-20260807-065215.png?cb=fbb8da1477435f5f20b2c5c008ae2f19) 7. Configure the Dashboard AI Narrative widget. 8. Select **Done**. After you add the widget, the customization panel opens on the right side of the dashboard. *** ** * ** *** ## Configure the widget ### Configure card settings Use the standard card settings to control how the Dashboard AI Narrative widget appears on your dashboard. | **Setting** | **Description** | |-----------------------|--------------------------------------------------| | **Title** | Enter the heading displayed above the narrative. | | **Subtitle** | Add supporting context below the title. | | **Border** | Show or hide the card border. | | **Border radius** | Choose the corner style. | | **Background** | Set the card background. | | **Text** | Set the appearance of the narrative text. | | **Show updated time** | Show when the narrative was last generated. | ### Choose a content source Choose the information you want the Dashboard AI Narrative widget to use when generating the narrative. #### From widgets on this dashboard Select **From widgets on this dashboard** to generate the narrative from selected reports or widgets on the current dashboard. ![image-20260807-065804.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6c9465582a723c7e2929d850fea4250462e8db1800903d86d4cc7d82f10348a5/image-20260807-065804.png?cb=b6f28383c1fba15a650f736b2e9c9de7) Use this option when you want the narrative to explain or summarize results displayed on the dashboard. #### From instructions Select **From instructions** to generate the narrative using the instructions you provide instead of relying only on selected dashboard widgets. ![Screenshot 2026-08-07 at 12.29.19 PM-20260807-070045.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f15c857e695f3d629e796e81759f3fc5dea0ee85913049ebe5c1accbf38a4ff4/Screenshot%202026-08-07%20at%2012.29.19%E2%80%AFPM-20260807-070045.png?cb=e3c7bb4a97a6ca8b4c044838bdb2050e) Use this option when you want to provide broader guidance or additional context for the narrative. ### Add instructions In **Instructions**, describe what you want the narrative to focus on. For example: * Lead with the main variance against plan. * Explain the top cost drivers. * Compare the current month with the previous month. * Identify unusual movements and suggest possible causes. * Keep the summary suitable for an executive audience. You can use instructions to control: * The metrics or findings to emphasize. * The order in which information appears. * The intended audience. * The narrative tone. * The level of detail. The **Instructions** field supports formatted text. **Tip** Be specific about the outcome you need. For example, **"Explain the three largest month-on-month cost changes and identify the business units responsible"** is likely to produce a more focused result than **"Summarize the dashboard."** ### Choose a voice Select the writing style that best matches the intended audience. | **Voice** | **Best suited to** | |----------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Executive** | Senior leaders who need concise findings and business implications. | | **Analyst** | Users who need more interpretation and supporting detail. | | **Controller** | Finance users who need a control, variance, or governance-oriented view. | ### Choose the level of detail Select the approximate length of the generated narrative. | **Option** | **Approximate length** | |--------------|------------------------| | **Snapshot** | 1--25 words | | **Short** | About 60 words | | **Brief** | About 200 words | | **Balanced** | About 350 words | | **Detailed** | About 500 words | Use **Snapshot** or **Short** for compact dashboard cards. Use **Balanced** or **Detailed** when users need more in-depth analysis. ### Highlight key information Turn on **Yellow highlight** to highlight key findings in the generated narrative. ![image-20260808-130113.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f43c85b43cbf0a4784824d6cdc98dcfc80af510ddf52e8bd3a0337031c3f757c/image-20260808-130113.png?cb=5013ea08ced039d433becc9a120ff9e4) ### Add optional style notes Use **Style notes (optional)** to provide additional guidance about how the narrative should be written or presented. For example, you can ask the narrative to: * Highlight a key variance. * Give less emphasis to supporting information. * Emphasize risks or actions. * Adjust how specific parts of the narrative are presented. You can leave this field blank if you do not need additional style guidance. *** ** * ** *** ## Choose the run mode Under **Run mode**, choose when the Dashboard AI Narrative should be generated. ### Scheduled Select **Scheduled** to regenerate the narrative automatically on a defined cadence. Before setting a schedule, make sure the dashboard data is available and refreshed before the scheduled narrative runs. This helps ensure that the narrative is generated using the latest available data. To schedule the narrative: 1. Under **Run mode** , select **Scheduled**. ![image-20260808-105905.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_076618704c722ecf15f72f7b7eaf209457987a2de4ec3f2a2369d0b9ca50060a/image-20260808-105905.png?cb=ec2abdc1e314337c401f8142204f13c5) 2. Under **Cadence**, select how often the narrative should run: * **Daily** --- Runs every day. * **Weekly** --- Runs once a week. Select the **Day** of the week. * **Monthly** --- Runs once a month. Select the **Day of the month**. 3. Under **Time**, select the time when the narrative should run. 4. Under **Timezone**, select the timezone for the schedule. 5. Save the dashboard to register the schedule. **Note**: The schedule is registered when you save the dashboard. Make sure the source data is available before the scheduled run time. For example, if dashboard data is refreshed every Monday at 7:00 AM, schedule the narrative to run after the data refresh is complete. ### Manual only Select **Manual only** if you do not want the narrative to run on a schedule. After saving the dashboard, use **Generate Narration** to generate the narrative for the first time or **Regenerate** to update an existing narrative. *** ** * ** *** ## Set the filter scope Use **Filter scope** to control whether the narrative follows the **Year** and **Month** filters on the dashboard. ![image-20260808-111712.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d79056f83ef5c0d5f8c9f738361be18fde382d4048462caa3af974203c83fdaf/image-20260808-111712.png?cb=7f61e6bfd25cac83b795d95b3204d518) The following options are available: | **Filter** | **Description** | |------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Year** | Uses the year selected in the dashboard filter bar to define the narrative scope. | | **Month** | Uses the month selected in the dashboard filter bar to define the narrative scope. | Turn on the filters under **Filter scope** if the narrative should follow the corresponding dashboard **Year** or **Month** filter. If neither **Year** nor **Month** is selected, the narrative uses a **company-wide (global)** scope. The stored narrative is associated with the dashboard's active filters. As a result, a narrative generated for one month or year may differ from a narrative generated with another filter selection. After changing a relevant filter, regenerate the narrative to ensure that it reflects the updated dashboard context. ### Filter scope for scheduled narratives For scheduled narratives, the selected **Filter scope** also determines whether the scheduled run uses dashboard Year or Month scope. If neither **Year** nor **Month** is selected, scheduled runs generate a **company-wide narrative**, even when the dashboard currently has filters applied. *** ** * ** *** ## Generate the narrative After configuring the widget: 1. Select **Done** to save the dashboard. 2. Locate the **Dashboard AI Narrative** widget. 3. Select **Generate Narration**. 4. Continue using the dashboard while generation runs in the background. 5. Review the narrative when it appears. **Success** Yarken stores the generated narrative and displays it in the widget. This means users don't need to wait for a new narrative to be generated each time the dashboard loads. *** ** * ** *** ## Regenerate a narrative Regenerate the narrative when you: * Change the instructions. * Select different source widgets. * Change the voice or level of detail. * Apply different dashboard filters. * Refresh the underlying dashboard data. * Update assumptions or contextual information used by the dashboard. Use the widget's ellipsis (**...**) menu to access the regeneration action. ![Screenshot 2026-08-08 at 5.06.07 PM-20260808-113700.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_158b6de8f6f72a51e2d6132593ad62cb1f2ad833e25afa910b05a9253c50806f/Screenshot%202026-08-08%20at%205.06.07%E2%80%AFPM-20260808-113700.png?cb=73ad0e2fe71349fe3c6ca2801c6e92fa) *** ** * ** *** ## View narrative run history Use **Run history** to review recent AI narrative generation attempts. From the dashboard, you can review the status of recent runs. To view the details of a run, including the instructions, context, and generation details for a run, open the dashboard in **Edit** mode. Run history helps you understand how a narrative was generated, verify the instructions and context used, and investigate unexpected results. You can use **Run history** to: * Review previous narrative generations. * Review instructions used to generate the narrative * Verify which dashboard widgets were used. * Confirm the dashboard filter scope used during generation. * Compare generated narratives. * Troubleshoot unexpected narrative results. ### Open run history 1. Open the custom dashboard. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Open the **Dashboard AI Narrative** widget. 4. Click **Run history** in the lower-right corner of the widget. The **Run history** dialog opens and displays recent narrative generation attempts. ![image-20260808-114332.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_82eed35c1ea2b5e5441c9fad9f8db037377838d493265159fa3d11214f2e6123/image-20260808-114332.png?cb=3e42e294ce1f2175dabe6d9c22274f10) To view the latest generation attempts, click the **Refresh** icon. ![Screenshot 2026-08-08 at 6.34.53 PM-20260808-130541.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_28e61fced5089091c2061d88098e06c89b322a16943f3289e82003ec8340564c/Screenshot%202026-08-08%20at%206.34.53%E2%80%AFPM-20260808-130541.png?cb=908370d120ff90181477e265b76821d1) *** ** * ** *** ## Best practices * **Select focused source widgets** * Choose widgets that contribute directly to the same business question. Combining unrelated reports can result in a less focused narrative. * **Write specific instructions** * Include the reporting period, comparison, intended audience, and expected outcome. * For example: * Summarize July cloud expenditure for the CFO. Compare actual cost with budget, identify the three largest variances, and end with recommended follow-up actions. * **Match the voice to your audience** Use: * * **Executive** for concise findings and decision support. * **Analyst** for deeper interpretation and supporting detail. * **Controller** for finance, control, variance, and governance-oriented commentary. * **Generate narratives after data refreshes** * Generate or regenerate the narrative after the dashboard data refreshes. Otherwise, the narrative may describe an earlier data state. * **Align scheduled runs with data availability** * When scheduling a narrative, make sure the dashboard data is available and refreshed before the scheduled run time. This helps ensure that the narrative uses the latest available data. * **Set the appropriate filter scope** * Before generating or scheduling a narrative, check the **Filter scope** settings. * Turn on **Year** or **Month** if the narrative should follow the corresponding dashboard filter. * Leave both filters off if the narrative should use the **company-wide** scope. * **Review run history when results are unexpected** * If a narrative does not produce the expected result, review its run information. * You can review recent run status from the dashboard. For detailed information about a run, including its instructions and generation context, open the dashboard in **Edit** mode and review the detailed run history. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Custom Dashboard](https://help.yarken.com/yd/dashboards.md) * [Ask Yarken](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken.md) --- language: "en" --- # Add and configure an Ask Yarken widget The **Ask Yarken** widget adds an embedded Ask Yarken experience to a Custom Dashboard. It lets dashboard viewers ask questions in natural language while reviewing dashboard information, without leaving the dashboard. Ask Yarken can use the dashboard context to help you investigate the data, explore cost drivers, and continue with follow-up questions. You can also provide suggested questions to help users start their analysis. ## What you can do with Ask Yarken Use the Ask Yarken widget to explore dashboard information using natural-language questions. You can: * Ask questions about spend, cost drivers, budgets, forecasts, vendors, and other available dashboard data. * Explore information beyond what is immediately visible in the dashboard widgets. * Receive data-backed answers and summaries. * Continue the analysis with follow-up questions. * Use suggested questions configured by the dashboard designer to start common analysis workflows. For example, you can ask: * *What is my top vendor by spend this quarter?* * *Show me the cost pool breakdown for Software.* * *What is driving the increase in spend?* *** ** * ** *** ## Add an Ask Yarken widget 1. Open the required **Custom Dashboard**. 2. Select **Edit**. 3. Select **Add Widget**. 4. Under **Default** , select **Ask Yarken**. ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 9.58.58 PM-20260831-162926.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0ee8cf3d1cbc7ba79738f30b2c53137be9c37b67c5b55e01c817d542b78efc59/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%209.58.58%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-162926.png?cb=57ac0af9144e90f4da41ea9054919aed) 5. Position and resize the widget as required. 6. Open the widget settings. 7. Configure the card, appearance, and suggested questions. ![image-20260831-163145.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_43704945948c910451d28979d5a23759c1eef300f0b71529c250e02f69c10335/image-20260831-163145.png?cb=6673fb87eb0e55c956f22f000d35d5af) 8. Select **Done** when you finish editing the dashboard. The widget displays an Ask Yarken question box directly on the dashboard. *** ** * ** *** ## Configure card settings Under **Card Settings**, configure the widget container and header. ![image-20260831-164452.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_85a1879f7aaba7a53a374368168460d7075ae12f5bf49673da3a4b3282982158/image-20260831-164452.png?cb=7cfb0ca9747a8d8108e937604eb0aab6) | **Setting** | **Description** | |------------------------|------------------------------------------------| | **Title** | Sets the title displayed for the widget. | | **Sub Title** | Adds optional supporting text below the title. | | **Hide Header** | Hides the widget header when enabled. | | **Remove Border** | Removes the border around the widget. | | **Border Radius Size** | Controls the rounding of the widget corners. | Use these settings to align the Ask Yarken widget with the surrounding dashboard layout. *** ** * ** *** ## Customize the appearance Under **Appearance**, configure how the Ask Yarken input is displayed. ### Choose a style Under **Style**, select a predefined style or customize the widget appearance. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 4.42.43 PM-20260901-111256.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_f93afb56c48a35b073d6d18ba1306cecfd610e9fa868cfcba05f8d9167837675/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%204.42.43%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-111256.png?cb=be1d9de60ce889470a280eeeb6aeb44c) The predefined styles are: * **Gradient Sweep** * **Quiet Field** * **Frosted** Choose a predefined style when you want to quickly apply a consistent appearance to the widget. Select **Custom** when you want more control over the widget colors and how suggested questions appear. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 4.43.38 PM-20260901-111417.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d63b3ff305114ad5a6d8c8f0c522e63be900b88b0d11d8628ca909a8c0deb6b8/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%204.43.38%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-111417.png?cb=eeedfcc08ac6ac55774cc415ee297e9f) When you select **Custom**, configure the following options: | **Setting** | **Description** | |----------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Background Color** | Sets the background color of the Ask Yarken widget. | | **Text Color** | Sets the text color used in the widget. | | **Question Style** | Controls how suggested questions appear. Select **Link** or **Pill**. | | **Pill Background** | Sets the background color of suggested question pills. Available when **Question Style** is set to **Pill**. | | **Pill Text Color** | Sets the text color of suggested question pills. Available when **Question Style** is set to **Pill**. | With **Link**, suggested questions appear as text links: ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 4.45.07 PM-20260901-111537.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_49429d5d98af0b3d56a43caea1e43df48e9153b0bc3778ac532fca67e01df6e4/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%204.45.07%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-111537.png?cb=037131d816b8f3c29486b562adc85e23) With **Pill**, each suggested question appears in a pill-style container: ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 4.46.09 PM-20260901-111622.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_921e938fb948f01726fc7853afd51e9acfd8e24c82e149010fad7b4cb7be1988/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%204.46.09%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-111622.png?cb=00afa8ddc353f38a9ee66b67e15ae239) You can customize the pill background and text colors to match the dashboard design. ### Configure the placeholder text ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 10.18.06 PM-20260831-164839.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_b021e6251de5720a52c9d49c514dfbf729109aefcffb872e710b17157e50de84/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%2010.18.06%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-164839.png?cb=77500846b2459f98cb1449046698f4a4) For example: Ask question here.... Use short, action-oriented text that helps users understand what they can ask. ### Position suggested questions * Use **Questions On Next Line** to control where suggested questions appear. ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 10.20.56 PM-20260831-165142.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d2a1a6119191a87c1e439633cee88b394f97418cac11a47de42aae9f83540555/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%2010.20.56%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-165142.png?cb=86455e4c8340d32f17791dd6b959e98d) * Turn it **off** to display suggested questions on the same line where space allows. ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 10.22.05 PM-20260831-165236.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_9040d9e09aeea3fb14bb888268a67a4f171f96665cc80cef1225870c589ae1f0/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%2010.22.05%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-165236.png?cb=26e7ee459fd3e87a3ff7cc0a151872a0) Use the option that best fits the available widget width and dashboard layout. *** ** * ** *** ## Configure suggested questions Under **Questions**, choose how suggested questions should be provided. You can select one of three options. ### No questions Select **No questions** to display only the Ask Yarken input. ![image-20260831-165541.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_41309699e191bf8cf9006053fead63054c26a2655eb460a4556ddecf750ebb0b/image-20260831-165541.png?cb=db7adbdcddabacb011342823fa4574ff) Use this option when dashboard viewers already know what they want to explore or when you want to keep the widget simple. ### Define questions ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 10.24.29 PM-20260831-165518.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_032bbe677c863753a33ca5f3850bb82c4e73faab87b78c30ae313b9c0148512a/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%2010.24.29%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-165518.png?cb=3d86b9198b9c815fc4843ddb84d42014) For example: * Why is spend higher than budget? * What is driving the change from forecast? * Which area has the largest increase this period? Use suggested questions to guide users toward common or useful dashboard analysis. Blank question fields are skipped. ### Generate questions from the dashboard Select **Generate from this dashboard** when you want Yarken to suggest questions based on the widgets available on the current dashboard. To generate suggested questions: 1. Under **Questions** , select **Generate from this dashboard**. ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 10.26.11 PM-20260831-165633.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_01337601a20780ad455a84e23bd7af4ca4a7f664a0db73a565a2d5d6f4a7d0d5/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%2010.26.11%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-165633.png?cb=ece8b8d5c4ed8878f2f8897ef73e8c93) 2. Review the generated questions. ![Screenshot 2026-08-31 at 10.27.07 PM-20260831-165805.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_a47335deda1f385e1ddedab7d1d345ddf11f346c23004c872a6cd3758d92761c/Screenshot%202026-08-31%20at%2010.27.07%E2%80%AFPM-20260831-165805.png?cb=36d349d093f9823cb9db55703467b7bb) 3. Edit or regenerate the questions where required. 4. Leave blank any question you do not want to display. 5. Select **Done** when you finish editing the dashboard. Yarken generates the suggestions from the dashboard content. Review them before saving to make sure they are relevant to the dashboard audience and reporting purpose. **Note**: Generated questions are suggestions. Dashboard designers can review and edit them before making the widget available to viewers. *** ** * ** *** ## How dashboard context works When you use Ask Yarken from a Custom Dashboard, Yarken uses the current dashboard context to help interpret your questions. Ask Yarken can inspect the underlying data of analytical widgets, regardless of how that data is visualized. This allows you to explore the data behind supported charts and tables without being limited to the values currently visible in the visualization. Ask Yarken can also go beyond the current dashboard view. You can ask it to: * Analyze any year available in your data, not only the current financial year. * Analyze data by financial year, quarter, month, or a custom date range. * Compare periods, including year-over-year comparisons. * Analyze trends across multiple periods. * Run an analytical widget's underlying query with modified filters, time periods, or dimensions to investigate the data in more detail. For example, if a widget shows spend for the current financial year, you can ask Ask Yarken to compare the results with the prior year or investigate the same data for a different period or dimension. ### Dashboard filters Dashboard filters contribute to the context available to Ask Yarken. However, your analysis is not limited to the exact filters currently displayed on the dashboard. Ask Yarken can run supported analytical queries with modified filters, time periods, or dimensions when needed to answer your question. This allows you to investigate the data in more detail without changing the dashboard configuration. *** ** * ** *** ## Data access and permissions Ask Yarken respects your existing Yarken data access. The information available in responses depends on your permissions and configured access restrictions. For example, your view may be restricted by cost center, account, or other configured access controls. *** ** * ** *** ## Use the Ask Yarken widget When viewing the dashboard, enter a question in the Ask Yarken input or select one of the suggested questions. ![image-20260831-170008.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_25025e850e8456e76e1cc83a42d05938f48e3b3efcb47f1fffd36510c2d34c92/image-20260831-170008.png?cb=8e877fb2af18435229624369c39ac220) Selecting a suggested question opens Ask Yarken with the question already asked. You can then review the response and continue with follow-up questions to investigate the result in more detail. For example, you might start with: *Which vendors have the highest spend?* Then continue with: *Which of those vendors increased the most from the previous period?* *** ** * ** *** ## Recommended practices * Use suggested questions that reflect the purpose of the dashboard. * Keep suggested questions short and specific. * Avoid multiple questions that ask for the same analysis. * Review dashboard-generated questions before saving. * Use **No questions** when a simple Ask Yarken input is more appropriate. * Choose a predefined style for a consistent appearance, or use **Custom** to match the widget colors and suggested questions to your dashboard design. * Use **Questions On Next Line** when suggested questions need more horizontal space. *** ** * ** *** ## Troubleshooting ### Suggested questions do not appear Check the selected option under **Questions**. If **No questions** is selected, the widget displays only the Ask Yarken input. If **Define questions (up to 3)** is selected, confirm that at least one question contains text. ### Generated questions are not what you expected Review the widgets available on the dashboard. Yarken generates suggestions from the current dashboard content. Edit the generated questions before saving if they do not match the dashboard purpose. ### Suggested questions do not fit the widget Turn on **Questions On Next Line** or increase the widget width. ### The Ask Yarken input is difficult to see Review the selected **Style** , dashboard background, border, and card settings. If you use **Custom** , check the **Background Color** and **Text Color** and choose colors that provide clear contrast. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Add and configure dashboard widgets](https://help.yarken.com/yd/add-and-configure-dashboard-widgets.md) * [Custom Dashboards](https://help.yarken.com/yd/dashboards.md) * [Get started with Ask Yarken](https://help.yarken.com/yd/get-started-with-ask-yarken.md) --- language: "en" --- # Add and configure dashboard widgets Use dashboard widgets to build the reporting view you need. Widget options vary by content type and visualization. **At a glance:** Add widgets in Edit mode, configure their settings and filters, then arrange the dashboard so related information is easy to review. *** ** * ** *** ## Add a widget 1. Open the required Custom Dashboard. 2. Select **Edit**. 3. Select **New Widget**. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 1.03.59 PM-20260901-073512.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6934609dacf7d5f572f0be221e7c3b60440f7991133a5589c88b87a43e446243/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%201.03.59%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-073512.png?cb=034a1534207d23513aaed7757bcd992a) 4. Choose the widget type you want to add. 5. Configure the widget. 6. Move or resize the widget as required. 7. Select **Done** when you finish editing the dashboard. *** ** * ** *** ## Widget types Custom Dashboards can include different widget types, including: * Analytics charts and tables * KPI widgets * Text and header widgets * Dashboard Shortcuts * Insight widgets * AI Narrative widgets * Ask Yarken widgets Choose the widget type based on the information you want to present and how users should interact with it. The **Ask Yarken** widget adds an embedded Ask Yarken input to the dashboard. You can customize its appearance and optionally provide suggested questions to help dashboard viewers start their analysis. *** ** * ** *** ## Manage widgets In Edit mode, you can manage widgets on the dashboard canvas. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 1.06.14 PM-20260901-073722.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_6c13320820aa3eaf2dbcdb61d9aae0906e66c97d43be1ab2396508ffca08d5bd/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%201.06.14%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-073722.png?cb=01845d04455c33e12b756cced82c34d4) Depending on the widget, you can: * Move the widget. * Resize the widget. * Duplicate the widget. * Remove the widget. * Open widget settings. * Configure colors, labels, legends, and other display options. * Apply widget-level filters. Available settings depend on the widget and visualization type. **Tip:** Available settings vary by widget type. Configure only the options that support the dashboard's reporting purpose. *** ** * ** *** **Watch the widget count:** Large dashboards can affect reviewability and query load. Remove low-value widgets or split content across purpose-specific dashboards when needed. ## Monitor the number of widgets When a dashboard contains a large number of widgets, Yarken displays a widget-count indicator or warning. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 1.08.00 PM-20260901-073822.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_947a76a5a7d45dfdb78f548222e98fadb62e2dee09043cb8d07279a4d4bdcbef/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%201.08.00%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-073822.png?cb=0fbdf0df97547e2351d9a040f9280b58) Use the indicator as a guide when deciding whether to add more widgets. KPI widgets are not included in the widget count because they have less impact on data and query load. ![Screenshot 2026-09-01 at 1.12.46 PM-20260901-074315.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_5efa90c5fcc21bb47a3f7e5b87fcefe425856cbe4eb6ff6afa77aa7aff0c172e/Screenshot%202026-09-01%20at%201.12.46%E2%80%AFPM-20260901-074315.png?cb=c37a585bfae3d8763b9bf70134a48ab6) If a dashboard becomes difficult to review, consider removing less important widgets or splitting the content across purpose-specific dashboards. *** ** * ** *** ## Configure specialized widgets Use the dedicated guides for more detailed configuration: * **Configure chart and table widgets** --- Configure visualizations, trend lines, and forecasting. * **Configure KPI widgets** --- Configure KPI display, icons, and forecasting options. * **Configure Dashboard Shortcuts** --- Create and style shortcuts to related dashboards. * **Add Insights to Custom Dashboards** --- Add detected Insights to a dashboard. * [Add and configure a Dashboard AI Narrative widget](https://help.yarken.com/yd/add-and-configure-a-dashboard-ai-narrative-widget.md) --- Configure, generate, and schedule AI narratives. * [Add and configure an Ask Yarken widget](https://help.yarken.com/yd/add-and-configure-an-ask-yarken-widget.md) --- Add an embedded Ask Yarken input, customize its appearance, and configure suggested questions. *** ** * ** *** **Recommended outcome:** Keep dashboards focused, consistent, and easy to scan by grouping related widgets and using appropriate filters. ## Recommended practices * Add widgets that support the dashboard's reporting purpose. * Keep related information together on the dashboard canvas. * Use consistent titles, icons, and display settings for related widgets. * Use widget-level filters only when a widget needs a different scope from the overall dashboard. * Review the widget-count indicator before adding more content to a large dashboard. *** ** * ** *** **Tip:** When a widget does not show the expected data, check its fields, measures, filters, and source report before changing the dashboard layout. ## Troubleshooting If a widget does not show the expected data: * Check its fields and measures. * Review widget-level and dashboard-level filters. * Confirm that the underlying data is available for the selected period. * Open the source report in Analytics where applicable and validate its results. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Custom Dashboards](https://help.yarken.com/yd/dashboards.md) * [Create and manage Custom Dashboards](https://help.yarken.com/yd/create-custom-dashboards.md) * [Add and configure an Ask Yarken widget](https://help.yarken.com/yd/add-and-configure-an-ask-yarken-widget.md) --- language: "en" --- # Add Cloud and Non-Cloud items in Business Cases Business Cases support two categories of cost items: 1. Cloud Items 2. Non-Cloud Items These items provide granular investment planning and tracking. *** ** * ** *** ## Add a Cloud Item To create a Cloud Item: 1. Open the **Business Case Details** page. 2. Navigate to the Cloud section. 3. Click **+ NEW CLOUD ITEM.** 4. Enter item details. ![image-20260519-083039.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_928fec991d0097539918b98e9c45be5160424a9c6a4ca71251a22433e9bc7b80/image-20260519-083039.png?cb=31955f3ebf4c6283cd584c566aa66712) 5. Add monthly estimates. ![image-20260519-083103.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3d6925f470de9e772fd0c38ec9c2482116d7432b6908fa5b844e254d500b8788/image-20260519-083103.png?cb=a23731963bbcfe42743e7385a6afe616) 6. Click **SAVE**. *** ** * ** *** ## Add a Non-Cloud Item To create a Non-Cloud Item: 1. Open the Business Case Details page 2. Navigate to the Non-Cloud section 3. Click **+ NEW NON-CLOUD ITEM** 4. Enter item details ![image-20260519-083527.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_41adda28379459d12b859e5f382fee0c0925179e92c1964fa63e5f58b74c4795/image-20260519-083527.png?cb=5b04c6bcf759a4665bf861ec63feb152) 5. Add monthly estimates ![image-20260519-083103.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_3d6925f470de9e772fd0c38ec9c2482116d7432b6908fa5b844e254d500b8788/image-20260519-083103.png?cb=a23731963bbcfe42743e7385a6afe616) 6. Click **SAVE**. *** ** * ** *** ## Importing Cost Items Users can upload Business Case line items using file import. Importing is recommended for: * Large Business Cases * Bulk estimate uploads * Spreadsheet-based planning You can import: * Cloud line items * Non-Cloud line items * Monthly estimates To import line items: 1. Open the **Business Case Details** page 2. Click **UPLOAD** option. 3. Select the file type for upload ![image-20260519-083802.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_81264fb57306df5901a4aae48fff746b3cf99acfbe41d8facce0d27f70ec3d2e/image-20260519-083802.png?cb=4088f66b3521ac4876e4a607e06f6aac) 4. Upload the supported file 5. Validate the uploaded data 6. Save imported records *** ** * ** *** ## Next step [Add metrics in Business Case](https://yarken.atlassian.net/wiki/pages/resumedraft.action?draftId=960069639&draftShareId=97e6d823-d8ce-489c-8359-2c17d0d461d2&atlOrigin=eyJpIjoiYWIxNjA5NTJhYzVkNGQ2NmIxMjNkMjEyNzc2NDkyZGUiLCJwIjoiYyJ9) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** [Business case workflow](https://help.yarken.com/yd/business-case-workflow.md) --- language: "en" --- # Add Insights to Custom Dashboards Add detected Insights to a Custom Dashboard when you want to review important anomalies alongside other dashboard metrics. Insight widgets use Insight and Insight Rule data generated by Yarken. You can select the fields that provide the context required for your dashboard. *** ** * ** *** ## Before you begin Make sure Insights are available for the data you want to review. The fields available to the widget come from the **Insights** Analytics data cube. *** ** * ** *** ## Create an Insight widget 1. Open the required **Custom Dashboard**. 2. Select **Edit**. 3. Add a new widget. 4. Select the **Data Table** chart type. 5. Select the **Insights** Analytics data cube. ![Screenshot 2026-08-24 at 3.55.33 PM-20260824-102557-20260901-180728.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e93c8e3a7b45524937495f5322baa6e52be35b105b70efe4a08e62d4b1d14a26/Screenshot%202026-08-24%20at%203.55.33%E2%80%AFPM-20260824-102557-20260901-180728.png?cb=a626d993bcb232a5f7fe59499304708f) 6. In **Values**, select the fields you want to display. ![image-20260824-102720-20260901-180805.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_e7851bddbcd470730a9a8f85e85b7f0cc31a0dc727f2600fd3e354ae5abb44ef/image-20260824-102720-20260901-180805.png?cb=4f64134176b70613084fa46d4986cb53) Add atleast one **# measure** field to light up your visualization. 7. Configure additional fields, filters, or sorting as required. ![image-20260824-103025-20260901-180834.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_0fda6944128b66ad804ece098d1b2f429327513c0283b95c59770ccce48411a6/image-20260824-103025-20260901-180834.png?cb=87fccff508db4a0742a70301e2878fc6) 8. Configure the table display options. 9. Review the widget. 10. Save or finish editing the dashboard. *** ** * ** *** ## Choose useful Insight fields Select fields that help dashboard viewers understand the detected Insight without adding unnecessary detail. For example, you can combine fields such as: * **Severity** * **Summary** * **Dimension Value** * **Created At** The fields you choose should match the purpose and audience of the dashboard. *** ** * ** *** ## Recommended practices * Include only fields that provide useful context for the dashboard. * Use filters when the dashboard should focus on specific Insight types, periods, or severity levels. * Keep the table focused so important Insights remain easy to identify. * Review Insight data alongside the related dashboard metrics before drawing conclusions. *** ** * ** *** ## Troubleshooting ### The Insight widget does not show any rows Check the widget filters and confirm that Insights exist for the selected reporting context. ### Expected Insight fields are missing Confirm that the widget uses the **Insights** Analytics data cube and review the available fields under **Values**. ### The widget shows too much information Remove fields that do not help explain the Insight. Apply filters or sorting to focus the table on the most relevant findings. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Custom Dashboards](https://help.yarken.com/yd/dashboards.md) * [Add and configure dashboard widgets](https://help.yarken.com/yd/add-and-configure-dashboard-widgets.md) --- language: "en" --- # Add users Users can be added to the application in two ways: * Manually through the **User Management** screen * In bulk by uploading a file using the **Users**template ## Add users manually **Prerequisites** Before adding a new user, ensure you have: * Admin access * The user's name or username * The user's email address **Procedure** To add, 1. Sign in to the application as an **Admin**. 2. From the menu bar, navigate to **Admin** \>**User Management** \>**Users** . A **Users**page opens. 3. On the upper-right corner, click **+ ADD NEW** icon. 4. On the **New User** page, provide the new user's information: 1. **Name:**Enter a new user name. 2. **User Name:** Enter a user email id or username. 3. **Email:**Enter a unique email id. 4. **Roles:** Select one or more roles from the dropdown list. You can assign multiple roles to a single user. Refer page to view access-level information for each role. 5. **Default** **Dashboard**: Set the default dashboard for the home page. You may assign a custom or existing standard dashboard as a default dashboard. 6. **Active** (toggle): Activated by default and user can sign in. When disabled, the user account remains in the system but cannot log in. ![image-20260116-053000.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_aa4b65e8a4b526c4e7ead634c197fca6ba1b98b28530ba4ddf589386e551ad0e/image-20260116-053000.png?cb=49dd6f5936cef7426c6d62a4c2ee093d) 5. Select **SAVE**. A confirmation pop-up appears. The user is now added to the application and can sign in based on the assigned roles. ## Add users using file upload In addition to adding users manually, Yarken supports bulk user creation using the **Users** template file. This is useful when onboarding multiple users at once. **Note** : If users are uploaded without specifying a role in the template, the system automatically assigns the **No Role**. Users with No Role cannot access any dashboards or features until a role is explicitly assigned. **Prerequisites** Before uploading users, ensure the following: * You have **Admin**access. * The **Users**template file is downloaded and completed correctly. * User details such as Name, User Name, Email, Roles are available. **Template guidelines** * **Roles** * Separate multiple roles using a **comma (,)**. * **Active**(Activated by default) * **Yes** --- User is active and can sign in. * **No** --- User is inactive and cannot sign in. Inactive users remain in the system and can be activated later if required. **Procedure** 1. Download the **Users** template from the **Data Dictionary**. 2. Populate the template with the required user details, such as: 1. Name 2. User name 3. Email 4. Roles 5. Default dashboard (if applicable) 3. Save the template file. 4. Navigate to **Admin** \>**User Management** \>**Users**. 5. Click **UPLOAD**button. 6. Drag or drop your file on data upload popup. 7. Review the data during validation and confirm the upload. Users are created in bulk, with roles and default dashboards applied based on the uploaded file. Any validation issues are reported during upload. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** [Manage users](https://help.yarken.com/yd/manage-users.md) --- language: "en" --- # Add users directly in Yarken platform Administrators can create and manage users directly inside Yarken when user onboarding is handled manually instead of through Microsoft Entra ID app role assignments. Use this approach when your organization wants administrators to explicitly add approved users to Yarken before they can access the platform. This includes: * Adding new users * Assigning Yarken roles * Setting a default dashboard * Activating or deactivating accounts * Managing access for invite-only onboarding workflows Yarken uses Microsoft authentication for login security. User passwords are not stored or managed within Yarken. *** ** * ** *** ## When to use direct user management Use direct user management when: * Your organization wants a controlled, invite-only onboarding process. * Users should be manually created by a Yarken administrator. * Roles should be assigned directly inside Yarken. * Microsoft Entra ID app role assignment is not being used for Yarken access management. Do not use this method if your organization manages Yarken users and roles through Microsoft Entra ID. In that case, use the Microsoft Entra ID onboarding process instead. *** ** * ** *** ### Prerequisites for direct user management Before adding users directly in Yarken, verify that the tenant is configured for manual user management. | **Tenant setting** | **Required value** | |--------------------|--------------------| | Azure AD Roles | Disabled | | Invite Only | Enabled | The above tenant setting is accessible from **Admin \> Settings \> Tenants**: ![Screenshot 2026-05-18 at 6.37.28 PM-20260518-131213.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_067749e94cc1854de5845157fef1b5d0bd6ed40c95b5923bd3d35cbb16ea956c/Screenshot%202026-05-18%20at%206.37.28%E2%80%AFPM-20260518-131213.png?cb=77784a4b90670098de76801a0cb44977) *Tenant settings in Yarken application* You will also need: * Yarken Admin access * User name and email address *** ** * ** *** ### Add a new user To create a new user: 1. Sign in to Yarken as an Administrator 2. Navigate to **Admin → User Management → Users.** 3. Select **+ ADD NEW.** 4. On the **New User** page, enter the required user details: 1. **Name**: Enter the user's full name. 2. **User Name**: Enter the user's email address. This is used as the user name for Yarken. 3. **Email**: Enter the user's unique email address. This should match the Microsoft account the user will use to sign in. 4. **Roles**: Select one or more Yarken roles for the user. Roles determine what the user can access after signing in. 5. **Default Dashboard**: Set the default dashboard for the home page. You may assign a custom or existing standard dashboard as a default dashboard. ![image-20260518-132340.png](/__attachments/a_7c39cdf692cb9813fddd9cb763a9fb740a229709e039b1978bbb5c54114f4712/image-20260518-132340.png?cb=33db13dc545d6f22899a6c208c05a198) 5. Click **SAVE**. After saving: * The user is added to the **Users** list in Yarken. * The user can authenticate through Microsoft login. * The user receives access based on the assigned Yarken role or roles. * The administrator can later edit, deactivate, or update the user's access from the Users page. *** ** * ** *** ## Edit an existing user To update an existing user: 1. Sign in to Yarken as an administrator. 2. Navigate to **Admin → User Management → Users**. 3. Locate the user in the Users list. 4. Open the user record. 5. Update the required details, such as role assignment, default dashboard, or account status. 6. Select **SAVE**. Changes to roles or dashboard access apply based on the updated user configuration. *** ** * ** *** ## Delete a user Use this option only if the user has not contributed to any data or reports. **Procedure** 1. Locate the user you want to remove. 2. Click the **Delete** icon in the Actions column. 3. Confirm the deletion when prompted. The Yarken application prevents deletion of users who have contributed to data or reports. For such users, we recommend disabling the account by setting **Active = No** instead of deleting it. *** ** * ** *** ## Deactivate a user Deactivating a user prevents them from signing in while preserving their historical contributions, data ownership, and audit records. This is the recommended approach for users who no longer require access but have previously contributed to the system. **Procedure** 1. Sign in to the application as an **Admin**. 2. Navigate to **Admin → User Management → Users**. 3. Locate the user you want to deactivate. 4. Click the **Edit** icon in the Actions column. 5. In the **Edit User** screen, locate the **Active** toggle. 1. Set **Active = No**. ![image-20260116-070443.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_366699d9fb770b8d7132e5363abde144bab5f936722c893a2530c140757e4997/image-20260116-070443.png?cb=bb6130abd1aeedb36c81971f1674148a) 6. Click **OK** on confirmation popup. ![image-20260116-070312.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_d48e166321a6cd3b55758a1c098b4572f5bd362a60546607593c19099163e56c/image-20260116-070312.png?cb=940be11bf89f470245aa8297ee1660ee) 7. Click **SAVE**. The user is deactivated and can no longer sign in. After deactivating: * All historical contributions remain intact. * The user account can be reactivated later by setting **Active** **=** **Yes**. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Integrate Microsoft Entra ID (Azure AD)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/integrate-microsoft-entra-id-azure-ad.md) * [Supported Yarken roles](https://help.yarken.com/yd/supported-yarken-roles.md) * [Configure tenant access and domain controls](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-tenant-access-and-domain-controls.md) --- language: "en" --- # Admin Yarken Admin menu helps administrators to upload, organize, transform, validate, and govern data used across Yarken application. The following pages are available in **Admin**. * [Yarken Designer](https://help.yarken.com/yd/designer.md) * [Cost Explorer](https://help.yarken.com/yd/cost-explorer.md) * [Alerting](https://help.yarken.com/yd/alerting.md) * [Recommendations](https://help.yarken.com/yd/recommendations.md) * [Pipelines](https://help.yarken.com/yd/pipelines.md) * [Companion Metrics (Admin)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/companion-metric.md) * [User Management](https://help.yarken.com/yd/user-management.md) * [Audit Logs](https://help.yarken.com/yd/audit-logs.md) * [Background Processes](https://help.yarken.com/yd/background-processes.md) * [Settings](https://help.yarken.com/yd/settings.md) * [Cube Refresh](https://help.yarken.com/yd/cube-refresh.md) * [Data Dictionary](https://help.yarken.com/yd/data-dictionary.md) * [Insights](https://help.yarken.com/yd/insights.md) * [Insights Rules](https://help.yarken.com/yd/insight-rules.md) --- language: "en" --- # Admin, Users, and Settings Use this article to understand how Yarken administrators manage users, permissions, entity access, currencies, and system-wide settings. ## What is Admin, Users, and Settings? Admin, Users, and Settings is where Yarken administrators control access, configuration, and system behavior. This area supports the operating foundation of Yarken. It helps teams manage users, roles, entity access, currencies, exchange rates, AI settings, and other configuration areas that affect how data is viewed, analyzed, and governed. Strong administration keeps reporting controlled, planning consistent, and financial data visible only to the right people. *** ** * ** *** ## What you can do 1. Create and manage users. 2. Assign roles and control feature access. 3. Manage entity access for non-admin users. 4. Configure exchange rates and currencies. 5. Maintain actual and planning exchange rates. 6. Control which currencies are available for reporting. 7. Configure settings that support reporting, planning, and analytics. 8. Manage AI-related settings where enabled. 9. Support governance across data visibility, permissions, and system usage. *** ** * ** *** ## User access and roles Yarken access is role based. Administrators can assign users to roles that determine which parts of the platform they can access. Some users may need full access. Others may only need dashboards, reports, planning, or specific operational areas. Yarken also supports controlled user setup. Users can be added without immediately granting functional access, allowing administrators to create accounts first and assign access later. This helps organizations manage onboarding without exposing data before permissions are ready. Yarken can also support enterprise sign in through configured identity providers such as Microsoft Entra ID, OpenID, and Okta where enabled. During sign in, Yarken can match users by username or email and update stored user details when they differ from the identity provider. This helps organizations connect user access to existing identity and authentication processes while still controlling roles, permissions, and entity access inside Yarken. *** ** * ** *** ## Entity access Entity access controls which organizational entities a user can see. Admins have access to all entities. Non-admin users must be assigned access to one or more entities through User Management. Entity access is important for organizations operating across regions, business units, legal entities, or other reporting structures. It ensures users only see the financial and cloud data they are authorized to access. *** ** * ** *** ## Currency and exchange rates Yarken supports multi-currency operations across spend, cloud, budgets, forecasts, analytics, and dashboards. Administrators can configure currencies and maintain exchange rates by month and year. Yarken supports actual exchange rates for spend, cloud uploads, reporting, and dashboards. It also supports planning exchange rates for budgets and forecasts. This allows organizations to store original foreign currency values, convert values into base currency, and report in preferred currencies where enabled. *** ** * ** *** ## Governance settings Admin settings help maintain trust in the platform. Roles, permissions, entity access, currency configuration, and exchange rates all affect how users experience Yarken and how financial data is interpreted. These controls ensure users operate from the right level of access, with the right financial assumptions, and with consistent reporting rules. *** ** * ** *** ## What makes it different Admin in Yarken is not only about access management. It supports the governance layer behind technology finance. The decisions made here affect reporting accuracy, entity visibility, currency conversion, planning assumptions, and AI response boundaries. When Admin is configured well, teams can operate with confidence. Users see what they should see. Financial data converts correctly. Planning uses the right assumptions. Reporting stays consistent across regions, entities, and currencies. *** ** * ** *** ## When to use Admin, Users, and Settings Use Admin when setting up users, assigning access, configuring entities, maintaining currencies, updating exchange rates, or managing system-level settings. Use it when the organization changes, when new users join, when entities are added, when reporting currencies change, or when planning assumptions need to be updated. For detailed step by step instructions on managing users, assigning roles, configuring entity access, maintaining exchange rates, and updating settings, refer to the relevant user guides. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step [Security, Access and Trust](https://help.yarken.com/yd/security-access-and-trust.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related articles** [Multi-Entity and Multi-Currency](https://help.yarken.com/yd/multi-entity-and-multi-currency.md) [Navigation, Filters, and Search](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-filters-and-search.md) [Connected Data Sources (Integrations)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/connected-data-sources-integrations.md) [Security, Access and Trust](https://help.yarken.com/yd/security-access-and-trust.md) *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # Advanced integrations and automation ## Overview This section is intended for **Yarken administrators** responsible for configuring and maintaining advanced integrations with external systems. Yarken supports advanced integrations that connect your organization with external applications, cloud platforms, databases, and file storage services. These integrations automate data movement and operational workflows, reducing manual effort while keeping your Yarken data accurate and up to date. Yarken uses **Workato Embedded** to power these advanced integrations. You configure and manage connections and automation recipes directly within Yarken, allowing you to securely exchange data with supported third-party systems without leaving the application. Use advanced integrations when you need to: * Import data from external systems into Yarken. * Automate recurring or event-driven workflows. * Upload files for automated processing. * Synchronize information between Yarken and third-party applications. * Collect cloud optimization and recommendation data. * Reduce manual integration and data-processing tasks. ## How advanced integrations are implemented Advanced integrations are delivered through a shared implementation process between **Yarken** and **your organization.** * **Yarken** deploys and configures the required automation framework, integration recipes, and supporting components as part of your implementation. * **Your administrator** authorizes connections to external systems, manages authentication credentials, and monitors integration activity. * **End users** use the imported data within Yarken for reporting, analysis, and decision-making. The guides in this section describe the administrator tasks required after the integration has been deployed. ## Responsibility overview | **Activity** | **Performed by** | |--------------------------------------|--------------------| | Deploy automation recipes | Yarken | | Configure integration environment | Yarken | | Enable supported integrations | Yarken | | Authorize external systems | Your administrator | | Configure authentication credentials | Your administrator | | Start and monitor automation | Your administrator | | Review imported data | End users | ## How advanced integrations work Advanced integrations consist of several components that work together to securely exchange information between Yarken and external systems. | **Component** | **Purpose** | |---------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Connection** | Securely authenticates Yarken with an external application or service. | | **Automation Recipe** | Defines the automated workflow that retrieves, transforms, or sends data. | | **Data Mapping Template** | Maps incoming source fields to the appropriate Yarken fields when data ingestion is required. | | **Pipeline** | Processes uploaded data and makes it available for reporting and analysis. | The following workflow illustrates how these components interact. **External System** │ ▼ **Advanced Connection** │ ▼ **Automation Recipe** │ ▼ **(Optional) Data Mapping Template** │ ▼ **Yarken Pipeline** │ ▼ **Dashboards, Reports, Analytics, and Planning** **Note**: Not every integration requires all components. For example, an event-driven automation may only require a connection and an automation recipe, while a file-based integration typically uses a connection, recipe, data mapping template, and pipeline. ## Basic and advanced integrations Yarken provides two integration methods depending on your use case. | **Integration type** | **Description** | |----------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **BASIC** | Native Yarken connections and pipelines used for supported cloud storage providers, APIs, and recurring data ingestion. | | **ADVANCED** | Embedded automation powered by Workato for complex integrations, custom workflows, and supported third-party applications. | Use **BASIC** integrations when you're configuring standard Yarken data ingestion. Use **ADVANCED** integrations when you need to automate workflows or integrate with supported third-party applications through Workato Embedded. ## Before you begin Before configuring an advanced integration, ensure that: * Workato Embedded has been enabled for your Yarken environment. * You have a Yarken administrator account. * You have permission to manage **Connections** and **Pipelines**. * The required credentials for the external system are available. * Any required permissions or service accounts have been configured in the source system. Some integrations may require additional prerequisites, such as API keys, cloud provider permissions, or database credentials. Refer to the relevant integration guide for provider-specific requirements. ## Configuration workflow Most advanced integrations follow the same high-level process. 1. Prepare the required credentials and permissions. 2. Generate a Yarken API key, if required. 3. Authorize the required advanced connections. 4. Review and configure the automation recipe. 5. Test the integration. 6. Activate the automation recipe. 7. Validate the imported or synchronized data. 8. Monitor future executions and resolve any issues. The child pages in this section provide detailed instructions for each step. ## In this section Use the following guides to configure and manage advanced integrations. | **Page** | **Description** | |-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | [Configure Advanced Integrations](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md) | Learn about the onboarding process, prerequisites, and overall configuration workflow. | | [**Authorize Advanced Connections**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/authorize-advanced-connections-for-automation-recipes-in-yarken.md) | Configure and authorize connections to external applications and services. | | [**Manage Automation Recipes**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/manage-automation-recipes-in-yarken.md) | Review, test, activate, and monitor automation recipes. | | [Configure AWS Trusted Advisor Integration](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-aws-trusted-advisor-integration.md) | Import AWS Trusted Advisor recommendations into Yarken. | | [**Automate File Uploads from Cloud Storage**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/automate-file-uploads-from-cloud-storage-with-advanced-integration.md) | Configure automated file ingestion from supported cloud storage providers. | | [**Validate and Troubleshoot Advanced Integrations**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/troubleshooting-common-issues-in-yarken-advanced-integrations.md) | Verify your integration and resolve common configuration and runtime issues. | *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Connections](https://help.yarken.com/yd/connections.md) * [Pipelines](https://help.yarken.com/yd/pipelines.md) * [API Keys](https://help.yarken.com/yd/api-keys.md) * [Data Mapping Templates](https://help.yarken.com/yd/data-mapping-templates.md) * [Connected Data Sources (Integrations)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/connected-data-sources-integrations.md) * [Integrations, Pipelines \& Data Automation --- FAQs and Troubleshooting](https://help.yarken.com/yd/integrations-pipelines-data-automation-faqs-and-troubleshooting.md) --- language: "en" --- # Agent Sandbox Use this article to configure the Agent Sandbox controls that let supported Yarken AI workflows execute code and generate documents. ## What Agent Sandbox does Agent Sandbox provides an isolated execution environment for supported agent tools. It enables capabilities that need to process staged data, run analysis, or generate documents outside the AI conversation itself. Agent Sandbox settings control whether Yarken can use a sandbox provider that has already been configured for your deployment. The settings do not create or provision the provider. ## Before you begin You need: * **Admin** access to Yarken. * A sandbox provider configured for your deployment. If no sandbox provider is configured, enabling the Agent Sandbox settings has no effect. ## Open Agent Sandbox settings 1. Go to **Admin**. 2. Select **Settings**. 3. Under **AI** , select **Agent Sandbox**. ## Agent Sandbox settings | Setting | What it controls | |------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Enable Agent Sandbox** | The master switch for sandbox access across the deployment. When disabled, Ask Yarken and Automations cannot use the sandbox, regardless of their individual settings. | | **Allow Ask Yarken to use the sandbox** | Makes supported sandbox tools available to Ask Yarken, including analysis, staged datasets, and document generation such as PDF and PowerPoint export. Ask Yarken continues to work without these tools when the setting is disabled. | | **Allow automations to use the sandbox** | Lets scheduled Automations use the sandbox to generate formatted report attachments. Supported outputs can be attached as PDF or PowerPoint files. | The master setting takes precedence over the two individual settings. ## Enable Agent Sandbox for Ask Yarken 1. Set **Enable Agent Sandbox** to **Enabled**. 2. Set **Allow Ask Yarken to use the sandbox** to **Enabled**. 3. Open Ask Yarken and generate the report or analysis you need. 4. Ask Yarken to export the generated report as a PDF. The PDF is created through the sandbox and returned as a generated document. PDF export currently works best when the report uses a white background. A report with another background color may show a white border around the exported page. ## Enable Agent Sandbox for Automations 1. Set **Enable Agent Sandbox** to **Enabled**. 2. Set **Allow automations to use the sandbox** to **Enabled**. 3. Configure the scheduled Automation and its report output. 4. Run or schedule the Automation. When sandbox access is enabled, supported Automation outputs can be attached as PDF or PowerPoint files. When it is disabled, the Automation still runs and the notification is still sent, but the generated document remains attached in its original format. ## Troubleshooting | Issue | What to check | |--------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Enabling the settings has no effect | Confirm that a sandbox provider is configured for the deployment and that **Enable Agent Sandbox** is enabled. | | Ask Yarken cannot export the generated report | Confirm that **Allow Ask Yarken to use the sandbox** is enabled. | | An Automation sends the original document format | Confirm that **Allow automations to use the sandbox** is enabled. | | The exported PDF has a white border | Use a white report background and export the report again. | *** ** * ** *** ## Next step [Ask Yarken (Admin Settings)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken-admin-settings.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [AI settings](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-settings.md) * [AI Studio - Automations](https://yarken.atlassian.net/wiki/display/YD/AI+Studio+-+Automations) * [Ask Yarken](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken.md) --- language: "en" --- # AI Consumption The **AI Consumption** cube provides a flexible workspace for analyzing AI usage and costs across your organization. You can build custom reports to understand AI spending, token consumption, pricing, usage trends, and other AI-related metrics using interactive tables and charts. Use the AI Consumption cube to create reports that help answer questions such as: * How much are we spending on AI services? * Which models or providers generate the highest costs? * How many prompt and completion tokens are being consumed? * Which teams, users, or projects use AI the most? * How has AI usage changed over time? The Analytics workspace lets you drag and drop fields to quickly build reports without writing queries. *** ** * ** *** ## Before using AI Consumption Ensure that: * AI consumption data has been successfully ingested into Yarken. * The required AI dimensions and metrics are correctly mapped during ingesting AI Usage data. *** ** * ** *** ## Analytics workspace The Analytics workspace uses a drag-and-drop interface to build reports. ### Fields panel The **Fields** panel contains every metric and attribute available for reporting. Use the search box to quickly locate fields. Fields are organised into categories such as: * AI Metrics * AI Attributes * Entities * Timeline Simply drag a field into the required area of the Visualization panel. *** ** * ** *** ### AI metrics Metrics are numerical values used for calculations and aggregations. Common AI metrics include: | **Metric** | **Description** | |-----------------------|----------------------------------------------------| | Total Billed Cost | Total billed AI cost. | | Total Effective Cost | Actual cost after discounts or negotiated pricing. | | Total List Cost | Standard published pricing. | | Total Contracted Cost | Cost based on contracted pricing. | | Input Tokens | Total prompt tokens consumed. | | Output Tokens | Total completion tokens generated. | | Total Tokens | Combined prompt and completion tokens. | | Cached Tokens | Tokens served from cache. | | Consumed Quantity | Total AI consumption quantity. | | Pricing Quantity | Quantity used for pricing calculations. | **Note**: The available metrics may vary depending on your AI data source and configuration. *** ** * ** *** ### AI attributes AI Attributes provide descriptive information about your AI consumption data. Unlike metrics, which measure costs or usage, attributes are used to group, filter, and analyze the data from different perspectives. You can combine multiple attributes with AI metrics to answer questions such as: * Which users generated the highest AI costs? * Which AI models are used most frequently? * Which services or providers consume the most tokens? * How does AI usage vary by region, department, or billing account? The AI Consumption cube includes attributes across several categories. Supported AI attributes (expand to see the list) #### General information These attributes identify the source and timing of AI usage records. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------| | Entity Code | The entity associated with the AI consumption record. | | Loaded Date | The date the data was loaded into Yarken. | | Usage Date | The date when the AI service was consumed. | | Billing Period Start | Start date of the billing period. | | Billing Period End | End date of the billing period. | | Charge Period End | End date for the applicable charge period. | | Ingested At | Timestamp when the record was ingested. | | Month | Reporting month. | | Year | Reporting year. | | File Name | Source file used during ingestion. | | Transaction ID | Unique identifier for the usage transaction. | *** ** * ** *** #### Provider and service information These attributes identify the AI platform and services generating the usage. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |------------------|------------------------------------------------------------| | Provider | AI service provider (for example, OpenAI or Azure OpenAI). | | Publisher | Organization or publisher offering the AI service. | | Collector Source | Source from which the usage data was collected. | | Invoice Issuer | Billing organization issuing the invoice. | | Service | AI service being consumed. | | Service Category | Category of the AI service. | *** ** * ** *** #### Billing information Use these attributes to analyse AI consumption by billing structure. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |----------------------|-----------------------------------------| | Billing Account ID | Identifier of the billing account. | | Billing Account Name | Name of the billing account. | | Sub Account ID | Identifier of the billing sub-account. | | Sub Account Name | Name of the billing sub-account. | | Billing Currency | Currency used for billing. | | Pricing Unit | Unit used for pricing calculations. | | Consumed Unit | Unit in which the service was consumed. | *** ** * ** *** #### Resource information These attributes identify the user or resource responsible for the AI consumption. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------| | User | User associated with the AI request. | | Resource ID | Unique identifier of the AI resource. | | Resource Name | Name of the AI resource. | | Region ID | Identifier of the deployment region. | | Region Name | Geographic region where the service was hosted. | *** ** * ** *** #### Usage classification These attributes describe how the AI consumption is categorised. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |--------------------|--------------------------------------| | Charge Category | Category assigned to the charge. | | Charge Class | Classification of the charge. | | Charge Frequency | Frequency of the charge. | | Charge Description | Description provided for the charge. | | Interaction Type | Type of AI interaction or request. | | Pricing Category | Pricing model applied to the usage. | *** ** * ** *** #### Model and SKU information These attributes identify the AI model and pricing SKU associated with the consumption. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |---------------|--------------------------------------------------| | SKU ID | Unique SKU identifier. | | SKU Price ID | Pricing identifier for the SKU. | | SKU Meter | Meter used for billing. | | Model | AI model used to process the request. | | Model Version | Version of the AI model. | | Modality | AI capability, such as text or image generation. | *** ** * ** *** #### Pricing information These attributes provide pricing details for the AI service. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------| | List Unit Price | Published unit price before discounts. | | Contracted Unit Price | Contracted unit price after negotiated pricing. | | Commitment Discount ID | Identifier of the applied commitment discount. | | Commitment Discount Name | Name of the commitment discount. | | Commitment Discount Category | Category of the commitment discount. | | Commitment Discount Status | Status of the applied commitment discount. | *** ** * ** *** #### Tags and business dimensions Tags allow AI usage to be grouped according to business-specific metadata. Available tag attributes include: * Tags * Usage Pool * Application Tag * Product Tag * Service Tag * Team Tag * Department Tag * Environment Tag * Cost Center Tag * Customer Tag * Component Tag * Tech Stack Tag These fields help you build reports by organisational, operational, or application-specific dimensions. *** ** * ** *** #### Financial dimensions These attributes support cost allocation and financial reporting. | **Attribute** | **Description** | |---------------|-------------------------------------------------| | Account | Financial account associated with the charge. | | Cost Center | Cost center responsible for the AI consumption. | | Vendor | Vendor providing the AI service. | *** ** * ** *** ### Entities The **Entities** section allows reports to be analysed by organisational entities when multi-entity support is enabled. This enables reporting across: * Business units * Departments * Companies * Legal entities *** ** * ** *** ### Timeline Timeline fields are used to analyse AI usage over time. Examples include: * Date * Month * Quarter * Year These fields are commonly used in trend reports and time-series visualizations. *** ** * ** *** ## Example reports The AI Consumption cube can be used to build reports such as: * AI spend by provider * AI spend by model * Daily AI cost trend * Prompt versus completion token usage * Total token consumption by user * AI usage by department * AI cost by project * Top AI consumers * Cached token utilisation * Effective cost versus billed cost * AI consumption by workspace * Monthly AI spending trend *** ** * ** *** ## Tips * Start with a **Data Table** to validate your data before switching to charts. * Apply filters early to improve report performance. * Use Timeline fields when building trend reports. * Combine multiple AI metrics to compare costs and token usage. * Save commonly used reports for quick access. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Upload AI Usage Data](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-usage-data.md) --- language: "en" --- # AI, Insights, and Optimization Use this article to understand how Yarken connects AI, insights, analytics, FinOps, planning, and optimization workflows across the platform. ## Overview AI, Insights, and Optimization brings together the Yarken capabilities that help teams understand change, investigate cost and usage signals, guide financial decisions, and act on optimization opportunities. This page family covers Ask Yarken, AI settings, Insights, Recommendations, Analytics, FinOps and Cloud, Planning, Cost Transparency, and Business Cases. Use these pages when you want to move from understanding what changed to deciding what to do next. *** ** * ** *** ## What this section covers 1. Ask Yarken for natural-language technology finance analysis. 2. AI settings for Ask Yarken, Copilots, Playbooks, and Knowledge Base. 3. Insights for unusual spend and usage patterns. 4. Savings Recommendations for optimization tracking. 5. Analytics for deeper spend, variance, and performance investigation. 6. FinOps and Cloud workflows for cloud cost visibility and action. 7. Planning workflows for budgets, forecasts, workforce, and investments. 8. Cost Transparency and TBM structures for allocation, ownership, and showback. *** ** * ** *** ## Featured pages ### Ask Yarken Use Ask Yarken to ask questions about spend, variance, forecast performance, cloud costs, contracts, vendors, applications, and financial drivers in natural language. Ask Yarken uses governed Yarken data and applies user permissions. ### Manage Ask Yarken settings, Copilots, and Knowledge Base Use this page to configure the current AI settings that support Ask Yarken, including availability, organization context, search lookup, Knowledge Base, Copilots, and Playbooks. ### Yarken Insights Overview Use Insights to detect unusual spend or usage behavior, investigate what changed, and manage the response lifecycle. ### Savings Recommendations Use Recommendations to capture, prioritize, and track potential and realized savings opportunities. ### Analytics Overview Use Analytics to move from high-level dashboards into deeper financial and operational analysis. *** ** * ** *** ## How to use this page family Start with the page that matches your goal. Use **Ask Yarken** when you want a direct answer or analysis. Use **Manage Ask Yarken settings, Copilots, and Knowledge Base** when you need to configure current AI behavior. Use **Insights** when you need proactive monitoring. Use **Analytics** when you want deeper investigation. Use **Recommendations** when you want to track optimization work. Use the planning, TBM, cloud, and business case pages when you need to connect analysis to ownership, budgets, forecasts, and investment decisions. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step [Ask Yarken](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related articles** * [Ask Yarken](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken.md) * [Manage Ask Yarken settings, Copilots, and Knowledge Base](https://help.yarken.com/yd/manage-ask-yarken-settings-copilots-and-knowledge-base.md) * [Configure Playbooks and SOPs for Ask Yarken](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-playbooks-sops-for-ask-yarken.md) * [Yarken Insights Overview](https://help.yarken.com/yd/yarken-insights-overview.md) * [Savings Recommendations](https://help.yarken.com/yd/savings-recommendations.md) * [Analytics Overview](https://help.yarken.com/yd/analytics-overview.md) *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # AI settings Use this page to navigate the current AI settings available in Yarken. ## What AI settings control AI settings help administrators manage the current AI features available in the environment. Use this section to configure: 1. Ask Yarken availability and response guidance. 2. Copilot availability, including Dashboard AI Narrative. 3. Playbooks and SOPs for repeatable analysis. 4. Lookup Search indexing for name resolution. 5. Agent Sandbox controls for supported code execution and document generation. ## Current feature locations Use the current locations below when administering AI features: * **Ask Yarken and Ask Yarken Beta:** **Admin \> Settings \> AI \> Ask Yarken**. * **Automation notification recipients and allowed domains:** **Admin \> Settings \> AI \> Automations**. * **Agent Sandbox: Admin \> Settings \> AI \> Agent Sandbox**. * **Lookup Search indexing:** **Admin \> Settings \> AI \> Lookup Search**. * **AI Studio Copilots:** **Admin \> AI Studio \> Channels \> Copilots**. * **Playbooks:** **Admin \> AI Studio \> Orchestrate \> Playbooks**. * **Document-based Knowledge Base:** **Admin \> AI Studio \> Knowledge \> Knowledge Base**. The **Dashboard AI Narrative** is now a Copilot managed under **Admin \> AI Studio \> Channels \> Copilots**. Use the settings on the Dashboard AI Narrative Copilot card to enable or disable it for users. AI settings do not create source data, change financial records, or override user permissions. *** ** * ** *** ## Topics in this section 1. [Ask Yarken (Admin Settings)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken-admin-settings.md) 2. [Graph Explanation Copilot](https://help.yarken.com/yd/graph-explanation-copilot.md) 3. [Playbooks](https://help.yarken.com/yd/playbooks.md) 4. 5. [Agent Sandbox](https://help.yarken.com/yd/agent-sandbox.md) *** ** * ** *** ## Ask Yarken documentation For full Ask Yarken guidance, use the dedicated Ask Yarken page family: [Ask Yarken](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken.md) Use the Ask Yarken pages for user workflows, examples, conversation behavior, analysis use cases, Playbooks, Knowledge Base, Copilots, and troubleshooting. *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # AI Usage Data ## Overview The **AI Usage Data** screen allows you to upload and manage monthly AI consumption data used for AI cost analysis, reporting, and analytics in Yarken. AI usage data can be uploaded manually for individual months or automatically through [**Advanced Integration (Workato)**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md). Once uploaded, the data becomes available for [AI Consumption](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-consumption.md) analytics and reporting. The page provides a monthly overview of uploaded AI usage, including spend and the most recent upload date. **Note**: AI usage data must be uploaded before it can be analyzed in the [AI Consumption](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-consumption.md) cube under Analytics. ## Standardized Cursor AI usage data Cursor usage data imported through [**Advanced Integration (Workato)**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md) uses the following standardized field values for consistent AI cost reporting: | **Field** | **Value** | |------------------------|---------------------------------| | Service category | AI and Machine Learning | | Publisher and provider | Cursor | | Service name | Cursor | | Collector source | cursor-admin-api | | Charge category | Usage | | Billing account ID | \-Cursor | These values help ensure that Cursor usage is categorized consistently and is available for cost analysis in the [AI Consumption](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-consumption.md) Analytics cube. *** ** * ** *** ## Before you upload AI usage data Ensure that: * Your AI usage file matches the supported data format. * The reporting year is selected before uploading data. If your organization uses [**Advanced Integration (Workato)**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md), AI usage files can be imported automatically based on the configured integration schedule. *** ** * ** *** ## AI Usage overview The page displays one card for each month of the selected year. Each monthly card provides: | **Item** | **Description** | |---------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Month** | The reporting month. | | **Spend** | Total AI spend uploaded for the month. | | **Usage indicator** | Visual representation showing that AI usage data has been loaded. | | **Last Load** | Date and time of the most recent successful upload. | | **More options** | Access additional actions for the selected month. | Months without uploaded data display a spend value of **$0** and no last load information. *** ** * ** *** ## Upload AI usage data To manually upload AI usage data: 1. Navigate to **Designer \> Consumption \> AI**. ![Screenshot 2026-07-28 at 5.37.55 PM-20260728-120841.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_7b15bbb1032878911feed3fd9530ca1f0751e8d1715f38482dcddbf28877822d/Screenshot%202026-07-28%20at%205.37.55%E2%80%AFPM-20260728-120841.png?cb=8e358985989a6c369b90f3df6d18a805) 2. Select the required reporting year. 3. Locate the month you want to upload data for. 4. Open the **More options** menu on the monthly card. 5. Select **Upload**. 6. Choose the AI usage data file. 7. Complete the upload process. After the upload completes successfully: * The monthly spend is updated. * The **Last Load** timestamp is refreshed. * The uploaded data becomes available for reporting in the **AI Consumption** Analytics cube. *** ** * ** *** ## Automated uploads using Advanced Integration (Workato) If your organization has [**Advanced Integration (Workato)**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md) configured, AI usage data can be uploaded automatically. Workato retrieves AI usage data from the configured source system and uploads it into Yarken based on the integration schedule, eliminating the need for manual uploads. Automatic uploads provide: * Scheduled data ingestion. * Reduced manual effort. * Consistent monthly AI usage reporting. * Faster availability of data for Analytics. For information about configuring automated integrations, see [**Advanced Integration (Workato)**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md). *** ** * ** *** ## Upload rules Select the [**Upload Rules**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/use-upload-rules.md) tab to configure or manage the rules used when importing AI usage data. Upload rules determine how incoming AI usage files are validated and processed during ingestion. *** ** * ** *** ## Best practices * Upload AI usage data regularly to keep reports current. * Verify the reporting month before uploading a file. * Review the **Last Load** timestamp to confirm the latest successful upload. * Use [**Advanced Integration (Workato)**](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md) for recurring AI usage imports to minimize manual administration. * Validate uploaded data in the [AI Consumption](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-consumption.md) Analytics cube after each upload. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [AI Consumption Analytics](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-consumption.md) * [Advanced Integration (Workato)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-advanced-integrations.md) * [Upload Rules](https://help.yarken.com/yd/use-upload-rules.md) --- language: "en" --- # Alerting Alerting helps teams monitor spend, activity, and operational signals without checking reports manually. Use Alerting to define a monitored metric, set the condition that should trigger the alert, choose when the alert runs, and send a message through a configured notification channel when the condition is met. Alerting is useful for cost governance, FinOps reviews, month-end monitoring, budget control, vendor oversight, and operational follow-up. *** ** * ** *** ## What Alerting helps you do Use Alerting to: * Monitor spend and operational metrics against defined conditions * Trigger alerts when a threshold is crossed * Trigger alerts when expected data is missing * Run checks on a schedule or from an application event * Notify teams through configured channels * Support recurring controls for finance, IT, and FinOps teams Alerting turns recurring checks into repeatable controls. *** ** * ** *** ## Access Alerting To open Alerting: 1. Navigate to **Admin** 2. Select **Alerting** The Alerting page lists configured alerts and provides access to create, manage, import, and export alert configurations. *** ** * ** *** ## Alerting article family The Alerting help content is organized into focused articles. | Article | Use it for | |---------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Alerting** | Understand what alerts are, when to use them, and how alerts support governance workflows | | **Create alerts** | Create a new alert and configure the metric, condition, trigger, and notification message | | **Manage, Import, and Export Alerts** | Edit alerts, activate or deactivate alerts, run alerts manually, review run history, delete alerts, import alerts, and export alert configurations | Use the overview page to understand the feature. Use the task pages when you need to perform a specific action. *** ** * ** *** ## Before you use alerts Before creating alerts, confirm that at least one notification channel has been configured and enabled. Alerts use notification channels to send messages when the configured condition is met. Depending on the environment setup, channels may include Microsoft Teams, Slack, or other supported destinations. If the notification channel is missing or disabled, the alert may run but fail to notify the right team. *** ** * ** *** ## Alert types Alerts can run from a schedule or from an application event. | Type | Use it when | |--------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Schedule** | The alert should run at a defined cadence, such as daily, weekly, monthly, or another configured frequency | | **Event** | The alert should run when a system event occurs, such as data being loaded | Use scheduled alerts for recurring financial or operational checks. Use event-based alerts when the alert should respond to activity in the application. *** ** * ** *** ## Trigger conditions The trigger condition defines when Yarken should send the alert. Common condition types include: | Condition type | Use it when | |----------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Threshold** | You need to alert when a metric crosses a defined value or percentage | | **Absence of value** | You need to alert when expected data is missing | Threshold alerts are useful for spend controls, variance monitoring, and usage review. Absence alerts are useful for data-load checks, month-end readiness, and operational controls. *** ** * ** *** ## Notification behavior When an alert triggers, Yarken sends the configured message to the selected notification channel. A good alert message should tell the recipient: * What changed * Which metric triggered the alert * Which period or scope is affected * Whether the condition relates to a threshold or missing data * What action the recipient should consider next Clear messages reduce follow-up and help teams respond quickly. *** ** * ** *** ## Common use cases Alerting is commonly used for: * Monthly spend threshold monitoring * Vendor spend monitoring * Application spend monitoring * Cloud spend threshold alerts * Month-end data-load checks * Spend variance follow-up * Budget governance checks * Cost pool and tower monitoring * FinOps operational controls * Notification routing for finance and IT teams *** ** * ** *** ## Recommended practices Use these practices when designing alerts: * Configure notification channels before creating alerts * Use clear alert names and descriptions * Keep channel messages specific and action-oriented * Align scheduled alerts to reporting cycles * Use event-based alerts for data-load dependent checks * Monitor only the exceptions that need action * Keep alert ownership clear so the right team receives and acts on notifications Strong alert design helps teams focus on the exceptions that need action. *** ** * ** *** ## Troubleshooting alerts If an alert does not behave as expected, check: * Whether the selected metric has data for the reporting period * Whether the condition type and threshold are configured correctly * Whether the schedule or event trigger is valid * Whether the notification channel is configured and enabled * Whether the channel message is populated * Whether the alert has been activated If the alert runs but no notification is received, review the notification channel configuration first. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step * [Create alerts](https://help.yarken.com/yd/create-alerts.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Configure Notification Channels](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-notification-channels.md) * [Notification Channels](https://help.yarken.com/yd/notification-channels-admin-settings.md) * [Notification Channel Groups](https://help.yarken.com/yd/notification-channel-groups.md) * [Insights Rules](https://help.yarken.com/yd/insight-rules.md) * [Create an Insight Rule](https://help.yarken.com/yd/create-an-insight-rule.md) --- language: "en" --- # Alerts & Notifications — FAQs and Troubleshooting Use this page for customer questions and troubleshooting related to notification channels, notification channel groups, alerting, Insight Rules, Insights anomaly detection, and the Insights lifecycle in Yarken. *** ** * ** *** ## Understanding Alerts \& Notifications **Q: What notification and alerting capabilities does Yarken provide?** A: Yarken provides two connected monitoring and notification systems: | **System** | **Purpose** | **How it works** | |--------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Alerting** | Monitor a metric against a defined condition and notify a team when the condition is met | Rule-based: define metric → set condition → choose trigger → send message | | **Insights** | Detect unusual patterns in spend or usage data using statistical methods and manage the response lifecycle | AI-assisted: configure detection rule → system identifies anomalies → review, acknowledge, resolve | Both systems use **Notification Channels** and **Notification Channel Groups** to deliver messages to the right people via Microsoft Teams, Slack, or email. **Q: What is the difference between Alerting and Insights?** A: Alerting and Insights serve different purposes: | **Aspect** | **Alerting** | **Insights** | |-------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Purpose** | Notify when a specific condition is met | Detect unusual patterns and manage the investigation lifecycle | | **Trigger** | Threshold crossed or expected data missing | Statistical anomaly detected against learned baseline | | **Detection** | Simple condition check (above/below/within/outside a value) | Statistical methods (Z-Score, Moving Average, Prophet, CUSUM) | | **Output** | Notification message sent to a channel | Insight created with trend visualization, baseline, confidence score, severity, and suggested next steps | | **Lifecycle** | Alert fires → notification sent → done | New → Acknowledged → Resolved (or Reopened) | | **Investigation** | Recipient reviews and acts externally | Built-in workspace for review, acknowledgment, and resolution | | **Use case** | Governance controls, budget checks, data-load validation | Proactive anomaly detection, cost variance investigation, pattern monitoring | **Q: What are Notification Channels and Notification Channel Groups?** A: These are two related setup areas that control where and how Yarken delivers notifications: | **Component** | **What it defines** | **Example** | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Notification Channel** | The actual communication destination or integration | A Microsoft Teams webhook, a Slack webhook, or an email address | | **Notification Channel Group** | The recipient group that uses one or more channels | "FinOps Team" group that sends to the #finops Slack channel and a Teams channel | *** ** * ** *** ## Notification Channels **Q: What notification channel types does Yarken support?** A: Yarken supports three notification channel types: | **Channel type** | **How it works** | **Use it for** | |---------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Microsoft Teams** | Sends messages via an incoming webhook URL to a Teams channel | Operational alerts, Insights distribution, cross-functional collaboration | | **Slack** | Sends messages via an incoming webhook URL to a Slack channel | Insights alerts, operational visibility, governance activity tracking | | **Email** | Sends notifications directly to configured email recipients | Executive reporting, scheduled summaries, financial governance | *** ** * ** *** ## Notification Channel Groups **Q: What are Notification Channel Groups and why do I need them?** A: Notification Channel Groups define the recipient group that receives Insight alerts and operational notifications. They organize recipients, standardize communication flows, and manage notification delivery. You need groups because: * Insight Rules require a **Notification Channel Group** during rule creation * Alerts require a **Notification Channel** for message delivery * Groups allow you to route different notifications to different teams based on responsibility Groups are commonly used for Insights distribution, executive reporting alerts, operational notifications, governance workflows, and cross-functional reporting updates. *** ** * ** *** ## Alerting **Q: What is Alerting and when should I use it?** A: Alerting helps teams monitor spend, activity, and operational signals without checking reports manually. Use Alerting when you need to: * Monitor spend and operational metrics against defined conditions * Trigger notifications when a threshold is crossed * Trigger notifications when expected data is missing * Run checks on a schedule or from an application event * Support recurring controls for finance, IT, and FinOps teams Alerting turns recurring manual checks into repeatable automated controls. See [Alerting](https://help.yarken.com/yd/alerting.md). **Q: What alert types are available?** A: Alerts can run from two trigger types: | **Trigger type** | **Use it when** | **Example** | |------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------| | **Schedule** | The alert should run at a defined cadence (daily, weekly, monthly) | Monthly vendor spend threshold check | | **Event** | The alert should run when a system event occurs | Alert after data is loaded to confirm completeness | **Q: What trigger conditions are available for alerts?** A: Two condition types are available: | **Condition type** | **Use it when** | **Example** | |----------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------| | **Threshold** | A metric should not exceed or fall below a defined value or percentage | AWS monthly spend exceeds $50,000 | | **Absence of value** | Expected data should exist but does not | Monthly spend not loaded by the 5th of the month | *** ** * ** *** ## Managing alerts **Q: How do I manage existing alerts?** A: The Alerting page provides five actions for each alert: | **Action** | **Use it to** | |---------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Edit** | Update the alert name, description, metric, condition, trigger, notification channel, or message | | **Activate / Deactivate** | Turn the alert on or off without deleting it | | **Run** | Run the alert manually to test or validate the configuration | | **View run history** | Review previous alert runs and their results | | **Delete** | Remove an alert that is no longer needed | **Q: Can I import and export alert configurations?** A: Yes. **Import** --- Use when you need to load alert configurations in bulk, reuse a standard alert set across environments, or restore configurations. After importing, review each configuration before activating --- imported alerts may need environment-specific updates. **Export** --- Use to download alert configurations for review, audit, backup, or migration. *** ** * ** *** ## Troubleshooting Alerts \& Notifications ### Alert runs but no notification is received **Cause:** The notification channel is not configured, not enabled, or the webhook URL is invalid. **Resolution:** 1. Navigate to **Admin → Settings → Notification Channels** 2. Verify the channel used by the alert exists and is **Enabled** 3. Verify the **Webhook URL** is correct and has not expired or been revoked: * For **Microsoft Teams**: Check if the workflow is still active in Teams (Workflows \> Send webhook alerts to a channel) * For **Slack** : Check if the app and webhook are still active at 4. Test the webhook by sending a test message from the source platform 5. If using email, verify the recipient addresses are correct and not blocked by spam filters 6. After fixing the channel, run the alert manually to confirm delivery *** ** * ** *** ### Alert is not running on schedule **Cause:** The alert is not activated, the schedule is misconfigured, or the event trigger is not firing. **Resolution:** 1. Check the **Active** column on the Alerting page --- confirm the alert is activated 2. Review the trigger configuration: * For **scheduled alerts**: Confirm the frequency matches the expected cadence * For **event alerts**: Confirm the triggering event (e.g., data load) is occurring 3. Check **View run history** --- if the alert has never run, it may not have been activated after creation 4. If the alert was recently imported, verify it does not need environment-specific updates before activation 5. Run the alert manually to confirm it can execute successfully *** ** * ** *** ### Alert fires but threshold condition appears incorrect **Cause:** The threshold value, operator, or metric period is misconfigured. **Resolution:** 1. Open the alert in **Edit** mode 2. Verify the **metric** is correct --- confirm it matches the data you expect to monitor 3. Verify the **condition type** (Threshold or Absence) and **threshold position** (above, below, within, outside) 4. Verify the **threshold value** is entered in the correct unit (amount, percentage, or other measure) 5. Verify the **period or scope** --- the alert may be checking a different month or entity than expected 6. After correcting, save the alert and run it manually to validate *** ** * ** *** ### Notification Channel Group not appearing in Insight Rule creation **Cause:** The group is disabled, or no notification channels have been configured as a prerequisite. **Resolution:** 1. Navigate to **Admin → Settings → Notification Channel Groups** 2. Verify the group exists and the **Enabled** toggle is on --- disabled groups are not available for selection in Insight Rules 3. Verify the group's **Channel Type** matches the notification type you are trying to use in the rule 4. If the group references a Teams or Slack channel, verify the underlying **Notification Channel** is configured and enabled 5. If no groups exist, create one following the setup procedure *** ** * ** *** ### Webhook URL stopped working --- Teams or Slack notifications failing **Cause:** The webhook URL has been revoked, expired, or the workflow/app was removed from the target platform. **Resolution:** **For Microsoft Teams:** 1. Open the Teams channel 2. Check if the **Workflow** for webhook alerts is still active 3. If the workflow was removed or disabled, recreate it: * Select **More channel options** → **Workflows** → **Send webhook alerts to a channel** * Copy the new webhook URL 4. Update the **Notification Channel** in Yarken with the new URL 5. Test by running an alert manually **For Slack:** 1. Go to 2. Open the app associated with the webhook 3. Check if **Incoming Webhooks** is still enabled 4. If the webhook was revoked, create a new one and copy the URL 5. Update the **Notification Channel** in Yarken with the new URL 6. Test by running an alert manually *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Notifications](https://help.yarken.com/yd/notifications.md) * [Configure Notification Channels](https://help.yarken.com/yd/configure-notification-channels.md) * [Notification Channels (Admin Settings)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/notification-channels-admin-settings.md) * [Notification Channel Groups](https://help.yarken.com/yd/notification-channel-groups.md) * [Set up notification channel group](https://help.yarken.com/yd/set-up-notification-channel-group.md) * [Get Incoming Webhooks URL](https://help.yarken.com/yd/get-incoming-webhooks-url-for-microsoft-teams-and-.md) * [Alerting](https://help.yarken.com/yd/alerting.md) * [Create alerts](https://help.yarken.com/yd/create-alerts.md) * [Manage, Import, and Export Alerts](https://help.yarken.com/yd/manage-import-and-export-alerts.md) --- language: "en" --- # Analytics Yarken analytics is a powerful self-reporting feature which allows users to discover, interpret and communicate patterns in data that are not covered by the standard reports and dashboards in Yarken. Power users will have access to Yarken Analytics through the main menu. *(Note: Please refer to the Yarken* *Installation Guide on how to set up Power users)* The following cubes are currently available: * [Getting Started with Analytics](https://help.yarken.com/yd/getting-started-with-analytics.md) * [Expenses (Spend)](https://help.yarken.com/yd/spend.md) * [Consumer Expenses](https://help.yarken.com/yd/consumer-spend.md) * [Asset TCO](https://help.yarken.com/yd/asset-tco.md) * [Budget Planning](https://help.yarken.com/yd/budget-planning.md) * [Consumption Data](https://help.yarken.com/yd/consumption-data.md) * [AI Consumption](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ai-consumption.md) * [Companion Metrics](https://help.yarken.com/yd/companion-metrics.md) * [Business Case](https://help.yarken.com/yd/business-case.md) * [Forecasts](https://help.yarken.com/yd/forecasts.md) [Custom Dashboards](https://help.yarken.com/yd/dashboards.md) * [Chargeback Data](https://help.yarken.com/yd/chargeback-data.md) * [License Usage](https://help.yarken.com/yd/license-usage.md) [Multi Cube](https://help.yarken.com/yd/multi-cube-analytics.md) * [Analytics Functionality](https://help.yarken.com/yd/analytics-functionality.md) * [Analytics, custom dashboard --- FAQs and Troubleshooting](https://help.yarken.com/yd/analytics-custom-dashboard-faqs-and-troubleshooting.md) * [Recommendations Data](https://help.yarken.com/yd/recommendations-data.md) --- language: "en" --- # Analytics, custom dashboard — FAQs and Troubleshooting Use this page for customer questions and troubleshooting related to Analytics cubes, Custom Dashboards, filters, saved reports, cube refresh, and data visualization in Yarken. *** ** * ** *** ## Analytics cubes **Q: How do I choose the right cube for my analysis?** A: Match your question to the cube: | **Your question is about...** | **Use this cube** | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------| | Overall IT spend, budget variance, vendor spend, cost center analysis | **Spend** | | Which business units consume which services, consumer-level showback | **Consumer Spend** | | Cloud billing, provider comparison, service categories, resource-level costs | **Cloud Consumption** | | Budget vs. forecast performance, planning drift, baseline variance | **Budgets and Forecasts** | | Total cost of ownership by asset, asset to asset distribution, and asset count | **Asset TCO** | | Realized or potential savings, recommendation source (manual or cloud provider), recommendations on cloud resource or any asset type, | **Recommendations** | | Total cloud and non-cloud estimates, ROI, business case objective, migration strategy, and estimate tracking with companion metrics | **Business Case** | | Cloud cost projections, forecasted cloud spend on each teams, and forecast deviation with actual cloud spend | **Forecast (Cloud Forecast)** | | Allocating costs back to consumers, chargeback amount, and status | **Chargeback** | | Cross-cube analysis that combines measures or dimensions from multiple cubes | **Multi-cube** | | Dashboard-ready saved reports, custom widgets, and curated dashboard analysis | **Custom Dashboards** | | License utilization, product adoption, tenant license counts | **License Usage** | | Custom KPIs, rate-based metrics, non-financial indicators | **Companion Metrics** | If unsure, start with the **Spend** cube --- it covers the broadest range of dimensions. When using Analytics, the **Filters** panel opens by default with the current year and current month pre-selected. *** ** * ** *** **Q: Can I compare models within Analytics?** A: Yes. When custom models are defined, **dynamic measures** are automatically created in the Spend cube. You can compare default models (Spend, Budget, Forecast) with custom models using auto-generated measures. *** ** * ** *** ## Saved reports **Q: How do I save a report in Analytics?** A: After configuring your analysis (cube, dimensions, measures, filters, chart type): 1. Click **Save** in Analytics 2. Enter a report name and optional description 3. The saved report preserves your selected dimensions, measures, filters, and visualization type Saved reports serve as the foundation for: * **Custom Dashboard widgets** --- Custom Dashboards use saved reports as data sources * **Chargeback definitions** --- The chargeback definition report is a protected saved report **Important:** The default chargeback definition report cannot be deleted from Saved Reports. If a user attempts to delete it, a popup prevents the action. **Q: How do permissions work for shared reports?** A: Shared reports support separate **View** and **Edit** permissions: * **View access** allows users to open and interact with a report for ad-hoc analysis, but they cannot overwrite the original report. To preserve changes, use **Save As** to create a personal copy. * **Edit access** allows users to modify and overwrite the shared report using **Save**. **Q: Why is the Save button missing when I open a shared report?** A: The **Save** button is hidden when you have **View** -only access. Use **Save As** to create a personal copy with your changes. Contact the report owner if you need permission to update the original report. *** ** * ** *** *** ** * ** *** ## Custom Dashboards **Q: How do I create a Custom Dashboard?** A: Custom Dashboards allow you to create tailored views for recurring analysis: 1. Navigate to **Custom Dashboards** 2. Click **Create New Dashboard** 3. Add widgets --- each widget references a **saved report** from Analytics 4. Configure widget visualization type (chart, table, KPI, pivot table) 5. Apply widget-level and dashboard-level filters 6. Arrange and resize widgets using drag-and-drop 7. Save the dashboard Custom Dashboards support: * Multiple widget types (charts, tables, pivot tables, KPIs, Sankey charts, text widgets) * Dashboard-level and widget-level filters * Links to other dashboards (both custom and standard) via widget configuration * Hyperlinks in text widgets to external URLs * Graph Explanation Copilot on supported chart types *** ** * ** *** **Q: Can I link Custom Dashboards to other dashboards?** A: Yes. Custom Dashboards support linking widgets to other dashboards: 1. While configuring a widget, select the dashboard type --- **Custom** or **Default** 2. Choose the target dashboard from the dropdown 3. Clicking the link takes the user directly to the selected dashboard A toggle switch is available to activate or deactivate the link without removing the configuration. Dashboard titles can be renamed and text formatting can be adjusted. Additionally, text widgets support hyperlinks to external websites or internal resources. *** ** * ** *** **Q: What chart types are supported in Custom Dashboards?** A: Custom Dashboards support all standard chart types available in Analytics. *** ** * ** *** **Q: Can I use Z-Score upper and lower bounds in Custom Dashboards?** A: Yes. **Z-Score Upper and Lower Bounds** are available for supported line chart widgets in Custom Dashboards. The same prerequisites and settings apply as in Analytics. Use Z-Score bounds to compare current values with a statistical range calculated from historical data. They provide a visual comparison and do not create Insights or forecast future values. *** ** * ** *** **Q: Why is Grand Total hidden in my Custom Dashboard Data Table?** A: Grand Total is unavailable while a local table filter is active. Local table filters do not trigger another server query, so the existing Grand Total would continue to represent the complete dataset rather than only the filtered rows. To prevent a misleading total, Yarken hides Grand Total while a local table filter is applied. Clear the local table filter to display Grand Total again. *** ** * ** *** ## Filters **Q: How do filters work across dashboards and Analytics?** A: Yarken uses two levels of filters: | Filter level | Scope | Behavior | |--------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------| | **Global filters** | Apply across all widgets on a dashboard or all charts in Analytics | Entity, Year, Month, Currency, Expense Type | | **Widget-level filters** | Apply to a specific widget in Custom Dashboards | Override or refine global filters for that widget | *** ** * ** *** **Q: How do relative date filters work?** A: Relative date filters (current month, last month, current quarter, etc.) recalculate based on the current system date: | **Filter** | **Behavior** | |------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Is current month/quarter** | Applies only the current period --- ignores any year filter | | **Is last month/quarter** | Reflects the previous calendar month/quarter --- year is not considered | | **Is current year** | Not applied by default; must be explicitly selected | Custom Dashboards with relative date filters (Last 7 Days, Last 30 Days, Last Month) automatically recalculate --- no need to enter edit mode for the data to refresh. *** ** * ** *** **Q: How does the currency filter work in Analytics and dashboards?** A: Users can select their **Reporting Currency** from their profile under **Settings → Foreign Currency**. The available currencies include: * The environment base currency * Currencies configured under **Admin → Settings → Foreign Currency** Changing the currency re-renders all on-screen data instantly. Multi-currency values are supported across Analytics and Custom Dashboards. If no exchange rate is defined for a given month, spend for that month appears as zero in dashboards and reports. A conversion-only currency option allows currencies to be used for conversion (cloud data, budgets, forecasts) without appearing in reporting views. *** ** * ** *** **Q: What is the Pre-Aggregations toggle in Analytics?** A: The **PRE-AGGREGATIONS** toggle is available to **Admin users** in Analytics: | **Toggle state** | **Behavior** | |-----------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | **Enabled** (default) | Data is fetched from the pre-aggregated cube --- faster queries, but may not include the very latest changes until cube is refreshed | | **Disabled** | Data is fetched directly from the underlying database --- includes latest changes but may be slower | Use the toggle when you need to verify that recently uploaded data exists before triggering a full cube refresh. *** ** * ** *** ## Run Report behavior **Q: Why do I see a "Run Report" dialog when I change filters or fields in Analytics?** A: To improve performance, Analytics and Custom Dashboards use explicit **Run Report** behavior: * Previously, every change (adding a field, modifying filters, updating visual settings) immediately triggered a query * Now, the system detects changes and prompts with a **Run Report** dialog * The report is only re-run after you confirm --- reducing unnecessary backend queries This significantly improves responsiveness when working with large datasets. Make all your filter and dimension changes first, then click Run Report once. *** ** * ** *** ## Data export and import **Q: What file format is supported for import?** A: Import supports only **.json** files. Upload the export or configuration file in JSON format; other file types are not supported for import. *** ** * ** *** **Q: Which export formats are supported?** A: Export supports multiple formats, including **CSV** , **JPEG** , and **JSON**. The formats available depend on the visualization type you choose. For example, table-style views typically support CSV or JSON exports, while chart visualizations may also support JPEG image export. *** ** * ** *** **Q: Are report permissions preserved during export and import?** A: Permission handling differs between export and import: * **Export:** Sharing and edit permissions are not included in the exported report configuration. You must configure permissions again after importing the file. * **Import:** Permissions are preserved only when you explicitly select the option to retain them during the import workflow. If you do not select that option, the imported report uses the default access settings for the importing user. *** ** * ** *** ## Troubleshooting Analytics ### Analytics showing no data or incomplete data **Cause:** Data has not been loaded, cube refresh is pending, filters are too restrictive, or the user lacks entity/account/cost center access. **Resolution:** 1. Verify data is loaded for the correct model, year, and month in **Admin → Yarken Designer → Models → Expenses** 2. Check the **Cube Refresh** page for pending cubes --- refresh if needed 3. Review the current filters --- ensure Year, Month, Entity, and Currency are set correctly 4. Verify the user has the correct **entity access** , **account access** , and **cost center access** 5. If using the Pre-Aggregations toggle, try disabling it to query directly from the database 6. Verify allocation rules are configured --- unallocated spend does not appear in downstream cubes (Consumer Spend, for example) *** ** * ** *** ### Z-Score bounds do not appear on a line chart **Cause:** The chart may not meet the requirements for calculating the baseline and thresholds. **Resolution:** 1. Confirm the visualization is a **Line Chart**. 2. Confirm the chart axis uses a date or month field. 3. Confirm a measure is assigned to **Value**. 4. Confirm a suitable time filter is applied. 5. Confirm at least 6 valid historical data points exist before the visible chart period. 6. Confirm **Show Upper and Lower Bound** is turned on. If the requirements are not met, the chart continues to display without the Z-Score bound lines. *** ** * ** *** ### Z-Score Threshold and Lookback Data Points do not appear **Cause:** **Show Upper and Lower Bound** is not enabled. **Resolution:** Open **Z-Score Upper / Lower Bound** and turn on **Show Upper and Lower Bound**. *** ** * ** *** ### Lookback Data Points returns to 12 **Cause:** The entered value is below the supported minimum. **Resolution:** Enter a value from **6 to 365**. If the value is below 6, Yarken resets **Lookback Data Points** to the default value of **12**. *** ** * ** *** ### Z-Score bounds appear for only some lines **Cause:** When the chart contains multiple series, each series requires enough historical data for its own calculation. **Resolution:** Confirm that each series has at least **6 valid historical data points** before the visible chart period. *** ** * ** *** ### Upper and lower thresholds overlap the baseline **Cause:** The historical values have little or no variation. **Resolution:** Review the historical data used for the lookback period. When the standard deviation is close to zero, the upper and lower thresholds may appear on or close to the **Baseline (Mean)**. *** ** * ** *** ### Custom Dashboard widgets not rendering or showing "No saved reports" **Cause:** The saved report that backs the widget has been deleted or modified, or no saved reports exist. **Resolution:** 1. Verify the saved report exists in **Analytics → Saved Reports** 2. If the report was deleted, recreate it in Analytics and reassign it to the widget 3. If no saved reports exist, the dashboard displays "No saved reports" with an option to create a new report directly 4. Check widget-level and dashboard-level filters --- conflicting filters can cause empty results 5. If the widget displays correctly in edit mode but not in view mode, clear browser cache and reload *** ** * ** *** ### Filters not applying correctly across dashboards **Cause:** The **Apply Filter** button was not clicked, widget-level filters conflict with dashboard-level filters, or relative date filters are not recalculating correctly. **Resolution:** 1. Ensure the **Apply Filter** button is clicked after making filter changes --- filters do not auto-apply 2. If using Custom Dashboards, review both widget-level and dashboard-level filters for conflicts --- a known issue where combining both could cause inconsistent results has been corrected 3. For relative date filters, verify they are recalculating based on the current system date --- an issue where relative filters referenced the creation date has been corrected 4. For timeline relative month filters: **Is current month** ignores year filters; **Is last month** reflects the previous calendar month regardless of year 5. Clear browser cache and reload if filters appear stuck *** ** * ** *** ### Sankey chart truncated or nodes missing in Custom Dashboards **Cause:** Too many nodes are present in the Sankey chart, exceeding the rendering limit. **Resolution:** 1. Use the **Node Limit** option to control the number of nodes displayed 2. Nodes exceeding the limit are grouped under **Others** 3. If unallocated consumer spend is not appearing in Sankey charts, verify your environment includes the February 2026 fix --- unallocated consumer spend now displays correctly. Related bar charts continue to show this spend under "Unknown" 4. Null values in Sankey charts now display as **Unallocated** instead of blank *** ** * ** *** **Related content** [Analytics](https://help.yarken.com/yd/analytics.md) --- language: "en" --- # Analytics Functionality Analytics functionality is now covered in [Getting Started with Analytics](https://help.yarken.com/yd/getting-started-with-analytics.md). Use that page to understand the shared Analytics workspace, including fields, visualizations, filters, saved reports, report actions, pre-aggregations, and how Analytics pages work across Spend, Consumer Spend, Asset TCO, Budgets \& Forecasts, Consumption Data, Companion Metrics, Recommendations, Business Case, Forecasts, Chargeback, License Usage, Multi Cube, and Custom Dashboards. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Getting Started with Analytics](https://help.yarken.com/yd/getting-started-with-analytics.md) * [Analytics Overview](https://help.yarken.com/yd/analytics-overview.md) * [Spend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/spend.md) * [Budget Planning](https://help.yarken.com/yd/budget-planning.md) * [Multi Cube](https://help.yarken.com/yd/multi-cube-analytics.md) * [Custom Dashboards](https://help.yarken.com/yd/custom-dashboard.md) *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # Analytics Overview Use this article to understand what Analytics includes, how teams use it, and when to move from dashboards into deeper financial analysis. ## What are Analytics? Analytics in Yarken helps teams understand technology spend, performance, variance, and cost drivers across the business. It brings together dashboards, reports, analytics cubes, Cost Explorer, and custom dashboards so users can move from a high-level view of spend to deeper analysis across cost pools, towers, vendors, applications, consumers, entities, and time. Teams use it to understand what changed, where spend is concentrated, which areas are driving variance, and where further investigation is needed. *** ** * ** *** ## What you can do 1. Review total IT spend across the current financial year. 2. Track monthly spend against budget and forecast. 3. Identify top budget variances by cost pool and tower. 4. Analyze labor, vendor, application, cloud, solution offering, and consumer spend. 5. Drill into reports and dashboards for greater detail. 6. Use Analytics to explore spend across dimensions and cubes. 7. Compare spend, budget, and forecast performance over time. 8. Analyze cloud spend by provider, service, application, and share of total IT spend. 9. Use entity and currency filters to focus analysis by organization structure and reporting preference. 10. Create custom dashboard views for recurring analysis and reporting needs. *** ** * ** *** ## How teams use Analytics Most teams begin on the Home page. Home gives a fast read on overall technology spend, current month performance, projected full year spend, budget variance, and major spend categories. It helps users see where attention is needed before moving into deeper analysis. From there, teams use dashboards and reports to investigate specific areas. A variance in a cost pool can lead to tower analysis. A tower issue can lead to vendor or cost center detail. A cloud trend can lead to provider, application, or consumption analysis. Analytics is used when teams need more flexibility. Users can explore data across cubes, dimensions, filters, and time periods to answer specific financial and operational questions. Custom dashboards are used when teams need repeatable views for leadership reviews, operating cadences, or focused analysis. *** ** * ** *** ## Common questions Analytics helps answer 1. Where is technology spend concentrated this month? 2. Which cost pools or towers are driving budget variance? 3. Which vendors are contributing most to spend? 4. How is cloud spend changing over time? 5. Which applications or solution offerings are consuming the most cost? 6. How are actuals performing against budget and forecast? 7. Which consumers or business areas are driving demand? 8. How does spend look by entity, currency, or reporting period? *** ** * ** *** ## Core areas covered ### Home Home gives users an executive-level view of spend, trends, variance, and key cost categories. It is the starting point for understanding the current state of technology spend. ### Dashboards and Reports Dashboards and reports provide structured views into specific areas such as finance overview, tower spend, vendor spend, labor, cloud, applications, solution offerings, and consumers. Many dashboard charts support drilldown, allowing users to move from summary-level insight into more detailed reports. ### Analytics Analytics gives users a more flexible way to explore data across cubes and dimensions. It supports deeper investigation when standard dashboards are not enough. ### Cost Explorer Cost Explorer provides an interactive way to explore spend across the model. It helps teams investigate cost movement and understand how spend flows through the structure. ### Custom Dashboards Custom Dashboards allow teams to create focused views for recurring analysis, leadership reporting, or specific operating needs. *** ** * ** *** ## What makes it different Analytics in Yarken is not just reporting. It is connected to the same TBM and FinOps model used across planning, chargeback, and Ask Yarken. This means spend analysis is grounded in the same structures used for budget, forecast, allocation, and accountability. Teams are not looking at isolated dashboards. They are analyzing spend through a connected financial model. That makes variance analysis more useful, cloud and vendor insights easier to interpret, and financial conversations more consistent across IT, Finance, FinOps, and business stakeholders. *** ** * ** *** ## When to use Analytics Use Home when you need a fast view of current spend and major movement. Use dashboards and reports when you need structured analysis of a known area. Use Analytics when you need to explore data more flexibly. Use Cost Explorer when you want to investigate spend movement across the model. Use Custom Dashboards when you need a repeatable view for reviews, reporting, or ongoing monitoring. For detailed step by step instructions on using dashboards, reports, Analytics, Cost Explorer, and Custom Dashboards, refer to the relevant user guides. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step [FinOps and Cloud](https://help.yarken.com/yd/finops-and-cloud.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related articles** [Ask Yarken: AI-Powered Financial Intelligence](https://help.yarken.com/yd/ask-yarken-ai-powered-financial-intelligence.md) [FinOps and Cloud](https://help.yarken.com/yd/finops-and-cloud.md) [TBM and Cost Transparency](https://help.yarken.com/yd/tbm-and-cost-transparency.md) *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # Forecast Overview The **Forecast Overview** dashboard provides overview of annual forecasted data for a filtered year. It helps you understand how forecasts compare to budgets and how forecasted spend is distributed across cost centers, accounts, vendors, and months. ## Who should use this dashboard? Budget Process Owner, Cost Center Owner, or an individual who is interested in checking the forecast planning data. ## What is this dashboard used for? This dashboard shows a breakdown of forecasted spend by Top 20 Cost Centers, Top 20 Accounts, Top 20 Vendors, and Monthly Forecast Details. ## What questions does this dashboard answer? * What is the overall forecast and budget for the year? * How does the budget and forecast trend appear graphically across the major categories? *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Forecast The **Forecast** chart provides a high-level comparison of the annual forecast and budget in the filtered year. Use this chart to understand whether forecasted spend is trending above or below budget. ### Top 20 Cost Centers The **Top 20 Cost Centers** chart shows forecast versus budget by cost center. Use the chart to identify cost centers driving the largest portion of forecasted spend. You can spot cost centers that are forecasted above or below the budget. Click on any cost centers to drill into the **Cost Center Forecast Details** report. ### Top 20 Accounts The **Top 20 Accounts** chart highlights forecast versus budget by account. Use this view to understand which accounts contribute most to forecasted spend. You can identify accounts with significant forecast variances. Click on any account to drill into the**Account Forecast Details** report. ### Top 20 Vendors The **Top 20 Vendors** chart displays forecast versus budget by vendor. Use this view to identify vendors with the highest forecasted spend and compare forecasted vendor spend against budget allocations. Click on any vendor to drill into the **Vendor Forecast Details** report. ### Monthly Forecast Details The **Monthly Forecast Details** chart shows forecast versus budget by month for the selected year. Use this view to compare the monthly forecast and budget distribution. Click on any month to drill into the **Monthly Forecast Details** report. ### Forecast Details The **Forecast Details** table provides a list of all forecasts and budgets created in filtered financial year with the details such as CPI-LPI percentage, budget status, budget creator's name, and total budget. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart Name** | **Data Cube** | |--------------------------|-----------------------| | Forecast | Budgets and Forecasts | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Budgets and Forecasts | | Top 20 Accounts | Budgets and Forecasts | | Top 20 Vendors | Budgets and Forecasts | | Monthly Forecast Details | Budgets and Forecasts | | Forecast Details | Budgets and Forecasts | --- language: "en" --- # Annual Spend The **Annual Spend** report provides a detailed yearly view of IT spend with a monthly breakdown across accounts, vendors, cost centers, and expense types. This report helps you analyze spending patterns throughout the year and provides a strong foundation for budgeting, forecasting, and financial planning activities. --- language: "en" --- # API Keys API keys provide secure programmatic access to supported Yarken APIs. Use them when an integration, automation, script, or external system needs to call a supported Yarken API without using an individual user's credentials. For example, you can use an API key with the Yarken User API to retrieve users, update supported user attributes, disable users, and re-enable users. **Important:** Treat API keys as sensitive credentials. Anyone with a valid key may be able to access supported Yarken APIs available to that key. ## Before you begin Before generating a key, identify the integration or system that will use it and ensure that you have a secure location to store the complete key. *** ** * ** *** ## Generate an API key 1. In Yarken, navigate to **Admin \> Settings**. 2. Under **Platform** , select **API Keys**. ![Screenshot 2026-08-26 at 10.50.21 AM-20260826-052044.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_11e948e4ea7216aa9d4e3b6e70ea5d1b595c792819134ea53ed0339774ec0a5b/Screenshot%202026-08-26%20at%2010.50.21%E2%80%AFAM-20260826-052044.png?cb=b3ea94d703bfac70e8a8730494815141) 3. Click **Generate New Key**. 4. Copy the complete API key shown on the screen. 5. Store the key securely for use by your integration. **Important:** Copy the API key immediately after you generate it. Yarken displays the complete key only when it is created. If you navigate away from the screen, you cannot view the complete key again. After you generate a key, the **API Keys** table displays the following information: | **Column** | **Description** | |----------------|--------------------------------------------| | **Actions** | Provides the option to delete the API key. | | **Key** | Displays a masked version of the API key. | | **Expires At** | Shows when the API key expires. | | **Created At** | Shows when the API key was generated. | | **Status** | Shows the current status of the API key. | *** ** * ** *** ## Use an API key Include the API key when calling a supported Yarken API. The API or integration documentation identifies the required endpoint and request format. For the Yarken User API, you can provide the key using the `x-token` header: x-token: Alternatively, use the `Authorization` header: Authorization: Bearer Replace `` with the complete key that you copied when it was generated. **Note:** API keys are tenant credentials and are not associated with an individual Yarken user. Disabling a user does not revoke an API key used by an integration. For User API endpoints and examples, see [Manage users through the User API](https://help.yarken.com/yd/manage-users-through-the-user-api.md). *** ** * ** *** ## Where to use API keys Use API keys only with Yarken APIs and integrations that support API key authentication. Common use cases include: * Connecting an external system or integration to a supported Yarken API. * Automating supported administrative workflows. * Running scripts or other machine-to-machine processes that call supported Yarken APIs. * Managing users programmatically through the Yarken User API. Refer to the documentation for the API you are using to confirm the supported endpoints, request headers, and payloads. *** ** * ** *** ## Delete an API key Delete an API key when the integration no longer requires access or when you need to replace a key. 1. In Yarken, navigate to **Admin \> Settings \> API Keys**. 2. Locate the API key that you want to remove. 3. In **Actions**, click the delete icon. ![Screenshot 2026-08-26 at 11.07.09 AM-20260826-053727.png](https://help.yarken.com/__attachments/a_8d9642b3a5b1c8230e97d38ff8b136f0434706fef69061f3911a03d394403467/Screenshot%202026-08-26%20at%2011.07.09%E2%80%AFAM-20260826-053727.png?cb=59328d1c81c3eaacea80b1df8e8c7eee) 4. Complete the deletion as prompted. After you delete a key, integrations using that key can no longer authenticate with it. Update the affected integration with a valid API key if access is still required. *** ** * ** *** ## Security best practices To protect programmatic access to Yarken: * Store API keys in an approved secrets or credential-management system. * Do not include API keys in source code, documentation, tickets, emails, or other unsecured locations. * Share API keys only with approved integration owners. * Use separate keys for different integrations where appropriate. This makes it easier to replace or remove a key without affecting unrelated integrations. * Delete and replace a key if you suspect that it has been exposed. * Review the **Expires At** and **Status** values to identify keys that may require attention. **Important:** Deleting or replacing an API key can interrupt integrations that use it. Update the affected integration with the new key before retiring the previous key when continuity is required. *** ** * ** *** **Related content** * [Manage users through the User API](https://help.yarken.com/yd/manage-users-through-the-user-api.md) * [In-app user management](https://help.yarken.com/yd/user-management.md) * [User roles and permissions](https://help.yarken.com/yd/users.md) * [Add users manually](https://help.yarken.com/yd/add-users.md) * [Manage users manually](https://help.yarken.com/yd/manage-users.md) * [Settings](https://help.yarken.com/yd/settings.md) --- language: "en" --- # Application Purpose Spend The **Application Purpose Spend** report provides a detailed view of application spend for a selected application purpose. This report enables you to analyse how much is being spent to support a specific business purpose, compare year-to-date (YTD) performance against the prior year, and understand how that spend is distributed across hosting, cost pools, towers, cost centers, and individual applications. This report is accessed by drilling down from the **Spend by Purpose** chart in the **Application Portfolio** dashboard and is scoped to a selected application purpose. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Hosting Spend This chart shows a detailed breakdown of the monthly spend by hosting types for the filtered criteria. The hosting types include Cloud, Mainframe, SaaS, and Virtual. Click on any month to drill into transaction level spend for the given hosting type. ### Cost Pools The **Cost Pools** chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost pool. Click on any cost pool to drill further into the spend for the cost pool. ### Applications This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by application. Click on any row to drill into transaction level spend for the application. ### Towers The **Towers** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Tower. Click in any tower to drill into related GL transaction. ### Top 20 Cost Centers This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost centers. Click on a cost centers to see a drill down to the transaction level. ### Application Purpose Spend Details The **Application Purpose Spend Details**table shows the application spend trend for month-on-month. Spend is shown as YTD, prior year spend and variance for each month. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart name** | **Data cube** | |-----------------------------------|---------------| | Monthly Hosting Spend | Spend | | Cost Pools | Spend | | Applications | Spend | | Towers | Spend | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Spend | | Application Purpose Spend Details | Spend | --- language: "en" --- # Application TCO The **Application TCO**dashboard provides a complete breakdown of Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) for a selected application. It brings together application-related spend and shows how that cost is distributed across cost pools, towers, hosting types, vendors, labors, cost centers, assets, and cloud service categories. This makes it easy to understand what is driving the application's total cost, and where optimization opportunities may exist. ## Scope This dashboard includes: * Spend allocated to **Applications** asset type ## Who should use this dashboard? * IT Management * IT Finance * Technology Executives * Portfolio and Tower Owners * Cost Center Managers ## What is this dashboard used for? Use this dashboard to: * Understand the true cost profile of an application * Compare current year application spend to prior year performance * View how application spend distributed across different cost pools, towers, vendors, labours, and cost centers ## What questions does this dashboard answer? This dashboard helps answer questions like: * What is the total spend (YTD) for this application? * How does the application's spend compare to the prior year? * Which cost pools contribute the most to this application's spend? * Which towers are consuming the most cost? * What portion of spend is driven by: * Cloud hosting? * Labor? * Vendors? * Which cost centers are funding this application? * Is the application's spend trending up or down month-to-month? * Which cloud services are driving the application's cloud costs? ## Key benefits * Full TCO visibility for a single application * Clear cost driver identification within any application For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Spend Model The **Spend Model** uses a Sankey-style flow to visually show how spend moves through your TBM structure. Hover over any section to view detailed values. ### Monthly Spend This chart shows the monthly trend for month-on-month and cumulative year to date spend. Spend is shown as total spend and prior year spend for each month. Click on any month column to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. ### Monthly Hosting Spend This chart shows a detailed breakdown of the monthly spend by hosting types for the filtered criteria. The hosting types include Cloud, Mainframe, SaaS, and Virtual. Click on any month to drill into transaction level spend for the given hosting type. ### Vendors The **Vendors** chart shows a breakdown of spend by vendors for the given filter criteria. Click on any vendor to drill into related GL transaction. ### Labor The **Labor** chart shows a breakdown of application spend by labor category. The labor spend is shown as YTD spend and prior year YTD spend at cost pool and sub cost pool level. ### Top 20 Cost Centers This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost centers. Click on a cost centers to see a drill down to the transaction level. ### Monthly Tower Spend The **Monthly Tower Spend** chart shows the monthly application spend broken down by tower. Click on any tower to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Monthly Cost Pool Spend The **Monthly Cost Pools Spend** chart shows monthly spend broken down by cost pool. Click on any cost pool to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Asset Spend The **Asset Spend** chart shows monthly asset spend allocated to the filtered application from any assettype. Click on any asset to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Monthly Cloud Spend The **Monthly Cloud Spend** chart shows the application's monthly cloud spend broken down by service category such as Compute, Databases, Storage, and Networking. This helps you understand which cloud services are driving the application's cloud costs and how those services trend over time. Click on any service category to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Application Spend Details This chart shows the application spend trend for month-on-month. Spend is shown as YTD, prior year spend and variance for each month. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart name** | **Data cube** | |---------------------------|----------------| | Spend Model | Multiple Cubes | | Monthly Spend | Spend | | Monthly Hosting Spend | Spend | | Vendors | Spend | | Labor | Spend | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Spend | | Monthly Tower Spend | Spend | | Monthly Cost Pools Spend | Spend | | Asset Spend | Spend | | Monthly Cloud Spend | Spend | | Application Spend Details | Spend | --- language: "en" --- # Cost Center Application Spend The **Cost Center Application Spend** report provides a detailed view of application spend for a selected cost center. This report enables you to understand how a specific cost center's application portfolio is performing financially and where spend is concentrated across hosting types, cost pools, towers, and individual applications. This report is accessed by drilling down from the **Top 20 Cost Centers** chart in the **Application Portfolio** dashboard and is scoped to a selected cost center. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Spend This chart shows the monthly trend for month-on-month and cumulative year to date spend. Spend is shown as total spend and prior year spend for each month. Click on any month column to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. ### Monthly Hosting Spend This chart shows a detailed breakdown of the monthly spend by hosting types for the filtered criteria. The hosting types include Cloud, Mainframe, SaaS, and Virtual. Click on any month to drill into transaction level spend for the given hosting type. ### Applications This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by application. Click on any row to drill into transaction level spend for the application. ### Cost Pools The **Cost Pools** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Cost Pool. Click on any cost pool column to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Spend by Purpose This table shows the application spend broken down by application purpose. Spend is shown as YTD spend and prior year YTD. Click on any purpose to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Towers The **Towers** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Tower. Click in any tower to drill into related GL transaction. ### Cost Center Application Spend Details The **Cost Center Application Spend Details** table shows the cost center spend trend for month-on-month. Spend is shown as YTD, prior year spend and variance for each month. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart name** | **Data cube** | |---------------------------------------|---------------| | Monthly Spend | Spend | | Monthly Hosting Spend | Spend | | Applications | Spend | | Cost Pools | Spend | | Spend by Purpose | Spend | | Towers | Spend | | Cost Center Application Spend Details | Spend | --- language: "en" --- # Cost Pool Application Spend The **Cost Pool Application Spend** report provides an overview of application spend for a selected cost pool. This helps you analyze how application spend is structured within a specific cost pool and how it has changed compared to the prior year This report is accessed by drilling down from the **Cost Pools** chart in the **Application Portfolio** dashboard and is scoped to a selected cost pool. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Spend This chart shows the monthly trend for month-on-month and cumulative year to date spend. Spend is shown as total spend and prior year spend for each month. Click on any month column to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. ### Monthly Hosting Spend This chart shows a detailed breakdown of the monthly spend by hosting types for the filtered criteria. The hosting types include Cloud, Mainframe, SaaS, and Virtual. Click on any month to drill into transaction level spend for the given hosting type. ### Applications This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by application. Click on any row to drill into transaction level spend for the application. ### Sub Cost Pools This chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date broken down by sub cost pool. Click on any sub cost pool to drill into related GL transaction. ### Towers The **Towers** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Tower. Click in any tower to drill into related GL transaction. ### Top 20 Cost Centers This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost centers. Click on a cost centers to see a drill down to the transaction level. ### Spend by Purpose This table shows the application spend broken down by application purpose. Spend is shown as YTD spend and prior year YTD. Click on any purpose to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Cost Pool Application Spend Details This table shows the cost pool spend trend for month-on-month. Spend is shown as YTD, prior year spend and variance for each month. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart name** | **Data cube** | |-------------------------------------|---------------| | Monthly Spend | Spend | | Monthly Hosting Spend | Spend | | Applications | Spend | | Sub Cost Pools | Spend | | Towers | Spend | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Spend | | Spend by Purpose | Spend | | Cost Pool Application Spend Details | Spend | --- language: "en" --- # Hosting Application Spend The **Hosting Application Spend** report provides an overview of application spend for a selected hosting type. This report helps analyze how application spend is structured within a specific hosting environment and how it has changed compared to the prior year. This report is accessed by drilling down from the **Monthly Hosting Spend** chart in the **Application Portfolio** dashboard and is scoped to a selected hosting type. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Spend This chart shows the monthly trend for month-on-month and cumulative year to date spend. Spend is shown as total spend and prior year spend for each month. Click on any month column to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. ### Top 20 Applications The **Top 20 Applications** chart shows the top 20 applications by spend from most to least spend. Spend for each application is shown as spend YTD, prior year YTD and variance. Click any application to drill into related GL transaction. ### Cost Pools The **Cost Pools** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Cost Pool. Click on any cost pool column to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Top 20 Cost Centers This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost centers. Click on a cost centers to see a drill down to the transaction level. ### Spend by Purpose This table shows the application spend broken down by application purpose. Spend is shown as YTD spend and prior year YTD. Click on any purpose to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Towers The **Towers** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Tower. Click in any tower to drill into related GL transaction. ### Hosting Application Spend Details This chart shows the monthly application spend trend for month-on-month for a filtered hosting. Spend is shown as spend (YTD), prior year spend and variance. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart name** | **Data cube** | |-----------------------------------|---------------| | Monthly Spend | Spend | | Top 20 Applications | Spend | | Cost Pools | Spend | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Spend | | Spend by Purpose | Spend | | Towers | Spend | | Hosting Application Spend Details | Spend | --- language: "en" --- # Monthly Application Spend The **Monthly Application Spend** report provides an overview of your application spend for a selected month. It enables you to analyze how application costs are distributed, compare performance against the prior year, and identify the applications, cost centers, cost pools, and towers driving monthly spend. This report is accessed by drilling down from the **Monthly Spend** chart in the **Application Portfolio** dashboard and is scoped to a selected month. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Applications This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by application. Click on any row to drill into transaction level spend for the application. ### Cost Pools The **Cost Pools** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Cost Pool. Click on any cost pool column to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Top 20 Cost Centers This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost centers. Click on a cost centers to see a drill down to the transaction level. ### Spend by Purpose This table shows the application spend broken down by application purpose. Spend is shown as YTD spend and prior year YTD. Click on any purpose to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Towers The **Towers** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Tower. Click in any tower to drill into related GL transaction. ### Monthly Application Spend Details This chart shows the monthly application spend trend for month-on-month. Spend is shown as spend YTD, prior year spend and variance. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart name** | **Data cube** | |-----------------------------------|---------------| | Applications | Spend | | Cost Pools | Spend | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Spend | | Spend by Purpose | Spend | | Towers | Spend | | Monthly Application Spend Details | Spend | --- language: "en" --- # Application Portfolio The **Application Portfolio** dashboard provides a consolidated view of application spend across the organization. It enables you to analyse year-to-date (YTD) application costs, compare performance against prior year spend, and understand how spend is distributed across hosting types, cost pools, cost centres, towers, and business purpose. The dashboard combines high-level KPIs with detailed breakdowns to support financial visibility and cost transparency across the application landscape. ## Scope This dashboard includes: * Spend allocated to **Applications** asset type ## Who should use this dashboard? * IT Management * IT Finance * Technology Executives * Portfolio and Tower Owners * Cost Center Managers ## What is this dashboard used for? This dashboard is used to: * Monitor total application spend YTD * Compare current spend against prior year * Identify high-cost applications * View how application spend distributed across different cost pools, towers, and cost centers ## What questions does this dashboard answer? * What is the total application spend YTD? * How does current YTD spend compare to prior year YTD? * Which applications are consuming the most budget? * How is spend distributed across cost pools and towers? * Which cost centres are driving application spend? * How is spend aligned to business purpose? * What hosting models contribute most to application cost? ## Key benefits * Provides a consolidated financial view of the application portfolio * Enables variance and trend analysis at both summary and detailed levels For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Spend The **Monthly Spend** chart shows the month-on-month trend and the cumulative year to date spend. Spend is shown as total spend and prior year spend for each month. The cumulative dotted spend line predicts spend for future months based on historic spend. Click on any spend column to drill into the month and see the spend broken down for the month. ### Monthly Hosting Spend The **Monthly Hosting Spend** chart shows monthly application spend broken down by hosting type (Cloud, Mainframe, SaaS, and Virtual) for the selected year. The columns are stacked to show different hosting type available within a month. Click on any month to drill further into **Hosting Application Spend** report. ### Top 20 Applications The **Top 20 Applications** chart shows the top 20 applications by spend from most to least spend. Spend for each application is shown as spend YTD, prior year spend YTD and variance. Click on any application to drill into the **Application TCO** dashboard**.** ### Cost Pools The **Cost Pools** chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost pool. Click on any cost pool to drill further into the **Cost Pool Application Spend** report**.** ### Top 20 Cost Centers The **Top 20 Cost Centers** chart shows the top 20 cost centers from most to least spend. Spend for each cost center is shown as YTD and prior year YTD. Click on any cost center to drill further into the **Cost Center Application Spend** report. ### Spend by Purpose This table shows the application spend broken down by application purpose. Spend is shown as YTD spend and prior year YTD spend. Click on any purpose to drill into the **Application Purpose Spend** report. ### Towers The **Tower** chart shows the cumulative year to date and prior year spend broken down by TBM Tower. Click on any tower column to drill further into the **Tower Application Spend** report. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart name** | **Data cube** | |-----------------------|---------------| | Monthly Spend | Spend | | Monthly Hosting Spend | Spend | | Top 20 Applications | Spend | | Cost Pools | Spend | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Spend | | Spend by Purpose | Spend | | Towers | Spend | ## Drill down reports * [Monthly Application Spend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-monthly-application-spend.md) * [Hosting Application Spend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-hosting-spend.md) * [Cost Pool Application Spend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-cost-pool-application-spend.md) * [Cost Center Application Spend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-cost-center-application-spend.md) * [Application Purpose Spend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-application-purpose-spend.md) * [Tower Application Spend](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-tower-application-spend.md) --- language: "en" --- # Application Selection The **Application Selection** page lists all your applications and their spend at a glance. Use this page to quickly compare current spend against prior year spend across your application portfolio. You can sort, filter, and group the list to narrow down results. Click on any application to open the[Application TCO](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-application-tco.md)dashboard, where you can view a more detailed breakdown of that application's total cost and spend drivers. --- language: "en" --- # Tower Application Spend The **Tower Application Spend** report provides a detailed breakdown of application spend for a selected technology tower. It enables users to analyze how application spend is distributed within a specific tower across months, hosting types, cost pools, sub-towers, cost centers, and application purposes. This report is accessed by drilling down from the **Towers** chart in the **Application Portfolio** dashboard and is scoped to a selected tower. For detailed instructions on navigating dashboards and using filters, see: [Navigation and filters](https://help.yarken.com/yd/navigation-and-filter.md) *** ** * ** *** ## KPIs Spend (YTD) Total application spend for the selected year to date Total Prior Year Spend Total spend for the prior year. Prior Year Spend (YTD) Year-to-date spend in the prior year. Variance (YTD) Difference between current year spend (YTD) and prior year spend (YTD). Potential Savings Expected cost savings that could be achieved by following the recommendations. Realized Savings Actual cost savings achieved by implementing the recommendations. *** ** * ** *** ## Charts and tables Selecting any data point in a chart allows you to drill down into a more detailed view of the selected element. ### Monthly Spend This chart shows the monthly trend for month-on-month and cumulative year to date spend. Spend is shown as total spend and prior year spend for each month. Click on any month column to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. ### Monthly Hosting Spend This chart shows a detailed breakdown of the monthly spend by hosting types for the filtered criteria. The hosting types include Cloud, Mainframe, SaaS, and Virtual. Click on any month to drill into transaction level spend for the given hosting type. ### Applications This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by application. Click on any row to drill into transaction level spend for the application. ### Sub Towers This chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date broken down by Sub Tower. Click on any Sub Tower to drill into related GL transaction. ### Cost Pools The **Cost Pools** chart shows the cumulative year to date spend and prior year to date spend broken down by TBM Cost Pool. Click on any cost pool column to drill into the related GL transactions. ### Spend by Purpose This table shows the application spend broken down by application purpose. Spend is shown as YTD spend and prior year YTD. Click on any purpose to drill into the related GL transaction. ### Top 20 Cost Centers This chart shows the cumulative YTD spend and prior year YTD spend broken down by cost centers. Click on a cost centers to see a drill down to the transaction level. ### Tower Application Spend Details The **Tower Application Spend Details** table shows the application spend trend for month-on-month. Spend is shown as YTD, prior year spend and variance for each month. Click on any row to drill into the transaction level spend for the month. *** ** * ** *** ### Data sources The table below outlines the charts available on this page and the corresponding data cubes from which each chart retrieves its data. | **Chart Name** | **Data Cube** | |---------------------------------|---------------| | Monthly Spend | Spend | | Monthly Hosting Spend | Spend | | Applications | Spend | | Sub Towers | Spend | | Cost Pools | Spend | | Top 20 Cost Centers | Spend | | Tower Application Spend Details | Spend | --- language: "en" --- # Application Usage The **Application Usage** report provides visibility into how application licenses are being used across your organization. It helps you understand which applications are in use, who the vendor is, and how many licenses are currently consumed, before drilling into monthly usage trends. This report is especially useful for identifying high-usage applications and monitoring license adoption. [Monthly Application Usage](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-usage-monthly.md) *** ** * ** *** **Additional resources**: [Product Usage](https://help.yarken.com/yd/product-usage.md) --- language: "en" --- # Monthly Application Usage The **Monthly Application Usage** report shows the month-on-month trend of total license count for the selected application. From this chart, you can: * Track how application license usage changes over time * Identify increases or decreases in license consumption * Compare usage trends across months for the selected year *** ** * ** *** **Additional** **resources**: [Product Usage](https://help.yarken.com/yd/product-usage.md) --- language: "en" --- # Applications, Products, Services, and Consumers Use this article to understand how Yarken connects technology spend to applications, products, services, solution offerings, and consumers. ## Connect technology cost to business consumption Applications, Products, Services, and Consumers help teams understand how technology spend supports the business. Yarken uses asset and solution structures to connect spend to applications, products, services, solution offerings, and consumers. This helps teams move beyond financial categories and see what technology services cost, who uses them, and where accountability belongs. *** ** * ** *** ## What you can do 1. Analyze spend by application, product, or service. 2. Review solution offering spend for the current period. 3. Understand which consumers are using technology services. 4. Connect spend from assets into applications, products, and services. 5. Review unallocated asset spend that has not yet been distributed. 6. Track solution offering spend by cost pool, tower, and cost center. 7. Support showback and chargeback with consumer level spend. 8. Understand service consumption across business units or consumer groups. *** ** * ** *** ## Applications, Products, and Services Applications, Products, and Services represent the technology assets and offerings that consume or carry spend. Asset spend can be consolidated into applications, products, or services. Once allocated, this spend can flow into solution offerings and support reporting on the cost of technology services. This helps teams understand the total cost of applications and services, not only the vendors, accounts, or cost centers behind them. *** ** * ** *** ## Solution Offerings Solution Offerings help represent the services or offerings delivered to the business. Yarken can report on solution offering spend and show how cost is distributed across related cost pools, towers, cost centers, and monthly spend detail. Solution Offering Spend on Home shows the top solution offerings by spend, giving teams a fast view of which services are driving cost. *** ** * ** *** ## Consumers Consumers represent the business users or groups consuming technology services. The Consumers layer helps teams understand who uses IT services and how spend should be assigned or reported across the organization. Consumer spend supports showback, chargeback, reporting, and business accountability. *** ** * ** *** ## Unallocated asset spend Unallocated asset spend shows asset level spend that has not yet been distributed to applications, products, or services. This is important because unallocated spend can block downstream visibility into solution offerings and consumers. Reviewing unallocated asset spend helps teams validate that cost is flowing correctly through the model and that applications, products, and services reflect the right cost base. *** ** * ** *** ## How teams use it Technology owners use these views to understand the cost of applications, platforms, products, and services. Finance teams use them to connect spend to business consumption and improve cost transparency. Business leaders use consumer views to understand which services their teams consume and how those services affect overall technology cost. Together, these layers help Yarken translate technology spend into business meaningful accountability. *** ** * ** *** ## What makes it different Applications, Products, Services, and Consumers connect the technical view of IT to the business view of value and consumption. Spend is not left at the GL, vendor, or cost center level. It is connected to what the business actually uses. This creates a stronger foundation for service costing, showback, chargeback, investment decisions, and TBM aligned reporting. *** ** * ** *** ## When to use Applications, Products, Services, and Consumers Use these views when you need to understand service cost, application cost, product cost, or consumer demand. Use unallocated asset spend when you need to identify gaps in allocation. Use solution and consumer views when preparing for showback, chargeback, service reviews, or business unit discussions. For detailed step by step instructions on asset allocation, solution offerings, consumer mapping, unallocated asset spend, and related reports, refer to the relevant user guides. *** ** * ** *** ## Next step [Portfolio Views](https://help.yarken.com/yd/portfolio-views.md) *** ** * ** *** **Related articles** [Data Models and Designer](https://help.yarken.com/yd/data-models-and-designer.md) [Cost Flow Explorer](https://help.yarken.com/yd/cost-flow-explorer.md) [Chargeback and Governance](https://help.yarken.com/yd/chargeback-and-governance.md) [Portfolio Views](https://help.yarken.com/yd/portfolio-views.md) *** ** * ** *** --- language: "en" --- # Applications (Menu) The Applications reports and dashboards provides an overview of your Application spend, with an Application Portfolio showing your Top 20 Applications and your applications cost pools, monthly spend, cost centres, towers and spend by purpose. It also includes an Application TCO report where you can see a detailed view of a single application. This enables you to control costs, and mitigate application duplication to gain increased value from your applications throughout its life cycle. * [Application Portfolio](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-portfolio.md) The Application Portfolio dashboard provides a consolidated view of application spend across the organization. It enables you to analyse year-to-date (YTD) application costs, compare performance against prior year spend, and understand how spend is distributed across hosting types, cost pools, cost centres, towers, and business purpose. The dashboard combines high-level KPIs with detailed breakdowns to support financial visibility and cost transparency across the application landscape. * [Application TCO](https://help.yarken.com/yd/application-application-tco.md) The Application TCO dashboard provides a complete breakdown of Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) for a selected application. It brings together application-related spend and shows how that cost is distributed across cost pools, towers, hosting types, vendors, labors, cost centers, assets, and cloud service categories. This makes it easy to understand what is driving the application's total cost, and where optimization opportunities may exist. * [Product Portfolio](https://help.yarken.com/yd/product-portfolio.md) * [Product TCO](https://help.yarken.com/yd/product-product-tco.md) * [Service Portfolio](https://help.yarken.com/yd/service-portfolio.md) * [Service TCO](https://help.yarken.com/yd/service-service-tco.md) [Next Page](https://help.yarken.com/llms-full.txt/1)